Assist Document - SONYRUS :: OnLine Store

Transcription

DSC-F828
SERVICE MANUAL
LEVEL
1
US Model
Canadian Model
AEP Model
UK Model
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
Korea Model
Tourist Model
Chinese Model
Japanese Model
Ver 1.0 2003. 12
Revision History
Link
SPECIFICATIONS
SELF DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
ORNAMENTAL PARTS
• INSTRUCTION MANUAL is shown at the end of this document.
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
DSC-F828
SPECIFICATIONS
x Camera
[System]
Image device 11 mm (2/3 type) color
CCD
4-color filter (RGBE)
Total pixels number of camera
Approx. 8 314 000 pixels
Effective pixels number of camera
Lens
Carl Zeiss Vario-Sonnar T*
7.1× zoom lens
f=7.1 to 51 mm
(35 mm camera conversion: 28 to
200 mm)
F2.0-2.8
Filter diameter: 58 mm (2 3/8 inches)
Exposure control
Automatic, Shutter speed priority,
Aperture priority, Manual exposure,
Scene selection (4 modes)
White balance
Automatic, Daylight, Cloudy,
Fluorescent, Incandescent, Flash,
One-push
File format (DCF compliant)
Still images: Exif Ver. 2.2, JPEG
compliant, RAW, TIFF, DPOF
compatible
Audio with still image: MPEG1
compliant (Monaural)
Movies: MPEG1 compliant
(Monaural)
Recording medium
“Memory Stick”, Microdrive,
CompactFlash card (TypeI/TypeII)
Flash
Recommended distance (when ISO
sensitivity is set to Auto)
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)
0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
10 feet 10 inches) (T)
Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)
[Output connectors]
[LCD screen]
x AC-L15A/L15B AC Adaptor
LCD panel used
4.6 cm (1.8 type) TFT drive
Total number of dots
134 400 (560×240) dots
Power requirements
AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption
0.35 − 0.18 A
Power consumption
18 W
Output voltage
8.4 V DC, 1.5 A
Operating temperature range
0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
Storage temperature range
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
Maximum dimensions
Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
(2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D),
excluding projecting parts
Mass
Approx. 190 g (6.7 oz) excluding
power cord (mains lead)
[Finder]
LCD panel used
235 200 (980×240) dots
[Power, general]
Used battery pack
NP-FM50
Power requirements
7.2 V
Power consumption (during shooting with LCD
screen on)
2.2 W
0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F)
(When using the Microdrive: +5° to
+40°C (41° to +104°F))
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
Dimensions (lens: W-end)
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm
(5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)
(W/H/D, protruding portions not
included)
Mass
Approx. 955 g (33.7 oz) (battery
pack NP-FM50, “Memory Stick,”
shoulder strap, lens cap, and so on
included)
Microphone Electret condenser microphone
Speaker
Dynamic speaker
Exif Print
Compatible
PRINT Image Matching II
Compatible
PictBridge
Compatible
A/V OUT (MONO) jack (Monaural)
Minijack
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced,
sync negative
Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load)
Output impedance 2.2 kΩ
Accessory jack
Mini-minijack (ø 2.5 mm)
USB jack
mini-B
USB communication
Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0 HighSpeed compliant)
x NP-FM50 battery pack
Used battery
Lithium-ion battery
Maximum voltage
DC 8.4 V
Nominal voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Adaptor (1)
Power cord (mains lead) (1)
USB cable (1)
Battery pack NP-FM50 (1)
A/V connecting cable (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
Lens cap (1)
Lens cap strap (1)
Lens hood (1)
CD-ROM (USB driver: SPVD-013) (1)
CD-ROM (Image Data Converter) (1)
Operating Instructions (1)
Design and specifications are subject to change
without notice.
—2—
DSC-F828
CAUTION
Use of controls or adjustments or performance
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION :
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1.
2.
3.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
4.
Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
—3—
DSC-F828
[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]
Self-diagnosis display
• C: ss: ss
The contents which can be handled
by customer, are displayed.
• E: ss: ss
by engineer, are displayed.
Display Code
Countermeasure
Cause
Caution Display During Error
C:32:01
Turn off the main power then back on.
Trouble with hardware.
SYSTEM ERROR
C:13:01
Replace the memory stick.
Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.
• The type of memory stick that cannot be
used by this machine, is inserted.
• Data is damaged.
• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.
MEDIA ERROR
E:91:01
Checking of flash unit or replacement of
flash unit.
Abnormality when flash is being
charged.
Flash LED
Flash display
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
Checking of lens drive circuit
When failed in the focus initialization.
E:61:00 *1
E61:10 *1
Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.
*1: The error display is given in two ways.
—4—
—
DSC-F828
MAIN PARTS
Note:
• Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service.
Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The parts numbers of such as a cabinet are also appeared in this section.
Refer to the parts number mentioned below the name of parts to order.
1.
ORNAMENTAL PARTS
LCD window adhesive sheet
3-087-155-01
LCD window
3-086-480-01
Jack cover
3-087-153-01
—5—
DSC-F828
Checking supplied accessories.
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.
Power cord (Main lead) (1)
(AEP, E model)
0 1-769-608-11
(AUS model)
0 1-696-819-11
(UK, HK model)
0 1-783-374-11
(US, CND model)
0 1-790-107-22
(JE, J model)
0 1-790-732-12
(KR model)
0 1-776-985-11
(CH model)
0 1-782-476-13
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)
(US, CND, J model)
3-087-331-01
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1)
(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS,
CH model)
3-087-330-01
AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A)
0 1-477-533-51
1-824-111-11
NP-FM50 battery pack (1)
(not supplied)
USB cable (1)
1-827-038-11
Lens cap (1)
X-3952-016-1
String assy cap
X-3953-980-1
Lens hood (1)
3-086-481-01
2-pin conversion adaptor (1)
(JE model)
1-569-007-12
(E model)
1-569-008-12
S-houlder strap (1)
3-071-638-11
Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)
1-543-798-21
CD-ROM
(Image Data Converter) (1)
3-087-661-01
Other accessories
3-084-996-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE)(J)
3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)
(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)
3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
(AEP,E,JE)
3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)
• Abbreviation
CND : Canadian model
AUS : Australian model
CH : Chinese model
HK : Hong Kong model
KR : Korea model
JE : Tourist model
J
: Japanese model
3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE)
(E,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP)
3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)
3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)
3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J)
3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW
(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/
PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/
SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)
—6—
Note :
The components identified by
mark 0 or dotted line with mark
0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number
specified.
Note :
Les composants identifiés par
une marque 0 sont critiques
pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une
pièce portant le numéro spécifié.
DSC-F828
9-876-279-41
Sony EMCS Co.
—8—
2003L1600-1
©2003.12
Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
3-084-996-11(1)
Getting started ________________________
Shooting still images __________________
Digital Still Camera
Viewing still images ___________________
Operating Instructions
Deleting still images ___________________
Before operating the unit, please read this manual thoroughly, and
retain it for future reference.
Before advanced operations _____________
Owner’s Record
The model and serial numbers are located on the bottom. Record the
serial number in the space provided below. Refer to these numbers
whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding this product.
Model No. DSC-F828
Serial No.
Advanced still image shooting____________
Advanced still image viewing_____________
Still image editing ______________________
Still image printing ______________________
(PictBridge printer)
Enjoying movies________________________
Enjoying images on your computer ______
Troubleshooting ________________________
DSC-F828
Additional information ___________________
Index______________________________
© 2003 Sony Corporation
WARNING
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do
not expose the unit to rain or
moisture.
CAUTION
The use of optical instruments with this
product will increase eye hazard.
of procedures other than those specified
herein may result in hazardous radiation
exposure.
For the Customers in the U.S.A.
This symbol is intended to
alert the user to the presence
of important operating and
maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature
accompanying the appliance.
If you have any questions about this product,
you may call:
Sony Customer Information Services Center
1-800-222-SONY (7669)
The number below is for the FCC related
matters only.
Regulatory Information
Declaration of Conformity
Trade Name:
SONY
Model No.:
DSC-F828
Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc.
Address:
680 Kinderkamack
Road, Oradell, NJ
07649 U.S.A.
Telephone No.: 201-930-6972
This symbol is intended to
alert the user to the presence
of uninsulated “dangerous
voltage” within the product’s
enclosure that may be of
sufficient magnitude to
constitute a risk of electric
shock to persons.
2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
CAUTION
You are cautioned that any changes or
modifications not expressly approved in this
manual could void your authority to operate
this equipment.
Note:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
interference in a residential installation. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined
by turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the interference
by one or more of the following measures:
—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
—Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
circuit different from that to which the
receiver is connected.
—Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/TV technician for help.
The supplied interface cable must be used
with the equipment in order to comply with
the limits for a digital device pursuant to
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.
For the Customers in the U.S.A.
and Canada
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION
BATTERIES
Lithium-Ion batteries are
recyclable.
You can help preserve our
environment by returning your
used rechargeable batteries to
the collection and recycling location nearest
you.
If the plug supplied with this equipment has a
detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the
fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never
use the plug without the fuse cover. If you
should lose the fuse cover, please contact your
nearest Sony service station.
For the Customers in Europe
This product has been tested and found
compliant with the limits sets out in the EMC
Directive for using connection cables shorter
than 3 meters (9.8 feet).
Notice
If static electricity or electromagnetism causes
data transfer to discontinue midway (fail),
restart the application or disconnect and
connect the USB cable again.
Certain countries or regions may regulate
disposal of the battery used to power this
product. Please consult with your local
authority.
For more information regarding recycling of
rechargeable batteries, call toll free
1-800-822-8837, or visit
http://www.rbrc.org/
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking
Lithium-Ion batteries.
CAUTION
Attention
TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK,
MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO
WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.
The electromagnetic fields at the specific
frequencies may influence the picture and
sound of this digital camera.
Notice for the customers in the
United Kingdom
A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is
fitted to this equipment for your safety and
convenience.
Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be
replaced, a fuse of the same rating as the
supplied one and approved by ASTA or BSI to
BS 1362, (i.e., marked with
or mark)
must be used.
3
Before using your camera
Trial recording
Do not shake or strike the camera
Before you record one-time events, you may
want to make a trial recording to make sure
that the camera is working correctly.
In addition to malfunctions and inability to
record images, this may render the recording
medium unusable or image data breakdown,
damage or loss may occur.
No compensation for contents of the
recording
Contents of the recording cannot be
compensated for if recording or playback is
not possible due to a malfunction of your
camera or recording medium, etc.
Back up recommendation
To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always
copy (back up) data to a disk.
Notes on image data compatibility
• This camera conforms with the Design rule
for Camera File system universal standard
established by the JEITA (Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries
Association).
• Playback of images recorded with your
camera on other equipment and playback of
images recorded or edited with other
equipment on your camera are not
guaranteed.
Precaution on copyright
Television programs, films, video tapes, and
other materials may be copyrighted.
Unauthorized recording of such materials may
be contrary to the provision of the copyright
laws.
4
LCD screen, LCD finder (only models
with an LCD finder) and lens
• The LCD screen and the LCD finder are
manufactured using extremely highprecision technology so over 99.99% of the
pixels are operational for effective use.
However, there may be some tiny black
points and/or bright points (white, red, blue
or green in color) that constantly appear on
the LCD screen and the LCD finder. These
points are normal in the manufacturing
process and do not affect the recording in
any way.
• Be careful when placing the camera near a
window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD
screen, the finder or the lens to direct
sunlight for long periods may cause
malfunctions.
• Do not press the LCD screen hardly. The
screen may be uneven and that may cause a
malfunction.
• Images may be trailed on the LCD screen in
a cold location. This is not a malfunction.
The zoom lens
This camera is equipped with zoom lens. Be
careful not to bump the lens, and be careful
not to apply force to it.
Remove dirt from the surface of the
flash
If the dirt changes color or sticks to the
surface of the flash due to the heat of the flash,
sufficient light may not be emitted.
Do not get the camera wet
When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or
under similar conditions, be careful not to get
the camera wet. If water gets inside of the
camera, it may cause the camera to
malfunction, sometimes beyond repair. If
moisture condensation occurs, see page 143
and follow the instructions on how to remove
it before using the camera.
Do not expose the camera to sand or
dust
Using the camera in sandy or dusty locations
may cause a malfunction.
Do not aim the camera at the sun or
other bright light
This may cause irrecoverable damage to your
eyes or the malfunction of your camera.
Note on locations where you can
use the camera
Do not use the camera near a location that
generates strong radio waves or emits
radiation. The camera may not be able to
record or play back properly.
The pictures used in this manual
Trademarks
The photographs used as examples of pictures
in this manual are reproduced images, and are
not actual images shot using this camera.
• “Memory Stick,”
, and “MagicGate
Memory Stick” are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “Memory Stick Duo” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “Memory Stick PRO” and
are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
• “MagicGate” and
are
trademarks of Sony Corporation.
• “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony
Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered
trademarks of the U.S. Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and other
countries.
• Macintosh, Mac OS and QuickTime are
trademarks or registered trademarks of
Apple Computer, Inc.
• Pentium is a trademark or a registered
trademark of Intel Corporation.
• CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation.
• Microdrive is a registered trademark of
Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in the
United States and/or other countries.
• In addition, system and product names used
in this manual are, in general, trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective
developers or manufacturers. However, the
™ or ® marks are not used in all cases in this
manual.
About the Carl Zeiss lens
This camera is equipped with a Carl Zeiss
lens which is capable of reproducing fine
images. The lens for this camera uses the
MTF# measurement system for cameras
developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in
Germany, and Sony Corporation, and offers
the same quality as other Carl Zeiss lenses.
The lens for your camera is also T*-coated
to suppress unwanted reflection and
faithfully reproduce colors.
#
MTF is an abbreviation of Modulation
Transfer Function, a numeric value
indicating the amount of light from a
specific part of the subject gathered at the
corresponding position in the image.
5
Table of contents
Before using your camera ......................... 4
Identifying the parts .................................. 9
Getting started
Charging the battery pack ....................... 14
Using the AC Adaptor ............................ 17
Using your camera abroad ...................... 17
Turning your camera on/off .................... 18
How to use the multi-selector ................. 18
Setting the date and time......................... 19
Shooting still images
6
Inserting and removing a recording medium
........................................................ 21
Switching the recording medium........ 21
Inserting and removing a “Memory
Stick” .............................................. 22
Inserting and removing a Microdrive/
CF card ........................................... 23
Setting the still image size ...................... 24
Image size and quality ............................ 25
Basic still image shooting
– Using auto mode.......................... 27
Checking the last image shot
– Quick Review .............................. 29
Shooting images with the finder ......... 29
Indicators on the screen during shooting
........................................................ 30
Using the zoom feature....................... 30
Changing the lens orientation............. 32
Shooting close-ups – Macro............... 33
Using the self-timer............................ 34
Using the flash.................................... 34
Inserting the date and time on a still
image.............................................. 36
Shooting according to scene conditions
– Scene Selection ........................... 37
Viewing still images
Viewing images on the screen of your
camera ............................................ 39
Viewing images on a TV screen............. 41
Deleting still images
Deleting images ...................................... 43
Formatting a recording medium ............. 45
Before advanced operations
How to setup and operate your camera
........................................................ 47
Changing menu settings ..................... 47
Changing items in the SET UP screen
........................................................ 48
How to use the command dial ............ 48
Deciding the still image quality.............. 49
Creating or selecting a folder ................. 50
Creating a new folder ......................... 50
Selecting the recording folder.............51
Advanced still image
shooting
Manual features to photo-shooting
situations .....................................52
Exposure (shutter speed, aperture, and
ISO sensitivity)
Shooting with Program auto ...................54
Program Shift......................................54
Shooting with shutter speed priority mode
........................................................55
Shooting with aperture priority mode .....56
Shooting with manual exposure mode ....57
Selecting the metering mode...................58
Adjusting the exposure
– EV adjustment .............................59
Displaying a histogram .......................60
Shooting with the exposure fixed
– AE LOCK ....................................62
Shooting three images with the exposure
shifted – Exposure Bracket.............63
Selecting the ISO sensitivity – ISO.........64
Focus
Choosing an auto focus method ..............65
Choosing a focus range finder frame
– AF range finder............................65
Choosing a focus operation
– AF Mode......................................66
Focusing manually ..................................67
Flash
Selecting a flash mode ............................68
Adjusting the flash level – Flash Level...70
Using an external flash............................71
Using the Sony Flash ..........................72
Using a commercially available external
flash ................................................72
Color
Adjusting color tones – White Balance...73
Selecting color reproduction – Color ......74
Burst
Shooting images in succession................75
Shooting in Multi Burst mode
– Multi Burst...................................76
Others
Shooting in the dark ................................77
NightShot ............................................77
NightFraming......................................78
Shooting with special effects
– Picture Effect ...............................79
Shooting still images in RAW mode
– RAW ............................................79
Shooting still images in TIFF mode
– TIFF .............................................80
Shooting still images for e-mail
– E-Mail ..........................................81
Shooting still images with audio files
– Voice ........................................... 81
Advanced still image viewing
Selecting the folder and playing back
images – Folder .............................. 83
Enlarging a portion of a still image ........ 84
Enlarging an image
– Playback zoom ............................ 84
Recording an enlarged image
– Trimming..................................... 85
Playing back successive images
– Slide show ................................... 85
Rotating still images – Rotate................. 86
Playing back images shot in Multi Burst
mode ............................................... 87
Playing back continuously.................. 87
Playing back frame by frame ............. 87
Still image editing
Protecting images – Protect .................... 89
Changing image size – Resize ................ 90
Choosing images to print
– Print (DPOF) mark ...................... 91
Still image printing
(PictBridge printer)
Connecting to a PictBridge printer..........93
Preparing the camera...........................93
Connecting the camera to the printer
........................................................93
Printing images........................................94
Printing index-images .............................96
Enjoying movies
Shooting movies ....................................100
Viewing movies on the screen ..............101
Deleting movies.....................................102
Editing movies.......................................103
Cutting movies ..................................104
Deleting unnecessary portions of movies
......................................................104
Enjoying images on your
computer
Copying images to your computer
– For Windows users ....................105
Installing the USB driver ..................106
Installing “Image Transfer” ..............107
Installing “ImageMixer” ...................108
Connecting the camera to your computer
......................................................109
7
Copying images using “Image Transfer”
...................................................... 110
Changing “Image Transfer” settings
...................................................... 111
Copying images without using
“Image Transfer” .......................... 111
Viewing the images on your computer
...................................................... 113
Image file storage destinations and file
names............................................ 114
Viewing an image previously copied to a
computer ....................................... 116
Copying images to your computer
– For Macintosh users .................. 117
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting .................................... 119
Warnings and messages ........................ 130
Self-diagnosis display – If a code starting
with an alphabet letter appears ..... 133
Additional information
8
The number of images that can be saved/
shooting time ................................ 134
Menu items ........................................... 137
SET UP items........................................ 140
Precautions............................................ 143
The “Memory Stick”............................. 144
The Microdrive ..................................... 145
On “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack ........ 146
Specifications ....................................... 147
Display window.................................... 149
The LCD/finder screen ......................... 150
Quick reference chart ........................... 155
Index
Index ..................................................... 158
S NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING
button (77)
T FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL) switch
(67)
Identifying the parts
See the pages in parentheses for details of
operation.
1
2
3
4
5
q;
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
qh
qj
qk
ql
w;
6
7
8
9
A Display window
B WB (White balance) button (73)
C
(Display window backlight)
button
D
(Exposure) button (57, 59)
E Shutter button (27)
F Hologram AF emitter (35, 140)
G Self-timer lamp (34)
H Zoom ring (30)
I Manual focus ring (67)
• Pressing the
(Display window backlight)
button turns on the backlight in the display
window for about seven seconds.
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
Flash emitter (34)
Infrared ray emitter (77)
Speaker
Advanced accessory shoe (71)
OPEN (FLASH) switch (69)
(Metering mode) button (58)
(Flash) button (68)
/BRK (Burst/Bracket) button
(63, 75, 76)
R
(Macro) button (33)
9
K
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
MENU button (47, 137)
(Flash) lamp (68)
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) (18)
Jack cover (14, 17)
A/V OUT (MONO) jack (41)
(USB) jack (109)
DC IN jack (14, 17)
/CF (“Memory Stick”/CF
card) switch (21)
I Access lamp (22)
10
q;
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
J Mode dial (27)
:To shoot still images in auto
adjustment mode
P: To shoot still images in
program auto mode
S: To shoot in shutter speed
priority mode
A: To shoot in aperture priority
mode
M: To shoot in manual exposure
mode
SCN: To shoot in Scene
Selection mode
L
M
N
O
SET UP: To set the SET UP items
:To shoot movies
:To view or edit images
AE LOCK/
(Delete) button (43,
62)
Command dial (48)
OPEN (CF) lever (23)
CF card cover (23)
CF card eject lever (24)
7
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
9
q;
LCD screen
Finder (29)
Finder adjustment lever (29)
FINDER/LCD switch (29)
(Screen status) button (30)
/
(Self-timer/Index) button
(34, 40)
POWER lamp (18)
POWER switch (18)
(Digital zoom/Playback zoom)
button (30, 84)
7 (Quick review) button (29)
11
5
1
2
6
3
7
4
8
9
Attaching the lens cap and the shoulder strap
Lens cap
Shoulder strap
12
A
B
C
D
E
F
Hook for shoulder strap
Tripod receptacle
Microphone
Lens
ACC (Accessory) jack
Battery/“Memory Stick” cover
(14)
G RESET button (119)
H Battery eject lever (15)
I Hook for shoulder strap
• Use the ACC (accessory) jack to connect an
external flash or the remote control tripod.
• Use a tripod with a screw length of less than
5.5 mm (7/32 inch). You will be unable to firmly
secure the camera to tripods having longer
screws, and may damage the camera.
Attaching the lens hood
Storing the lens hood
When you shoot in bright lighting
conditions, such as outdoors, we
recommend that you use the lens hood to
reduce the image quality deterioration
caused by unnecessary light.
The lens hood can be attached in the reverse
direction to store it with the camera when it
is not in use.
1 Position the lens hood as shown below,
by aligning the mark on the lens hood
and the x mark on the lens, and attach
the hood to the lens.
2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it
clicks.
• You can attach the lens cap with the lens hood
attached.
1 Position the lens hood as shown below,
by aligning the mark on the lens hood
and the x mark on the lens, and attach
the hood to the lens.
2 Turn the lens hood clockwise until it
clicks.
13
Getting started
Charging the battery pack
Battery eject
lever
3
1
DC plug
b mark
2
1
2
, Open the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover.
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.
• Be sure to turn off your camera when
charging the battery pack (page 18).
• Your camera operates with the
“InfoLITHIUM” NP-FM50 battery pack (M
Series) (supplied). You can use only M Series
battery pack (page 146).
2
, Install the battery pack, then
close the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover.
Insert the battery pack with the b mark
facing toward the battery compartment as
illustrated.
Make sure the battery pack is firmly
inserted all the way, then close the cover.
• The battery pack is easily inserted by pushing
the battery eject lever at the front of the battery
compartment to the front side.
14
Jack cover
3
AC Adaptor
, Open the jack cover and
connect the AC Adaptor
(supplied) to the DC IN jack of
your camera.
Open the cover in the arrow direction as
illustrated above. Connect the plug with the
v mark facing up.
• Do not short the DC plug of the AC Adaptor
with a metallic object, as this may cause a
malfunction.
• Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with a
dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug. Use
of the dirty plug may not properly charge the
battery pack.
Power cord
(mains lead)
1
4
– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to
[Normal]
– Using a “Memory Stick”
– Not using the NightShot or NightFraming
function.
• After charging the battery pack, disconnect the
AC Adaptor from the DC IN jack of your
camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).
Battery remaining indicators
The battery remaining indicators on the screen or
on the display window show the remaining
shooting or viewing time.
80min
To remove the battery pack
LCD screen/Finder
, Connect the power cord (mains
lead) to the AC Adaptor and
then to a wall outlet (wall
socket).
Battery eject lever
During charging, the battery mark in the
display window flashes, and after charging
is completed, “Full” appears.
The available shooting time is indicated
Display window
• The battery remaining time on the screen or on
the display window may not be correct under
certain circumstances or conditions.
• When you switch the FINDER/LCD switch or
/CF switch, it takes about one minute for
the correct battery remaining time to appear.
Charging time
Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.
Slide the battery eject lever in the direction
of the arrow, and remove the battery pack.
• Be careful not to drop the battery pack when
removing it.
• The available shooting time on the display
window is calculated as if the camera were used
under the following conditions:
– The mode dial is set to
Getting started
2 To a wall outlet (wall socket)
Approximate time to charge a completely
discharged battery pack using the AC
Adaptor at a temperature of 25°C (77°F).
Battery pack
Charging time
(min.)
NP-FM50 (supplied)
Approx. 150
15
Number of images and battery
life that can be recorded/
viewed
The tables show the approximate number of
images and the battery life that can be recorded/
viewed when you shoot images in normal mode
with a fully charged battery pack at a temperature
of 25°C (77°F). The numbers of images that can
be recorded or viewed take into account changing
the optional “Memory Stick” or Microdrive as
necessary. Note that the actual numbers may be
less than indicated depending on the conditions of
use.
Under the average conditions1)
NP-FM50 (supplied)
Recording
No. of
Battery life
medium
images
(min.)
“Memory Stick” Approx. 370
Approx. 185
Microdrive
Approx. 350
Approx. 175
1) Shooting
in the following situations:
–
(P. Quality) is set to [Fine]
– [AF Mode] is set to [Monitor]
– Shooting one time every 30 seconds
– The zoom is switched alternately between the
W and T ends
– The flash strobes once every two times
– The power turns on and off once every ten
times
16
Viewing still images2)
Recording
medium
“Memory Stick”
Microdrive
NP-FM50 (supplied)
No. of
Battery life
images
(min.)
Approx. 9400 Approx. 470
Approx. 5800 Approx. 290
2) Viewing
single images in order at about three
second intervals
Shooting movies3)
NP-FM50 (supplied)
“Memory Stick” Microdrive
Continuous
Approx. 200
shooting
3)
Approx. 160
Shooting continuously at [160] image size
• The number of images and the battery life that
can be recorded/viewed are decreased under the
following conditions:
– The surrounding temperature is low
– The flash is used
– The camera has been turned on and off many
times
– The zoom is used frequently
– The NightShot or NightFraming function is
activated
– [LCD Backlight] or [EVF Backlight] is set to
[Bright] in the SET UP settings
– The battery power is low.
The battery capacity decreases as you use it
more and more and as time passes
(page 147).
• The battery life and the number of images
recordable or viewable does not depend on the
image size setting.
• The number of images is almost the same
whether you use the finder or the LCD screen
for shooting/viewing images.
• When using a CF card, the battery life and the
number of images recordable or viewable may
differ.
Using the AC Adaptor
Using your camera
abroad
Jack cover
Power cord
(mains lead)
DC plug
1
1
AC Adaptor
, Open the jack cover, then
connect the AC Adaptor
(supplied) to the DC IN jack of
the camera.
Open the jack cover in the arrow direction
as illustrated above. Connect the plug with
the v mark facing up.
• Connect the AC Adaptor to an easily accessible
wall outlet (wall socket) close by. If any trouble
occurs while using the adaptor, immediately
shut off the power by disconnecting the plug
from the wall outlet (wall socket).
2
, Connect the power cord (mains
lead) to the AC Adaptor and to
a wall outlet (wall socket).
Power sources
You can use your camera in any country or
region with the supplied AC Adaptor within
100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use a
commercially available AC plug adaptor
[a], if necessary, depending on the design of
the wall outlet (wall socket) [b].
Getting started
2 To a wall outlet
(wall socket)
AC-L15A/L15B
• Do not use an electrical transformer (travel
converter), as this may cause a malfunction.
• When you have finished using the AC Adaptor,
disconnect it from the DC IN jack of the
camera and the wall outlet (wall socket).
• The set is not disconnected from the AC power
source (mains) as long as it is connected to the
wall outlet (wall socket), even if the unit itself
has been turned off.
17
Turning your camera on/off
The Auto Power Off function
POWER
switch
POWER
lamp
, Slide the POWER switch in the
direction of the arrow.
The POWER lamp lights in green and the
power is on. When you turn on the camera
for the first time, the Clock Set screen
appears (page 19).
To turn off the power
Slide the POWER switch in the direction of
the arrow again, the POWER lamp goes out,
and the camera turns off.
18
If no tasks are performed for about three
minutes when shooting, viewing images, or
setting up the camera while using the
battery pack, power is automatically shut
off to preserve battery power.
However, in the following circumstances,
even if the battery pack is being used to
power the camera, the Auto Power Off
function will not work.
• Movies are being played back
• A slide show is being shown
• A cable is connected to the (USB) jack
or the A/V OUT (MONO) jack
How to use the
multi-selector
Camera 1
AF Mode:
Monitor
Digital Zoom:
Precision
Date/Time:
Off
Red Eye Reduction: Off
Hologram AF:
Auto
Auto Review:
Off
SELECT
Setup 2
File Number:
USB Connect:
OK
Video Out:
Cancel
Clock Set:
To change the current settings of the
camera, bring up the menu or the SET UP
screen (pages 47, 48), and use the multiselector to make the changes.
When setting up the menu, move the multiselector to v/V/b/B to select the item or
the setting and make the setting.
When setting up the SET UP, move the
multi-selector to v/V/b/B to select the
item or the setting and press the center of
the multi-selector to make the setting.
Setting the date and time
Clock Set
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2003 / 1 / 1
POWER
switch
1
, Set the mode dial to
12 : 00
• You can carry out this operation even when the
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN,
or
.
• To set the time and the date again, set the mode
dial to SET UP, select [Clock Set] in
(Setup
2) (pages 48, 142), then proceed from Step 3.
12 : 00
OK
AM
Cancel
2
.
2003 / 1 / 1
OK
AM
Cancel
Getting started
Clock Set
Mode dial
3
, Slide the POWER switch in the
direction of the arrow to turn
on the power.
, Select the desired date format
by moving the multi-selector to
v/V, then press the center.
The POWER lamp lights in green and the
Clock Set screen appears on the screen.
You can select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/
day), [M/D/Y], and [D/M/Y].
• If the rechargeable button battery, which
provides the power for saving the time data, is
ever fully discharged (page 144), the Clock Set
screen will appear again. When this happens,
reset the date and time by starting from Step 3
above.
19
Clock Set
Clock Set
Clock Set
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2003 / 1 / 1
12 : 00
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
2004 / 1 / 1
OK
AM
10 : 00
2004 / 1 / 1
OK
AM
Cancel
4
10 : 30
OK
AM
Cancel
5
, Select the year, month, day,
hour, or minute item you want
to set by moving the multiselector to b/B.
, Set the desired numerical
value by moving the multiselector to v/V, then press the
center.
v is shown above and V is shown below the
selected item.
After setting the current numerical value,
set the next item. Repeat Steps 4 and 5
until all of the items have been set.
• If you select [D/M/Y] in Step 3, set the time
on a 24- hour cycle.
• 12:00 AM stands for midnight and 12:00 PM
stands for noon.
20
Y/M/D
M/D/Y
D/M/Y
Cancel
6
, Move the multi-selector to B to
select [OK], then press the
center.
The date and time are set and the clock will
start to keep time.
• To cancel the setting process, select [Cancel],
then press the center.
Inserting and removing a recording medium
Switching the recording
medium
“Memory Stick”
You can use a “Memory Stick,”
Microdrive, or CompactFlash card (CF
card) as a recording medium.
Microdrive
Hitachi Global Storage Technologies, Inc.
DSCM-11000 (1 GB)
We have checked the compatibility of CF
cards compliant with CompactFlash Type I
and Type II, however, we cannot guarantee
proper operation of all CF cards.
Microdrive/
CompactFlash
• Copying between media cannot be done with
this camera.
• For more information about the “Memory
Stick,” see page 144.
• The Microdrive is a compact and lightweight
hard disk drive that complies with
CompactFlash Type II standards. For more
information about the Microdrive, see page
145.
• Before using a Microdrive/CF card, be sure to
format it using this camera. Otherwise,
satisfactory performance may not be obtained
(page 45).
/CF switch
, Select the recording medium
with the
/CF switch.
: When recording images onto a
“Memory Stick” or playing back
images from a “Memory Stick.”
CF : When recording images onto a
Microdrive/CF card or playing back
images from a Microdrive/CF card.
21
Inserting and removing a “Memory Stick”
Terminal side
Label side
3
1
2
1
2
, Open the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover.
Slide the cover in the direction of the arrow.
2
, Insert the “Memory Stick.”
Insert the “Memory Stick” all the way in
until it clicks as shown in the illustration.
• Whenever you insert a “Memory Stick,” push it
as far as it can go. If you do not insert it
correctly, a proper recording or playback may
not be carried out.
22
3
Access lamp
, Close the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover.
To remove the “Memory Stick”
Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover,
then push the “Memory Stick” to pop it out.
• Whenever the access lamp is lit, the
camera is recording or reading out an
image. Never remove the “Memory
Stick” or turn off the power at this time.
The data may be corrupted.
Inserting and removing a Microdrive/CF card
2
Front (The v markprinted side)
, Open the CF card cover.
, Insert the Microdrive/CF card.
Slide the
OPEN (CF) lever in the
direction of the arrow.
Insert the Microdrive/CF card all the way in
as shown in the illustration.
3
1
, Close the CF card cover.
• Close the CF card cover properly, otherwise
you cannot record or play back images using
the Microdrive/CF card.
• Whenever you insert a Microdrive/CF card,
push it as far as it can go. If you do not insert it
correctly, a proper recording or playback may
not be carried out.
23
Setting the still image size
To remove the Microdrive/CF card
Open the CF card cover, then push the CF
card eject lever so that the Microdrive/CF
card is ejected.
8M
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
8M
Image Size
Mode
3:2
5M
3M
1M
Image Size
Mode
1
Access lamp
CF card eject
lever
MENU
and
turn on the power, then press
MENU.
The menu appears.
• Note that the Microdrive may be heated right
after using the camera.
• Whenever the access lamp is lit, the
camera is recording or reading out an
image. Never remove the Microdrive/CF
card or turn off the power at this time.
The data may be corrupted or the
Microdrive/CF card may become
unusable.
24
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN.
8M
8M
3:2
5M
5M
3M
1M
Image Size
Mode
2
, Select
(Image Size) by
moving the multi-selector to b/
B, then select the desired
image size by moving the
multi-selector to v/V.
The image size is set.
After the setting is completed, press
MENU. The menu disappears from the
screen.
• For more information about the image size, see
page 25.
• This setting is maintained even when the power
is turned off.
Image size and quality
Image size
8M 1) (3264×2448) Larger
3:2 2) (3264×2176)
5M (2592×1944)
3M (2048×1536)
1M (1280×960)
VGA (640×480)
Smaller
Examples
• For storing important images or printing A3 size or fine A4 size
images.
• For printing A4 size or fine A5 size images.
• For printing postcard size images.
• For shooting a lot of images, attaching images to e-mail, or
posting images to your home page.
1) The
default setting is [8M]. This size can give the highest image quality using this camera.
2) This option records images in a horizontal to vertical proportion of 3:2 to match the size of the print
paper used.
You can choose image size (number of
pixels) and image quality (compression
ratio) based on the kind of images you want
to shoot. The larger you make the image
size and the higher you make the image
quality, the better your image, but also the
larger the amount of data needed to preserve
your image. This means you can save fewer
images in your recording medium.
Choose an image size and quality level
appropriately for the kind of images you
want to shoot.
The number of images that can be saved in a “Memory Stick”3)
The number of images that can be saved in Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below. (Units:
number of images)
Capacity
16MB
32MB
64MB
128MB
MSX-256
MSX-512
MSX-1G
8M
4 (7)
8 (15)
16 (30)
32 (60)
59 (109)
121 (223)
247 (456)
3:2
4 (7)
8 (15)
16 (30)
32 (60)
59 (109)
121 (223)
247 (456)
5M
6 (11)
12 (23)
25 (48)
51 (96)
92 (174)
188 (354)
384 (723)
3M
10 (18)
20 (37)
41 (74)
82 (149)
148 (264)
302 (537)
617 (1097)
1M
24 (46)
50 (93)
101 (187)
202 (376)
357 (649)
726 (1320) 1482 (2694)
VGA
97 (243) 196 (491) 394 (985) 790 (1975) 1428 (3571) 2904 (7261)
Image
size
5928
(14821)
3) When
[Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]
For the number of images that can be saved in other modes, see pages 134, 135.
4) For more information about the image quality (compression ratio) mode, see page 49.
25
The number of images that can
be saved in a Microdrive3)
The number of images that can be saved in
Fine (Standard)4) mode are shown below.
(Units: number of images)
Capacity
Image
size
1G (DSCM-11000)
8M
273 (505)
3:2
273 (505)
5M
426 (801)
3M
684 (1217)
1M
1643 (2988)
VGA
6573 (16434)
3) When
[Mode] (REC Mode) is set to [Normal]
For the number of images that can be saved in
other modes, see page 136.
4) For more information about the image quality
(compression ratio) mode, see page 49.
26
• When the images recorded using other Sony
devices are played back, the image size
indication may be different from the actual
image size.
• When the images are viewed on the screen of
the camera, they all look the same size.
• Number of shooting images can differ from
these values according to shooting conditions.
• When the remaining number of images
recordable is more than 9999, “>9999” is
indicated on the screen. And when it is more
than 999, “999” is indicated on the display
window.
• You can resize the images later (Resize
function, see page 90).
Basic still image shooting – Using auto mode
80 min
Mode dial
FINE
101
98
1
2
, and
The recording folder name is indicated on
the screen for about five seconds.
Remove the lens cap.
• Select the recording medium using the
/
CF switch (page 21).
• You can create a new folder in the recording
medium and select the folder for storing images
(page 50).
, Hold the camera steadily with
both hands and position a
subject in the center of the
focus frame.
• The minimum focal distance to a subject is
50 cm (19 3/4 inches) (W)/60 cm (23 5/8 inches)
(T). To shoot subjects at distances closer than
this, use the macro mode (page 33).
• The frame indicated on the screen shows the
focus adjustment range. (AF range finder, see
page 65.)
3
250 F2.0
0 EV
AE/AF lock indicator
Flashes in green t
Remains on
MAF
turn on the camera.
8M
, Press and hold the shutter
button halfway down.
The camera beeps. When the AE/AF lock
indicator stops flashing and remains on, the
camera is ready for shooting. (The screen
may be frozen for a split second depending
on the subject.)
When the surroundings are dark, the flash
automatically pops up and strobes.
• If you release your finger from the shutter
button, shooting will be canceled.
• When the camera does not beep, the AF
adjustment is not complete. You can continue to
shoot, but the focus is not set properly (except
in Continuous AF, page 66).
27
80 min
8M
101
97
Mode dial for still image
shooting
When shooting still images with your
camera, you can choose from the following
shooting methods.
MAF
4
, Press the shutter button fully
down.
The shutter clicks, the shooting is
completed, and the still image is saved in
the recording medium.
• When you are shooting with the battery pack, if
no tasks are performed for a while with the
camera turned on, power is automatically shut
off to preserve battery power (page 18).
(Auto adjustment mode)
The focus, exposure and white balance are
automatically adjusted to allow easy
shooting. The image quality is set to [Fine]
(page 49).
P (Program auto shooting)
Shooting adjustment is automatically
carried out just as in the auto adjustment
mode. However, you can intentionally
adjust the focus, exposure, etc. In addition,
you can set the desired functions using the
menu (pages 47 and 137).
S (Shutter speed priority)
You can select the shutter speed (page 55).
In addition, you can set the desired shooting
functions using menus (pages 47 and 137).
A (Aperture priority)
You can select the aperture value (page 56).
28
M (Manual exposure)
You can manually adjust the shutter speed
and the aperture value (page 57). In
addition, you can set the desired shooting
SCN (Scene Selection)
You can select from the following modes to
shoot according to the scene conditions
(page 37).
–
–
–
–
(Twilight mode)
(Twilight portrait mode)
(Landscape mode)
(Portrait mode)
Checking the last image
shot – Quick Review
About Auto Focus
• The subject is distant from the camera and dark
• The contrast between the subject and its
background is poor
• The subject is seen through glass, such as a
window
• A fast-moving subject
• The subject has a reflection, such as that from a
mirror, or there is a luminous body and a
lustrous subject
• A flashing subject
• A backlit subject.
There are two Auto Focus functions: “AF
range finder frame” which sets the focus
position according to the subject position
and size, and “AF mode” which sets when
the camera starts and stops focusing on.
See page 65 for details.
80 min
8M
101
8/8
Review
FINDER/LCD
switch
101-0008
2004 1 1 10:30PM
Finder
adjustment
lever
, Press 7 (quick review).
To return to shooting mode, press the
shutter button lightly or press 7 (quick
review) again.
To delete the image displayed on the
screen
1 Press
When you try to shoot a subject that is hard
to focus on, the AE/AF lock indicator will
change to flashing slowly and the AE lock
beep does not sound (except in Continuous
AF, page 66).
The Auto Focus function may be difficult to
use with in the following subjects. In such
cases, release the shutter button, then try to
recompose the shot and focus again.
Shooting images with the
finder
With the FINDER/LCD switch, you can
choose to shoot either using the finder or the
LCD screen. When you use the finder, the
image does not appear on the LCD screen.
Adjust the finder adjustment lever until the
image appears clearly within the finder,
then shoot the image.
(delete).
2 Select [Delete] by moving the multiselector to v, then press the center.
The image is deleted.
29
Indicators on the screen during shooting
Using the zoom feature
Indicators on
T (telephoto)
80min
8M
W (wide-angle)
101
98
80 min
8M
101
80 min
98
x5.0
8M
101
98
x1.1
MAF
r
Histogram on
(Image information is
displayed during playback)
Each time you press
(screen status), the
display changes in the following order.
• The status of the screen changes between
indicators-on and indicators-off when playing
back or shooting movies.
• For a detailed description of the indicators, see
page 150.
• For a detailed description of the histogram, see
page 60.
is turned off.
80min
101
98
, Turn the zoom ring to choose
the desired image size for
shooting.
You can zoom in up to 7.1× using the
optical zoom.
MAF
r
Indicators off
MAF
30
8M
Zoom ring
The minimum distance needed to
focus on a subject
When the zoom is set all the way to
the W side:
approximately 50 cm (19 3/4 inches) from
the end of the lens
the T side:
approximately 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from
the end of the lens
• When not using the camera, retract the lens in
by setting the lens to its W-end position to
protect it.
Digital zoom
Precision digital zoom
Enlarges the image two times larger than
the optical zoom scaling now selected. The
maximum zoom scaling is about 14×
regardless of the selected image size. Since
the precision digital zoom cuts part of the
image and enlarges the rest, the image
quality deteriorates.
Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] in the SET
UP settings (page 140).
The default setting is [Precision].
Enlarges the image using digital processing.
Pressing
(digital zoom) activates the
digital zoom. There are two modes in the
digital zoom function. One is “Precision
digital zoom” and the other is “Smart
zoom.” Because each mode uses different
methods and has different magnifying
capacity, choose the mode according to
your shooting.
• The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting
in RAW mode (page 79).
• AF range finder frame is not shown when using
the digital zoom. The AF range finder frame
indicator flashes and a centrally-located subject
has priority when the camera is focusing.
The
icon changes as follows according
to the zoom mode.
Optical zoom:
Precision digital zoom:
Smart zoom:
31
Changing the lens
orientation
Smart zoom
You can zoom in the image with much less image quality deterioration. You can use the smart
zoom as though it were the optical zoom.
The zoom scaling becomes the number that multiplies the following smart zoom scaling by
the optical zoom scaling now selected.
Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] in the SET UP settings (page 140).
The maximum zoom scale is as follows and it depends on the image size. The zoom scale
displayed on the screen is an approximate value.
5M
3M
1M
VGA
x8.9
x1.3
You can adjust the angle by turning the lens
part upward up to 70 degrees and downward
up to 30 degrees.
x11
x1.6
x2.6
x5.1
x5
x18
x36
x10
x15
• When the image size is set to [8M] or [3:2], the smart zoom does not work.
• The digital zoom cannot be used when shooting in Multi Burst mode (page 76). When using the smart
zoom, selecting
(Multi Burst) using the
/BRK button cancels the smart zoom.
• When using the smart zoom, the image on the screen may look rough. However, this phenomenon has no
effect on the recorded image.
To cancel the digital zoom
Press
(digital zoom) again. The zoom scaling returns to the number that was in effect using
the optical zoom.
32
Lens part
Shooting close-ups
– Macro
80 min
8M
80 min
101
98
the W side:
Approx. 2 cm (13/16 inches) from the end of
the lens
the T side:
Approx. 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) from the end
of the lens
• We recommend that you use Flexible Spot AF
(page 65).
2
, and
The
(macro) indicator appears on the
screen.
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN (other than
(Twilight mode) or
(Landscape
mode)) or
.
MAF
1
press
(macro).
101
97
MAF
For close-ups of subjects like flowers or
insects, shoot using the macro feature. You
can shoot subjects approaching up to 2 cm
(13/16 inches) when the zoom is set to its Wend. However, the available focus distance
depends on the zoom position. We
recommend that you set the zoom to its Wend during shooting.
8M
, Center the subject in the frame,
and press and hold the shutter
button halfway down, then
press the shutter button fully
down.
To return to normal shooting
Press
(macro) again. The
indicator
disappears from the screen.
• When shooting in macro mode, the focus range
is very narrow and you may not be able to focus
on the whole of the subject.
• When shooting in macro mode, the focus
adjustment becomes slower to accurately focus
on a close subject.
33
Using the self-timer
80 min
8M
Using the flash
80 min
101
98
8M
FINE
101
Flash emitter
98
Hologram AF
emitter
MAF
MAF
250 F2.0
0 EV
/
1
, Set the mode dial to , and
press /
(self-timer).
The (self-timer) indicator appears on the
screen.
mode dial is set to P, S, A, M, SCN or
.
2
, Center the subject in the frame,
and press and hold the shutter
button halfway down, then
press the shutter button fully
down.
The self-timer lamp (page 9) will flash, and
you will hear a beeping sound. The image
will be shot after approximately 10 seconds.
To cancel the self-timer during the
operation
Press /
(self-timer) again. The
indicator dissapears from the screen.
• If you stand in front of the camera and press the
shutter button, the focus and the exposure may
not be correctly set.
34
The flash automatically pops up and strobes
when the surroundings are dark. Close the
flash by hand after using it.
• When [ISO] is set to [Auto] in the menu
settings, the recommended shooting distance
using the flash is approx. 0.5 m to 4.5 m
(19 3/4 inches to 14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m
to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T).
• Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks the
flash light.
• While the flash is being charged, the (flash)
lamp flashes. After charging is completed, the
lamp goes out.
• You can also select the following flash modes:
(Forced flash),
(Slow synchro), and
(No flash). For details on these modes, see page
68.
Recording images with the
hologram AF
•
•
•
•
When not using this function, set
[Hologram AF] to [Off] in the SET UP
settings (page 140).
• If hologram AF light does not reach the subject
sufficiently or the subject has weak contrast,
focus will not be achieved. (An approximate
distance of 0.5 m to 5.0 m (19 3/4 inches to
16 feet 4 7/8 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.5 m
(23 5/8 inches to 11 feet 5 7/8 inches) (T) is
recommended.)
• Focus is achieved as long as hologram AF light
reaches the subject, even if the light is slightly
off the center of the subject.
• When adjusting the focus manually (page 67),
the hologram AF does not function.
• If the hologram AF emitter is dirty, the
hologram AF light may be dimmed and focus
About Hologram AF
“Hologram AF (Auto-Focus)” is an AF fill
light system that applies laser holograms to
enable you to shoot still images in dark
places. The Hologram AF system uses
gentler radiation than conventional highbrightness LEDs or lamps, thus satisfying
Laser Class 1* specifications and
maintaining higher safety for human eyes.
No safety problems will be caused by
looking directly into the hologram AF
emitter at a close range. However, it is not
recommended to do so, because you may
experience such effects like several minutes
of residual image and dazzling, that you
encounter after looking into a flashlight.
The hologram AF is fill light to focus more
easily on a subject in dark surroundings.
ON appears on the screen and the hologram
AF emits red light when the shutter button
is pressed halfway until the focus is locked.
may not be achieved. In this case, wipe the
hologram AF emitter with a dry cloth.
Do not block the hologram AF emitter during
recording.
The AF range finder frame is not displayed. AF
range finder frame indicator flashes and the
centrally-located subject has priority to focus
on.
When you attach the supplied lens hood to the
camera, the hologram AF light is blocked.
The hologram AF does not function when
[SCN] (Scene) is set to
(Twilight mode) or
(Landscape mode).
* Hologram AF satisfies Class 1 (time base
30 000 seconds), specified in JIS (Japan), IEC
(EU), and FDA (US) industry standards.
Complying with these standards identifies the
laser product as safe, under the condition that a
human can look at the laser light either directly
or focused through a lens for 30 000 seconds.
35
Inserting the date and time on a still image
Camera 1
Monitor
AF Mode:
Precision
Digital Zoom:
Off
Date/Time:
Hologram AF:
Auto
Auto Review:
Off
Camera 1
Day&Time
AF Mode:
Date
Digital Zoom:
Date/Time:
Off
Red Eye Reduction:
Hologram AF:
Auto Review:
Camera 1
Monitor
AF Mode:
Precision
Digital Zoom:
Date
Date/Time:
Hologram AF:
Auto
Auto Review:
Off
SELECT
PAGE SELECT
1
, Set the mode dial to SET UP.
The SET UP screen appears.
• The date and time cannot be inserted in Multi
Burst mode.
• When images are shot with the date and time
inserted, the date and time cannot be removed
later.
• When shooting images with the date and time
inserted, the actual date and time are not
displayed on the screen, and
is displayed
on the screen instead. The actual date and time
are indicated in red on the lower-right corner
when the image is played back.
2
3
, Select
(Camera 1) by
moving the multi-selector to v,
then move to B.
Select [Date/Time] by moving
the multi-selector to v/V, then
move to B.
1
, Select the date and time setting
v/V, then press the center.
Day&Time: Inserts the date and the time of
shooting into the image
Date: Inserts the year, the month and the
date of shooting into the image
Off: Does not insert date/time data into the
image
After the setting has been completed, set the
mode dial to
to shoot your image.
• You can shoot even when the mode dial is set to
P, S, A, M or SCN.
• When you chose [Date], the date will be
inserted in the order set in “Setting the date and
time” (page 19).
is turned off.
36
Shooting according to scene conditions
Twilight mode
Twilight mode
Under dark lighting conditions, you can
shoot a distant night view. However,
because the shutter speed is slower under
these conditions, we recommend you use a
tripod.
• You cannot use the following functions in
Twilight mode:
– Macro mode shooting
– Shooting with the flash
– Exposure Bracket
– Burst mode shooting
– Multi Burst mode shooting
Twilight portrait mode
Landscape mode
Twilight portrait mode
Portrait mode
Portrait mode
Use this mode when shooting people in the
foreground at night. This mode allows you
to shoot images of people in the foreground
with distinct outlines without losing the
feeling that you are shooting at night.
Because the shutter speed is slow, it is
recommended that you use a tripod.
When shooting night scenes, shooting
people at night, shooting landscapes, or
shooting portraits, use the modes listed
below to increase the quality of your
images.
– Scene Selection
Backgrounds blur away, and the subject is
sharpened.
• The flash is set to
(Slow synchro).
• You cannot shoot in Exposure Bracket, Burst,
or Multi Burst mode.
Landscape mode
Focuses on images far away, so is
convenient for shooting landscapes at a
distance.
• You cannot shoot in macro mode.
• The flash is set to (Forced flash) or
flash).
(No
37
Scene
SCN ISO
MENU
1
, Set the mode dial to SCN, then
press MENU.
The menu appears.
Scene
SCN ISO
Mode PFX
2
, Select [SCN] (Scene) by
moving the multi-selector to b.
Mode BRK
3
, Select the desired mode by
moving the multi-selector to v/
V.
The mode is set.
When the setting is complete, press MENU
so that the menu disappears from the screen.
To cancel the Scene Selection
Set the mode dial to a different mode.
• When the shutter speed becomes slower than
particular time, the NR slow shutter function
(page 55) activates automatically. In such cases,
shooting may take some time.
is turned off.
38
Viewing images on the screen of your
camera
Viewing on the single-image
screen
80 min
8M
101
80 min
8M
101
8/9
BACK/NEXT
BACK/NEXT
2004 1 1 10:30PM
VOLUME
SINGLE DISPLAY
101-0008
101-0008
8/9
Index screen
Single screen
2004 1 1 10:30PM
VOLUME
1
You can view images shot with the camera almost immediately on the screen. You can select
the following two methods for viewing images.
turn on the camera.
Single screen
You can view one image at a time, occupying the entire screen.
The newest image in the selected recording
folder (page 83) is displayed.
Index screen
Nine images are displayed simultaneously in separate panels on the screen.
• You can easily view the next/previous image by turning the command dial.
• For details on the movies, see page 101.
• For a detailed description of the screen indicators, see page 153.
, and
• The image may be too rough for image
processing right after it is displayed.
• To select the recording medium, use the
/
39
Viewing on the index screen
80 min
8M
101
101-0003
BACK/NEXT
3/9
2004 1 1 10:30PM
VOLUME
SINGLE DISPLAY
/
2
, Select the desired still image
b/B.
, Press
b : Displays the previous image.
B : Displays the next image.
To display the next (previous) Index
screen
Move the multi-selector to v/V/b/B to
move the yellow frame up/down/left/right.
/
(index).
The display switches to the Index screen.
To return to the single-image screen
Press /
(index) again, or press the
center of the multi-selector.
40
Viewing images on a TV screen
80 min
8M
101
1
, Connect the supplied A/V
connecting cable to the A/V
OUT (MONO) jack of the
camera and the audio/video
input jacks of the TV.
If your TV has stereo type input jacks,
connect the audio plug (black) of the A/V
connecting cable to the Lch audio input
jack.
101-0002
BACK/NEXT
2
TV/Video switch
, Turn on the TV, and set the TV/
Video switch to “Video.”
• The name and location of this switch may differ
depending on your TV. For details, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with the TV.
2004 1 1 10:30PM
VOLUME
3
turn on the camera.
, and
A/V
connecting
cable
(supplied)
A/V OUT
(MONO)
jack
2/9
Move the multi-selector to b/B to select the
desired image.
• When using the camera abroad, it may be
necessary to switch the video output signal to
match that of your TV system (page 142).
/
• Turn off both the camera and the TV before
connecting the camera and the TV with the A/V
connecting cable.
41
Watching images on a TV screen
If you want to view images on a TV, you
need a TV having a video input jack and the
A/V connecting cable (supplied).
The color system of the TV must match as
that of your digital still camera. Check the
following list:
NTSC system
Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central
America, Chile, Colombia, Ecuador,
Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru,
Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, the
U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.
PAL system
Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Czech
Republic, Denmark, Finland, Germany,
Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait,
Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal,
Singapore, Slovak Republic, Spain,
Sweden, Switzerland, Thailand, United
Kingdom, etc.
PAL-M system
Brazil
PAL-N system
Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay
42
SECAM system
Bulgaria, France, Guiana, Hungary, Iran,
Iraq, Monaco, Poland, Russia, Ukraine, etc.
Deleting images
80 min
101-0002
BACK/NEXT
8M
101
80 min
2/9
2004 1 1 10:30PM
VOLUME
, Set the mode dial to , and
turn on the camera.
Select the image you want to
delete by moving the multiselector to b/B.
/
• Note that the images once deleted cannot be
recovered.
101
8M
101
Delete
Delete
Exit
Exit
BACK/NEXT
BACK/NEXT
2
, Press
80 min
2/9
2/9
3
(delete).
The image has not yet been deleted at this
point.
• You cannot delete protected images (page 89).
, Select [Delete] by moving the
multi-selector to v , then press
the center.
1
8M
“Access” appears on the screen and the
image will be deleted.
To delete other images continuously
Select the image you want to delete by
moving the multi-selector to b/B. Next,
select [Delete] by moving the multi-selector
to v , then press the center.
To cancel the deletion
Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector
to V, then press the center.
43
Deleting on the Index screen
Delete
Exit
Select
Delete
Exit
All In This Folder
1
, While an Index screen
(page 40) is displayed, press
(delete).
• Note that the images once deleted cannot be
recovered.
Select
All In This Folder
2
, Select [Select] by moving the
multi-selector to b/B, then
press the center.
• Select
TO NEXT
3
, Select the image you want to
delete by moving the multiselector to v/V/b/B, then press
the center.
The
(delete) mark is indicated on the
selected image. The image has not yet been
deleted at this point. Put the mark on all
of the images you want to delete.
• To cancel your selection, select images you
want to cancel and press the center of the multiselector again. The
mark disappears.
44
Formatting a
recording medium
Delete
Exit
OK
, Press
(delete).
Select [OK] by moving the
multi-selector to B, then press
the center.
“Access” appears on the screen and all of
the images with
marks will be deleted.
Select [Exit] by moving the multi-selector
to b, then press the center.
/CF
switch
1
, Insert the recording medium
you want to format into the
camera. Select the recording
4
To delete all the images in the folder
In Step 2, Select [All In This Folder] by
moving the multi-selector to B, then press
the center. Next, select [OK], then press the
center. All of the unprotected images in the
folder are deleted. To cancel the deletion,
select [Cancel], then press the center.
medium with the
/CF
switch. Set the mode dial to SET
UP, and turn on the camera.
• The term “formatting” means preparing a
recording medium to record images; this
process is also called “initialization.”
• The “Memory Stick” is already formatted, and
can be used immediately.
• Be sure to format the Microdrive/CF card using
this camera. Otherwise, satisfactory
performance may not be obtained.
• When you format a recording medium,
be aware that all of the data in the
recording medium will be permanently
erased. Protected images are also
erased.
45
Memory Stick Tool
Format:
Create REC. Folder:
Change REC. Folder:
Memory Stick Tool
Format:
Create REC. Folder:
Change REC. Folder:
OK
Cancel
Format
OK
Cancel
All data will be erased
Ready?
OK
Cancel
2
, When you format a “Memory
Stick,” select
(Memory
Stick Tool) by moving the
multi-selector to v/V.
When you format a Microdrive/
CF card, select
(CF Card
Tool) by moving the multiselector to v/V.
Select [Format] by moving the
multi-selector to B, then move
to B.
• When formatting a recording medium, we
recommend that you use the AC Adaptor to
prevent the camera turning off.
46
3
4
, Select [OK] by moving the
the center.
, Select [OK] by moving the
the center.
To cancel the formatting
The “Formatting” message appears on the
screen. When this message disappears, the
format is complete.
Select [Cancel] by moving the multiselector to V, then press the center.
How to setup and
operate your camera
This section describes how to operate the
menu and the SET UP screen. The multiselector is used for these operation.
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B)
MENU
Mode dial
Changing menu settings
To turn off the menu display
a Press MENU.
Press MENU.
The menu appears.
8M
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
Image Size
Mode
Normal
REC Mode
Mode
c Select the desired setting by
moving the multi-selector to v/
V.
b Select the setting item you
want to change by moving the
multi-selector to b/B.
RAW
TIFF
Voice
E-Mail
• For details on the mode dial, see page 28.
• You cannot select the dim items.
• For details on the menu items, see page 137.
The frame of the selected setting is
scaled up, and the setting is entered.
When the v mark is indicated
above the item or the V mark is
indicated below the item
All of the available items are not displayed
on the screen. Moving the multi-selector to
v/V displays the hidden items.
47
Changing items in the SET
UP screen
How to use the command
dial
a Set the mode dial to SET UP.
There are two methods for operating the
command dial. One is using only the
command dial and the other is using the
command dial in combination with other
buttons. This section describes the method
used when operating the commnad dial in
combination with other buttons.
The SET UP screen appears.
Camera 1
Monitor
AF Mode:
Precision
Digital Zoom:
Off
Date/Time:
Auto
Hologram AF:
Auto Review:
Off
Command dial
WB
Mode dial
SELECT
b Select the setting item you
want to change by moving the
multi-selector to v/V/b/B.
The frame of the item you select turns
yellow.
Setup 2
File Number:
USB Connect:
OK
Video Out:
Cancel
Clock Set:
This method is used for the following
functions.
• Manual exposure (page 57)
• Metering mode (page 58)
• Exposure adjustment (page 59)
• Exposure Bracket (page 63)
• Flash mode (page 68)
• White balance (page 73)
• Burst (page 75)
• Multi Burst (page 76)
• Nightshot/Nightframing (page 77)
/BRK
NIGHTSHOT/NIGHTFRAMING
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M,
SCN or .
b Press and hold the button you
want to operate and turn the
command dial.
c Press the center of the multiselector to enter the setting.
To turn off the SET UP screen
display
Set the mode dial to any position other than
SET UP.
48
• For details on the SET UP items, see page 140.
The value or setting that is indicated
on the screen is entered.
c Release the button.
The indicators disappears from the
screen.
• The following functions can be set by simply
turning the command dial.
– Program shift (page 54)
– Shutter speed priority mode (page 55)
– Aperture priority mode (page 56)
• You can view the next/previous image during
playback.
b Press MENU.
Deciding the still
image quality
Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN
MENU
Mode dial
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A, M
or SCN.
c Select
(P. Quality) with b/B,
then select the desired image
quality with v/V.
Fine
Standard
P. Quality
ISO
FINE
Mode BRK
You can select the still image quality from
[Fine] or [Standard].
This camera is equipped with other methods
to select the image quality. You can select
these settings using the [Mode] (REC
Mode) item in the menu. These items are as
follows: [RAW] which records raw data
(page 79), [TIFF] which records
uncompressed data (page 80), and [E-Mail]
which records data suitable for sending email (page 81).
The menu appears.
49
Creating or selecting
a folder
Mode dial: SET UP
Your camera can create multiple folders
within a recording medium. You can select
the folder used to store images. When not
creating a new folder, “101MSDCF” folder
is selected as the recording folder.
You can create folders up to “999MSDCF.”
Creating a new folder
a Set the mode dial to SET UP,
and select the recording
medium with the
/CF
switch.
b Select
(Memory Stick Tool)
or
(CF Card Tool) with v/V,
[Create REC. Folder] with B/v/
V, and [OK] with B/v , then
press the center.
The following screen appears.
Mode dial
80 min
Create REC. Folder
Creating REC. folder 102MSDCF
Ready?
OK
Cancel
c Select [OK] with v , then press
the center.
/CF switch
• Up to 4000 images can be stored in one folder.
When the folder capacity is exceeded, a new
folder is automatically created.
A new folder is created with a number
one higher than the largest number in
the recording medium, and the folder
becomes the recording folder.
To cancel folder creation
In Step 2 or 3, select [Cancel].
• Once you create a new folder, you cannot delete
the new folder with the camera.
50
• Images are recorded in the newly created folder
until a different folder is created or selected.
Selecting the recording
folder
• The image is stored in the newly selected
folder. You cannot move images to other
folders using the camera.
a Set the mode dial to SET UP,
and select the recording
medium with the
/CF
switch.
The recording folder selection screen
appears.
Select REC. Folder
102
2/2
Folder Name:102MSDCF
No. Of Files: 0
Created:
2004 1 1 1::05:34AM
OK
Cancel
BACK/NEXT
b Select
(Memory Stick Tool)
or
(CF Card Tool) with v/V,
[Change REC. Folder] with B/
V, and [OK] with B/v , then
press the center.
c Select the desired folder with
b/B, and [OK] with v , then
press the center.
To cancel changing the
recording folder
• You cannot select the “100MSDCF” folder as a
recording folder.
51
Advanced still image shooting
Manual features to
photo-shooting
situations
After you are familiar with your camera,
let’s shoot an image in various situations
with some settings changed. This section
describes some representative manual
shooting examples.
Q: To shoot a portrait with its
background blurred?
Q: To shoot a portrait against
light?
, Selecting a flash mode (page 68)
Shooting a human subject in a bright place
can create dim facial shadows. This occurs
when the background is brighter than the
person. In such cases, set the flash to
(Forced flash). You can shoot both the
person and the background clearly.
• You can use the flash within the reach of the
flash light.
, Shooting with aperture priority
mode (page 56)
When you want to enhance the person with
the background blurred, adjust the aperture
manually. The more the aperture is opened
(the aperture value becomes smaller), the
narrower the focus is. The background is
blurred accordingly.
52
Q: To shoot a night scene?
, Shooting with shutter speed
priority mode (page 55)
Using the flash in the auto adjustment mode
restricts the shutter speed and the flash light
does not reach distant subjects. The image,
therefore, is not captured clearly. In such
cases, slow the shutter speed manually, set
the flash to
(No flash), and reduce the
light using the EV adjustment. You can then
shoot a clear night scene.
Q: To shoot a moving subject?
, Selecting the ISO sensitivity
(page 64)
When you cannot use the flash or set the
shutter speed slower, increase the ISO
rating. The higher rated ISO setting helps
maximize the effect of the surrounding light
to shoot.
, Shooting with shutter speed
priority mode (page 55)
When shooting a moving person or subject,
set the shutter speed higher to freeze the
motion or set the shutter speed slower to get
the flow of motion of the subject. Adjust the
shutter speed to express a moment that is
beyond the speed of the naked eye.
Q: To shoot the beautiful
afterglow of the sunset
, Adjusting color tones (page 73)
If the image you shot is not expressed in
your favorite colors, change the white
balance mode. Setting the white balance
mode to (Daylight) enhances the redness
of the sunset.
Q: To shoot without flash?
53
Shooting with
Program auto
Mode dial: P
In program auto mode, the camera
automatically adjusts the shutter speed and
the aperture according to the brightness of
the subject just as in the auto adjustment
mode (mode dial:
). In addition, the
program auto mode can change the shooting
settings in the menu, a feature which the
auto adjustment mode does not have
(page 137).
Command dial
Shutter button
Mode dial
Program Shift
You can change the aperture value and
shutter speed combination while keeping
the brightness fixed.
a Set the mode dial to P.
b Select the aperture value and
shutter speed combination
with the command dial.
80 min
8M
FINE
MAF
101
98
P
250 F2.0
is indicated while the aperture
value and shutter speed combination is
shifted.
c Shoot the image.
To cancel Program Shift
Turn the command dial to return the
indication from
to .
• You cannot shift the aperture value and shutter
speed combination when the shutter button is
pressed halfway down.
• When the brightness changes, the aperture
value and shutter speed also change while
maintaining the shift amount.
54
• You may not be able to change the aperture
value and shutter speed combination depending
on your shooting situations.
• When the flash mode setting is changed,
Program Shift is canceled.
• Setting the mode dial to other than P or turning
off the power cancels Program Shift.
a Set the mode dial to S.
Shooting with shutter
speed priority mode
b Select a shutter speed with the
command dial.
Mode dial: S
80 min
8M
FINE
101
98
S
You can adjust the shutter speed manually.
If you shoot a moving subject at a higher
shutter speed, it appears as if frozen on the
image. At a lower shutter speed, the subject
appears as if it flowing.
Aperture value is automatically adjusted to
attain correct exposure according to the
brightness of the subject.
200
S
250
320
MAF
F2.0
0 EV
Shutter button
Mode dial
• Shutter speeds of one second or longer are
indicated with ["] after the value, such as 1".
• If the proper exposure is not obtained after
making the settings, the setting value indicators
on the screen flashes when the shutter button is
pressed halfway down. You can shoot in this
condition, but we recommend that you adjust
the flashing values again.
(No
flash).
• When the shutter speed is high, the amount of
flash light may be insufficient even if you
strobes the flash.
• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).
r
Then the screen
turns black.
Capturing
r
Processing
Finally, when
“Processing”
disappears, the
image has been
recorded.
• To eliminate the effects of vibration, use of
a tripod is recommended.
• When a slow shutter speed is set, the
processing may take some time. This is
because the camera works to remove noise
during the time set by the shutter speed
setting.
Command dial
The NR slow shutter mode removes noise
from recorded images, providing clear
images. When using shutter speeds of 1/25
second or slower, the camera automatically
works the NR slow shutter mode and “NR”
is indicated next to the shutter speed
indicator.
Press the shutter
button fully down.
F2.8
NR2''
The shutter speed can be selected from
1/2000 to 30 seconds.
If you select 1/25 second or slower
shutter speeds, the NR slow shutter
function is automatically activated. In
such cases, “NR” is indicated at the
left of shutter speed indicator.
c Shoot the image.
High shutter speed Slow shutter speed
NR slow shutter
55
Shooting techniques
When shooting a moving person, car, or
spindrift, etc., using the high shutter speed,
you can express moment that is beyond what
the human eye can see.
Command dial
Shooting with
aperture priority
mode
Shutter button
Mode dial
Mode dial: A
When shooting a subject such as the flow of
a river at a slower shutter speed, you can
create an image that captures the subject’s
flowing movement. In such cases, use of a
tripod is recommended to prevent camera
shake.
You can adjust the amount of light that
passes through the lens. If you open the
aperture (a smaller F-number), the amount
of light allowed into the lens increases and
the in-focus range becomes narrower. Only
the main subject is then in focus. When the
aperture is closed (a larger F-number), the
amount of light decreases and the in-focus
range becomes wider. The whole image is
sharpened.
The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
to obtain correct exposure according to the
brightness of the subject.
a Set the mode dial to A.
b Select an aperture value with
the command dial.
80 min
8M
FINE
101
98
A
2.0
F
2.2
2.5
MAF
• When you hand-hold the camera, adjust
the shutter speed in a range where
(Vibration warning indicator) is not
indicated.
Open the aperture
Close the aperture
250
0 EV
The range of values that can be
selected varies, depending on the zoom
position. The aperture value can be
selected from F2 to F8 (W)/ from F2.8
to F8 (T).
c Shoot the image.
56
• The shutter speed is automatically adjusted
from 1/2000 to 8 seconds. When you set an
aperture value of F8, the values start from
1/3200 second.
• The flash is set to (Forced flash),
(Slow
synchro) or
(No flash).
• You can adjust the exposure value (page 59).
Shooting techniques
The depth of field is the in-focus range.
Opening the aperture makes the depth of
field shallower (the in-focus range becomes
narrower) and closing the aperture makes the
depth of field wider (the in-focus range
becomes wider).
Open the
aperture
The subject is clear
and its background
is blurred.
Close the
aperture
Both the subject
and its background
are focused on.
Adjust the aperture to suit your purpose,
either to sharpen the specific area of image,
or to focus on the entire image.
Mode dial: M
You can manually adjust the shutter speed
and aperture values.
The difference between the set value and
the appropriate exposure determined by the
camera is displayed on the screen as the EV
value (page 59). 0EV indicates the most
suitable value set by the camera.
The camera maintains the setting even
when the power is turned off. Once you set
a value you like, you can reproduce the
same exposure by simply setting the mode
dial to M.
M
m
Shooting with manual
exposure mode
57
Command dial
c Press and hold
(exposure)
and select an aperture value
Shutter button
80 min
8M
FINE
101
98
M
Mode dial
2.2
2.5
MAF
250
0 EV
d Shoot the image.
a Set the mode dial to M.
b Select a shutter speed with the
command dial.
80 min
8M
FINE
M
58
F2.0
)
The image is slipt up into multiple zones,
each of which are evaluated individually.
The camera calculates the best-fit exposure
based on the subject’s position and
background brightness.
The default setting is multi-pattern
metering.
Center-weighted metering (
0 EV
Metering is performed with priority given
to the center of the image. The camera
determines the exposure based on the
brightness of a subject near the center.
250
320
MAF
(No
flash).
Multi-pattern metering (
98
101
200
S
Mode dial: P/S/A/M/SCN/
You can select a metering mode to
determine the exposure, depending on what
part of the subject is used to measure.
2.0
F
Selecting the
metering mode
)
Spot metering (
)
Spot metering allows you to meter for the
subject directly in a small area of the whole
image. This lets you adjust the exposure to
the subject even when the subject is backlit
or there is strong contrast between the
subject and the background.
c When selecting Spot metering
in Step 2, position the spot
metering cross hair on one
point of the subject you want
to shoot.
80 min
8M
FINE
Command dial
Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/
Spot metering
cross hair
Mode dial
MAF
– EV adjustment
101
98
P
Adjusting the
exposure
250 F2.0
SCN or
.
b Press and hold
(metering
mode) and select the desired
metering mode with the
command dial.
Adjust
toward
–
Adjust
toward +
• When using center-weighted metering or spot
metering, to focus on the same spot as used for
metering, we recommend using the center
weighted AF range finder frame (page 65).
• You cannot select the metering mode when
using the NightShot/NightFraming function.
You can manually shift the exposure value
determined by the camera. Use this mode
when you do not get the proper exposure,
for instance, the subject and its background
have high contrast (light and dark). The
value can be set a range from +2.0EV to
–2.0EV, in 1/3EV increments.
59
Mode dial
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A,
SCN or .
b Press and hold
(exposure)
and select the desired
exposure value with the
command dial.
The value of the exposure adjustment
is displayed.
Adjust the exposure value while
checking the brightness of the
background.
80 min
8M
FINE
In Step 2, select [0EV].
• When the subject is extremely bright or
extremely dark, or when you are using the
flash, the adjustment may not work.
Displaying a histogram
A histogram is a graph showing the
brightness of an image. The horizontal axis
shows the brightness, and the vertical axis
shows the number of pixels. The graph
display indicates a dark image when
skewed to the left side, and a bright image
when skewed to the right side. The
histogram is a useful reference for checking
the exposure during recording and playback
when the screen is hard to be seen.
80
8M
FINE
101
4
Brightness
Dark
Bright
0 EV
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A or
SCN.
b Press
(screen status) to
display the histogram.
c Adjust the exposure based on
the histogram.
98
P
• The histogram also appears when the mode dial
is set to
or M, but the EV adjustment is
deactivated.
+1.0EV
+1.3EV
+1.7EV
MAF
60
101
To reactivate auto exposure
Number of pixels
Command dial
250 F2.0
Shooting techniques
While shooting images, the camera
automatically determines the exposure. When
shooting a whitish overall image such as a
backlit subject or a snowy scene, the camera
judges that the subject is bright and may set a
darker exposure for the image. In such cases,
adjustment of the exposure in the + plus
direction is effective.
When shooting a darker overall image, the
camera judges that the subject is dark and may
set a brighter exposure for the image. In such
cases, adjustment of the exposure in the –
minus direction is effective.
m
Adjust in the – direction
m
Adjust in the + direction
You can check the exposure referring to the
histogram chart. Be careful not to overexpose
or underexpose your subject (giving a whitish
or darkish image).
• The histogram also appears when you press
(screen status) while playing back a single
image (page 39) or during Quick Review
(page 29).
• The histogram does not appear in the following
cases:
– When the menu is displayed
– During Quick Review of an image recorded
in Exposure Bracket mode
– When using playback zoom
– When shooting or playing back movies
•
appears and the histogram does not appear
in the following cases:
– When recording in the digital zoom range
– When the image size is [3:2]
– When playing back Multi Burst mode images
– When a still image is rotated
• The histogram before recording represents the
histogram of the image displayed on the screen
at that time. A difference occurs in the
histogram before and after you press the shutter
button. When this happens, check the histogram
while playing back a single-image or during
Quick Review.
In particular a large difference may appear in
the following cases:
– When the flash strobes
– When using the NightFraming function
– When [PFX] (P.Effect) is set to [Solarize]
– When the shutter speed is slow or high
• The histogram may not appear for images
recorded using other cameras.
You can try to adjust the exposure to suit your
taste.
61
Shooting with the
exposure fixed
– AE LOCK
Mode dial: P/S/A/SCN/
You can lock the exposure before
recomposing the image. This is useful when
the contrast of the subject and its
background is extremely high or you shoot
a backlit subject.
b Target the subject for which
you want to meter the
exposure, then press AE
LOCK.
The exposure is fixed and the
indicator appears.
80 min
MAF
Shutter button
Mode dial
AE LOCK
8M
FINE
101
98
P
250 F2.0
c Recompose the image and
press and hold the shutter
Shooting techniques
The camera automatically adjusts the
exposure according to the subject. If you
change the composition of your shot, the
exposure may be changed, such as by
changes in the brightness of the background.
In such cases, use the AE lock function. You
can shoot freely, regardless of the brightness
of the subject.
To determine the exposure, measure the
exposure of the desired portion of the
subject using either center-weighted
metering or the spot metering function.
Press AE LOCK to lock the exposure, and
then recompose the picture and shoot.
Portion of the image
used to determine the
exposure
The focus is automatically adjusted.
d Press the shutter button fully
down.
To release AE LOCK
a Set the mode dial to P, S, A,
SCN or
.
62
Carry out one of the followings:
• Press AE LOCK again after Step 2.
• Release your finger from the shutter
button after Step 3.
• Press down the shutter button in Step 4.
m
Shooting three
images with the
exposure shifted
Command dial
First shot
(Adjusted in the + direction)
Mode dial
Shutter button
Second shot
(Proper exposure set by the camera)
MENU
/BRK
Third shot
(Adjusted in the – direction)
or SCN.
b Press and hold /BRK
(bracket) and select [BRK] with
the command dial.
80 min
8M
FINE
101
98
P
In addition to an image with the exposure
automatically set by the camera, two other
images are recorded with exposure values
shifted to the + and – sides.
If you cannot shoot with the proper
brightness due to the brightness of the
subject, use the Exposure Bracket mode.
You can select the image that has a suitable
exposure after shooting.
BRK
MAF
250 F2.0
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
63
d Select [BRK] (Bracket Step)
with b/B, then select the
desired bracket step value
with v/V.
±1.0EV: Shifts the exposure value by
plus or minus 1.0EV.
e Shoot the image.
To return to normal mode
In Step 2, select [Normal].
• When [Mode] (REC Mode) is not set to
[Normal], you cannot use the Exposure Bracket
mode.
• You may not be able to use the Exposure
Bracket mode depending on the Scene
Selection mode (page 37).
• You cannot use the flash in this mode.
• During shooting in this mode, the images are
not displayed on the screen. Compose the
image before pressing the shutter button.
• The focus and white balance are adjusted for
the first image, and these settings are also used
for the other images.
• When the exposure is manually adjusted
(page 59), the exposure is shifted based on the
adjusted brightness.
• The recording interval is approximately 0.42
second.
• If the subject is too bright or too dark, you may
be unable to shoot properly with the selected
bracket step value.
• You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second
or slower.
Selecting the ISO
sensitivity
– ISO
Mode dial: P/S/A/M
You can change the camera’s sensitivity to
light. When you select a high-number
setting, you can shoot in a dark place.
Normally, the ISO sensitivity is set to
[Auto]. When set to [Auto], the ISO
sensitivity is automatically increased in a
dark place.
MENU
Mode dial
M.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
64
c Select [ISO] with b, then select
desired setting with v/V.
Choose from [800], [400], [200],
[100], [64], or [Auto].
In Step 3, select [Auto].
• To reduce camera shake, select a large number.
You can shoot a subject with higher shutter
speed.
• When selecting a large number, the image
becomes noisy. To give priority to image
quality, select a small number.
Choosing an auto
focus method
You can set the AF range finder frame and
the AF mode.
Choosing a focus range
finder frame
– AF range finder
Multipoint AF (
AF range finder frame
The AF range finder frame selects the focus
position according to the subject position
and size.
AF Mode
Mode dial
Center AF (
)
The AF range finder is only the center of the
frame. You can shoot in desired image
composition using the AF lock method.
FOCUS
The AF mode is set automatically when the
camera starts and stops focusing on a
subject.
)
The camera calculates the distance in five
places to the top, the bottom, the left, the
right, and in the center of the image, letting
you shoot using the auto focus function
without worrying about the image
composition. This is useful when it is
difficult to focus on the subject because it is
not in the center of the frame. You can
check the position where the focus was
adjusted using the green frame.
The default setting is Multipoint AF.
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
65
Flexible Spot AF (
)
This is useful when focusing on an
extremely small subject or a narrow area.
Flexible Spot AF lets you shoot in the
desired image composition. This is useful
when you shoot using a tripod and the
subject is out of the center area. When
shooting a moving subject, take care to hold
the camera steady so that the subject does
not deviate from the range finder frame.
SCN or
.
b Set the FOCUS switch to
AUTO.
c Press the center of the multiselector repeatedly to select
the desired mode.
80 min
8M
FINE
101
98
P
AF range
finder frame
MAF
66
250 F2.0
AF range
finder frame
indicator
d When selecting Flexible Spot
AF in Step 3, move the AF
range finder frame to the
portion you want to focus on
with v/V/b/B.
80 min
8M
FINE
98
P
MAF
101
250 F2.0
When you press and hold the shutter
button halfway down, and the focus is
adjusted, the color of the AF range
finder frame changes from white to
green.
• When you are shooting movies and you choose
Multipoint AF, the distance to the center of the
screen is estimated as an average, so the AF
works even with a certain amount of vibration.
The AF range finder frame indicator is
.
Center AF and Flexible Spot AF automatically
focus only on selected frame, so this is
convenient when you want to focus only on
what you aim at.
• When you use the digital zoom or hologram
AF, priority AF movement is given to subjects
in or near the center of the frame. In this case,
the AF range finder frame indicator flashes and
the AF range finder frame is not displayed.
Choosing a focus operation
– AF Mode
Mode dial: SET UP
Single AF ( S A F )
This mode is useful for shooting stationary
subjects. The focus is not adjusted before
you press and hold the shutter button
halfway down. After you press and hold the
shutter button halfway down and AF lock is
complete, the focus is locked.
Monitoring AF ( M A F )
This shortens the time needed for focusing.
The camera automatically adjusts the focus
before you press and hold the shutter button
halfway down, letting you compose images
with the focus already adjusted. After you
press and hold the shutter button halfway
down and AF lock is complete, the focus is
locked.
The default setting is Monitoring AF.
• Battery consumption may be higher than in
Single AF mode.
Continuous AF ( C AF )
The camera adjusts the focus before you
press and hold the shutter button halfway
down, and then continues to adjust the focus
even after AF lock is completed. This
allows shooting of moving subjects with
continued focus. However, focus
adjustment may not be able to keep up when
shooting fast moving subjects. The AF
range finder frame is Center AF.
Normally the focus is automatically
adjusted. However, the auto focus may not
work well, such as in the following cases. In
these cases, adjust the focus manually.
Subjects that are hard to be focused
on
• Subjects with little contrast with
backgrounds such as walls, and sky
• Subjects in very dark places
• Metals that have great reflection, or
subjects with the light source behind
them and that have great reflection.
• Subjects through a chain-link fence or
glasses.
Mode dial
Manual focus ring
b Select
(Camera 1) with v ,
then select [AF Mode] with B/
v.
1
c Select the desired mode with
B/v/V, then press the center.
Near
SCN or
.
b Set the FOCUS switch to
MANUAL.
The 9 (manual focus) indicator
appears on the screen.
c Turn the manual focus ring to
achieve a sharp focus.
The focus distance information
indicator is displayed. You can adjust
the focus in the following macro
ranges.
T-side: about 60 cm (23 5/8 inches) to
∞ (infinite)
W-side: 2 cm (13/16 inches) to ∞
(infinite).
If [Expanded Focus] in the SET UP
settings is set to [On], the image is
zoomed to 2× to achieve the focus
easily when recording still images.
The default setting is [On]. When the
image returns to normal size and the
9 (manual focus) indicator changes
from yellow to white, a sharp focus is
achieved.
When the 9 indicator flashes, the
focus distance has reached its limit.
• The focus is not adjusted after the lock is
completed in the following cases, and the
“C AF” indicator flashes. The camera operates
in Monitoring AF mode.
– When shooting in the dark place
– When shooting with a slow shutter speed
– When using the NightShot/NightFraming
functions
• There is no lock sound when the focus is
achieved.
• When you press the shutter button all the way
down using the self-timer, the focus is locked.
• Battery consumption may be higher than in any
other AF mode.
Focusing manually
To reactivate auto focusing
Far
Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO.
FOCUS
67
• The focus distance information indicator is
approximate, and should be used as a reference.
• The focus distance information indicator does
not appear when using the NightShot function.
• When focusing manually, the following
functions cannot be used:
– Macro mode shooting
– NightFraming function
• When recording movies, the expanded focus
function cannot be used.
Command dial
Selecting a flash
mode
Mode dial:
Mode dial
P/S/A/M/SCN
Normally, the flash automatically pops up
and strobes when the surroundings are dark.
You can intentionally change the flash
mode.
Auto (No indicator)
The camera decides to use the flash based
on lighting conditions. The default setting is
Auto.
a Set the mode dial to
A, M or SCN.
Forced flash ( )
b Press and hold (flash) and
select the desired mode with
the command dial.
The flash fires regardless of the amout of
ambient light.
80 min
8M
, P, S,
101
98
Slow synchro (
)
The flash fires regardless of the amout of
ambient light. In this mode, the shutter
speed becomes slower under dark
conditions, so you can clearly shoot a
background that is out of the flash-lit area.
No flash ( )
The flash does not fire regardless of the
amount of ambient light.
68
MAF
• Note that the surface of the flash emitter may
be hot right after you use the flash several times
in succession.
• The recommended distance using the flash is
about 0.5 m to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
14 feet 9 1/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 3.3 m
(23 5/8 inches to 10 feet 10 inches) (T) (when
[ISO] is set to [Auto]).
• Attaching the supplied lens hood blocks a flash
light.
• Because the shutter speed is slower under dark
conditions when
(Slow synchro) or
(No
flash) is selected, it is recommended that you
use a tripod.
• While the flash is being charged, the lamp
flashes. After charging is completed, the lamp
goes out.
• You can change the brightness of the flash
using [Flash Level] in the menu settings
(page 70). (Except when the mode dial is set to
.)
• You can mount an external flash on this camera
(page 71).
To pop up the flash manually
(Pop-up Flash mode)
Normally, the flash strobes
automatically according to lighting
conditions. However, you can pop up
the flash only when you want to use it.
Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Manual] in the
SET UP settings (page 140).
To reduce “red-eye” when
shooting live subjects
The flash pre-strobes before shooting
to reduce the red-eye phenomenon. Set
[Red Eye Reduction] to [On] in the
SET UP settings (page 140).
appears on the screen.
To strobe the flash
1 Slide the
OPEN (FLASH)
switch in the arrow direction.
The flash pops up.
m
3 Shoot the image.
OPEN (FLASH)
To return to auto mode
Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET
UP settings.
• The amount of red-eye reduction possible
varies according to the individual. In
addition, the distance to the subject, and
whether or not the subject has seen prestrobe light begin to strobe may also
reduce the effectiveness of the red-eye
reduction process.
2 Set the flash mode to (Forced
flash) or
(Slow synchro).
69
Shooting techniques
Making the best of the flash gives you various
options.
When you set the flash mode to (Forced
flash), you can shoot a back-lit subject brightly.
An effect in which the flash light reflects in the
subject’s eye is also available.
The
(Slow synchro) is effective when you
shoot a person during a sunset and the like.
You can shoot the person clearly using the
flash light and the background using a long
exposure. If the camera cannot shoot clearly
using the slow shutter, it automatically
increases the ISO number. We recommend you
use a tripod to prevent camera shake.
Adjusting the flash
level
– Flash Level
You can adjust the amout of flash light.
MENU
Mode dial
When the flash mode is set to Auto, the flash
may strobe regardless of your intentions. In
such situations, setting the flash mode to
(No flash) slows the shutter speed
automatically. This is effective when you shoot
the trail of a car, the spectrum of a light, or the
sunset. We recommend you use a tripod to
prevent camera shake.
or SCN.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
70
c Select [ ] (Flash Level) with
b/B, then select the desired
setting with v/V.
High: Makes the flash level higher
than normal.
Normal: Normal setting.
Low: Makes the flash level lower than
normal.
Using an external
flash
Mode dial:
/P/S/A/M/SCN
You can mount an optional external flash.
Using an external flash increases the
amount of light and that will allow you to
shoot more vivid flash pictures than when
using the internal flash.
For details, refer to the operating
instructions supplied with your flash.
Shutter button
Mode dial
ACC (accessory)
jack
Advanced
accessory
shoe
• You cannot have an external flash and the builtin flash strobe at the same time.
• If you use two or more external flashes at the
same time, note that the camera may not be able
to function properly, or that may cause a
malfunction.
• When the proper white balance is not set using
an external flash, set the flash mode to
(Forced flash) or
(Slow synchro), then set
the white balance using the
(one-push
SET) (page 73).
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
• When an external flash is mounted, the weight
prevents the lens portion from becoming steady.
We recommend supporting the lens portion
with your left hand or using a tripod for
recording.
71
Using the Sony Flash
You can mount the Sony HVL-F32X or
HVL-F1000 flash on the advanced
accessory shoe of your camera. The HVLF32X is also equipped with automatic flash
level adjustment and AF fill light shooting
functions.
a Mount the external flash on the
advanced accessory shoe.
b Plug the flash into the ACC
(accessory) jack.
When using the HVL-F32X, skip Step
2.
You can mount a commercially available
external flash that supports the advanced
accessory shoe.
a Mount the external flash to the
advanced accessory shoe.
b Set the mode dial to SET UP.
c Select
(Camera 2) with v/V,
[Hot Shoe] with B/v/V, [On]
with B/v, then press the
center.
2
c Turn on the external flash.
d Turn on the external flash.
d Set the mode dial to
A, M or SCN.
e Set the mode dial to M or A.
, P, S,
e Shoot the image.
• Check that [Hot Shoe] is set to [Off] in the SET
UP settings (page 140).
• When [ISO] is set to [800], you cannot use the
AUTO “B” mode of the HVL-F32X.
72
Using a commercially
available external flash
The flash also strobes when the mode
dial is set to
, P, S or SCN, but we
recommend recording with the mode
dial set to M or A.
f Shoot the image.
• If you record with [Hot Shoe] set to [Off] in the
SET UP settings, the built-in flash may pop up.
If this happens, return the built-in flash to its
original position and set [Hot Shoe] to [On]
(page 140).
• When you set [Hot Shoe] to [On] in the SET
UP settings,
is indicated. In this case, the
built-in flash is disabled.
• Set the most appropriate aperture value
according to the guide number of the flash used
and the distance to the subject.
• The flash guide number varies according to the
ISO sensitivity (page 64) of the camera, so be
sure to check the ISO number.
• Note that the camera may not function properly
or may malfunction when using a flash
manufactured by another company for a
specific camera (generally a flash with multiple
contact points on the advanced accessory shoe),
a high-voltage type flash, or a flash accessory.
• Depending on the type of commercially
available external flash, you may be unable to
use some functions, and other operations may
be difficult.
Adjusting color tones
– White Balance
(Fluorescent)
Used when shooting under fluorescent
lights.
(Color temperature: about 4000 K)
Mode dial
Command
dial
Auto (No indicator)
The white balance is set automatically in
response to the condition of the subject.
The default setting is Auto.
(Color temperature: about 3000-7000 K)
(Incandescent)
• Used when shooting, for example, at a
party, where the lighting conditions
change often.
• Used in a studio, or under video lights.
WB (Flash)
Adjusts the white balance only to the flash
conditions. This mode cannot be used with
movies.
(One push)
For adjusting the white balance depending
on the light source.
(Color temperature: about 2000-10000 K)
WB
SCN or .
b Press and hold WB and select
the desired setting with the
command dial.
80 min
(Daylight)
Used when shooting outdoors, and for
shooting at night, under neon lights, for
fireworks, sunrise, and twilight gloom.
(Cloudy)
Used when shooting under a cloudy sky.
(One push SET)
Memorizes the basic white color which will
be used in
(One push) mode.
8M
FINE
MAF
101
98
P
Normally, this camera adjusts color tones
automatically, but you can also select the
following modes according to your
shooting situations. The color of the subject
that you see will be captured according to
the lighting conditions. When you want to
fix the conditions under which the image is
captured, or when the color of the entire
image seems to be a bit unnatural, it is
recommended that you adjust the white
balance.
250 F2.0
To return to automatic settings
In Step 2, select [Auto].
73
• Under fluorescent lights that flicker, even if you
choose
, the white balance may not be
properly adjusted.
• When the flash strobes, the manual setting is
canceled, and the image is recorded in [Auto]
mode (except in WB (Flash) mode or
(One push) mode).
To capture the basic white color
in
(one-push SET) mode
This mode memorizes the basic white color
in the shooting situation for the
(One
push) mode. Use this mode when the other
modes cannot set the color properly.
1 In Step 2, select [
] (One push
SET).
The
indicator appears.
2 Frame a white object such as a piece of
paper filling the screen under the same
lighting conditions as you will shoot the
subject.
3 Press the center of the multi-selector.
The screen momentarily turns black and
the
indicator flashes quickly.
When the white balance has been
adjusted and stored in the memory, the
indicator lights up.
74
• When the
indicator flashes slowly, the
white balance is not set or was not able to be
set. Record in automatic white balance mode.
• Do not shake or strike the camera while the
indicator flashes quickly.
• When flash mode is set to (Forced flash) or
(Slow synchro), the white balance is
adjusted to the condition with the flash
emitting.
Selecting color
reproduction
– Color
Mode dial: P/S/A/M
You can select the color reproduction mode.
Standard (No indicator)
Shoots to make the resulting shot easier on
the eyes. The image becomes vivid
compared to its real color and the contrast
becomes higher.
The default setting is [Standard].
Real (REAL)
Shoots for faithfulness to the actual texture
and color, which the contrast, brightness,
and saturation become lower. This mode is
suitable for modifying the image on a
computer.
MENU
Mode dial
Shooting images in
succession
Mode dial:
Mode dial
Shutter button
/P/S/A/M/SCN
You can shoot up to seven images in
succession while pressing the shutter button
only once.
Speed Burst (
)
The frame interval becomes shorter (about
0.38 second), but the images are not
displayed on the screen.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select COLOR (Color) with b/
mode with v/V.
Framing Burst (
)
The images are displayed on the screen
during Burst shooting, but the frame
interval becomes longer (about 0.42
second).
• When the capacity of the recording medium is
used up, recording stops even if you press and
hold the shutter button.
A, M or SCN.
, P, S,
b Press and hold /BRK (Burst)
and select
(Speed Burst) or
(Framing Burst) with the
command dial.
80 min
8M
101
98
M.
Command dial
/BRK
BRK
MAF
75
b Press and hold /BRK (Burst)
and select
(Multi Burst)
c Shoot the image.
You can shoot up to seven images
when you press and hold the shutter
button.
You can do the next shooting after
“Recording” disappears from the
screen.
Shooting in Multi
Burst mode
80 min
– Multi Burst
Mode dial:
Command dial
Mode dial
101
98
BRK
Normal
MAF
250 F2.0
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
d Select
(Interval) with b/B,
then select the desired
between-frame interval with v/
V.
Shutter button
You can choose from [1/7.5], [1/15],
[1/30].
/BRK
1/7.5
1/15
MENU
1/30
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
A, M or SCN.
76
FINE
/P/S/A/M/SCN
Pressing the shutter button once records 16
frames in a row. This is convenient for
checking your form in sports, for example.
• The flash cannot be used.
[Normal], you cannot use the Burst mode.
• You may not be able to use the Burst mode
depending on the Scene Selection mode
(page 37).
• When using the self-timer, pressing the shutter
button records up to seven images in
succession.
• You cannot select shutter speeds of 1/25 second
or slower.
8M
P
, P, S,
Interval
ISO
1/30"
Mode BRK
e Shoot the image.
16 frames in a row will be recorded in
a single image (image size: 1M).
Shooting in the dark
Mode dial:
/P/
Shutter button
Command dial
Mode dial
NightShot
The NightShot function lets you shoot
subjects in dark places without the flash
such as camp scenes at night or nocturnal
plants and animals. Note that images
recorded using the NightShot function
become greenish.
.
, P or
b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/
NIGHTFRAMING and select
(Night shot) with the command
dial.
Infrared ray
emitter
NIGHTSHOT/
NIGHTFRAMING
• The infrared ray light covers within approx.
0.5 m to 2.1 m (19 3/4 inches to 6 feet
10 3/4 inches) (W)/0.6 m to 2.1 m
(23 5/8 inches to 6 feet 10 3/4 inches) (T).
• Since the infrared emitter is located below the
flash emitter, you have to pop up the flash to
shoot in these modes.
The flash emitter pops up and the
and “Night shot” indicators light for
about five seconds.
80 min
8M
101
4
"Night shot"
MAF
[Normal], you cannot use the Multi Burst
mode.
• The following functions cannot be used in
Multi Burst mode:
– Smart zoom
– Inserting the date and time
– NightShot
– NightFraming
• When the mode dial is set to
, frame
interval is automatically set to [1/30].
• You cannot set the shutter speed to lower than
the frame interval time.
• For the number of images that can be recorded,
see pages 135, 136.
• When you play back images recorded in Multi
Burst mode on the camera, see page 87.
c Shoot the image.
To cancel the NightShot function
In Step 2, select [Off].
• While using the NightShot function:
– The white balance is set to Auto.
– The metering mode is set to center weighted.
77
•
•
•
•
•
– If you perform any invalid operation, the
indicator flashes, and the “Night shot”
indicator lights for about five seconds.
While using the NightShot function, you cannot
use the following functions:
– AE LOCK
– Shooting with hologram AF
– Selecting the color reproduction mode
While the camera is in Multi Burst mode, the
NightShot function cannot be used.
When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the
SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using
the
OPEN (FLASH) switch.
When attaching the supplied lens hood, infrared
ray may be blocked.
Do not use the NightShot function in bright
places (e.g. outdoors in the daytime). This may
cause your camera to malfunction.
NightFraming
The NightFraming function enables you to
check a subject even at night and then
record with natural colors using the flash.
or P.
b Press and hold NIGHTSHOT/
NIGHTFRAMING and select
(Night framing) with the
command dial.
The flash emitter pops up and the
and “Night framing” indicators light
for about five seconds.
80 min
8M
101
4
"Night framing"
MAF
c Press and hold the shutter
The focus is automatically adjusted.
down.
The shutter sounds, the flash strobes
and the image is recorded.
To cancel the NightFraming function
78
• While using the NightFraming function:
– The white balance is set to Auto.
– The metering mode is set to multi-pattern
metering.
– The AF range finder frame is not displayed.
The centrally-located subject has priority to
focus on.
– The AE lock cannot be used.
– If you perform any invalid operation while
using the NightFraming function, the
indicator flashes and the “Night framing”
indicator lights for about five seconds.
• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the
SET UP settings, pop up the flash emitter using
the
• When attaching the supplied lens hood, flash
light and infrared ray may be blocked.
• When you press the shutter button halfway
down, you will hear a sound, but this is not the
sound of the shutter releasing. The image is not
recorded yet.
• When [Hologram AF] is set to [Off], you may
not get a clear focus. Setting [Hologram AF] to
[Auto] is recommended (page 35).
• When using the following functions, you
cannot use the NightFraming function.
– Manual focus
– Burst
– Multi Burst
Shooting with special
effects
Multi-selector (v/V/b/B) Shutter button
MENU
Mode dial
– Picture Effect
in RAW mode
– RAW
Mode dial:
You can add special effects to bring out the
contrast in your images.
Used when you want to record the raw data
directly onto the recording medium as it is.
The data can be reproduced with much less
deterioration in image processing and be
displayed using the exclusive software
provided. A compressed JPEG format
image like that is recorded in normal
shooting is recorded at the same time.
Solarize
Like an illustration
with clearly delineated
bright and dark
portions
Colored to look like an
old photograph
Shutter button
Mode dial
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select [PFX] (P.Effect) with b/
mode with v/V.
Neg.Art
Made to look like a
negative image
d Shoot the image.
To cancel Picture Effect
• You cannot select the color reproduction mode
when using the picture effect.
MENU
SCN or .
Sepia
/P/S/A/M/SCN
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
A, M or SCN.
, P, S,
79
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select [Mode] (REC Mode) with
b/B, then select [RAW] with v.
d Shoot the image.
screen.
• To reproduce the RAW data file using a
computer, the exclusive software is required.
Install the exclusive software on the supplied
CD-ROM to your computer. Since the RAW
data file is a special kind of file, general
software cannot open the RAW data file.
• The JPEG image is also recorded in the image
size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24).
(However, [3:2] cannot be selected.) RAW data
images are recorded in [8M] size.
• Writing data takes more time than in normal
recording mode.
• Digital zoom cannot be used.
see pages 134, 136.
in TIFF mode
b/B, then select [TIFF] with v/
V.
– TIFF
d Shoot the image.
Mode dial:
/P/S/A/M/SCN
Used when you record an image in
uncompressed file format. The image
quality does not deteriorate. Images
recorded in this mode are suitable for fine
printing. A compressed JPEG format image
like that recorded in normal shooting is
recorded at the same time.
Shutter button
Mode dial
MENU
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
A, M or SCN.
b Press MENU.
80
The menu appears.
, P, S,
screen.
• JPEG images are also recorded in the image
size selected by the Image Size setup (page 24).
Uncompressed (TIFF) images are recorded in
[8M] size except when [3:2] is selected.
• Writing data takes more time than in normal
recording mode.
see pages 134, 136.
for e-mail
b/B, then select [E-Mail] with
v/V.
with audio files
– E-Mail
d Shoot the image.
– Voice
Mode dial:
/P/S/A/M/SCN
You can shoot images and save them in a
file that is small enough (320×240) to attach
to an e-mail message. The normal mode
image that was selected using the Image
Size item (page 24) is also recorded.
Shutter button
Mode dial:
/P/S/A/M/SCN
You can record still images with audio files.
Shutter button
Mode dial
• For instructions on how to attach your images
to an e-mail message, refer to the Help files of
the e-mail software you are using.
see pages 135, 136.
MENU
MENU
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
A, M or SCN.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
, P, S,
Multi-selector
(v/V/b/B)
A, M or SCN.
, P, S,
Mode dial
screen.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
b/B, then select [Voice] with v/
V.
81
d Shoot the image.
If you press and release the
shutter button, sound is recorded
for five seconds.
If you hold down the shutter
button, sound is recorded until you
release the shutter button for up to 40
seconds.
• To view images recorded in Voice mode, carry
out the same procedure described in “Viewing
movies on the screen” (page 101).
• Be careful not to touch the microphone
(page 12) during shooting.
see pages 134, 136.
82
Selecting the folder
and playing back
images
– Folder
d Select the desired folder with
b/B.
80 min
VGA
101
9/9
Select Folder
102
2/2
Folder Name:102MSDCF
No. Of Files: 9
Created:
2004 1 1 1::05:34AM
OK
Cancel
Mode dial:
On the single screen
101-0009
2004 1 1 10:30PM
BACK/NEXT
VOLUME
BACK/NEXT
Select the folder that images you want to
play back are stored.
On the Index screen
e Select [OK] with v , then press
the center of the multiselector.
MENU
Mode dial
To cancel the selection
In Step 5, select [Cancel].
.
b Press MENU.
When the first or last image in the folder is
displayed, the following icons are indicated
on the screen.
: Moves to the previous folder.
: Moves to the next folder.
: Moves to both the previous and next
folders.
• When no images are stored in the folder, “No
file in this folder” appears.
• You can play back images from a last-shot one
without selecting the folder.
When multiple folders are
created in the recording medium
SINGLE DISPLAY
The menu appears.
c Select
(Folder) with b, then
press the center of the multiselector.
83
Enlarging a portion of
a still image
Mode dial:
You can enlarge an image up to five times
the size of the original image. You can also
record the enlarged image as a new file.
e Adjust the zoom with the
command dial.
Enlarging an image
– Playback zoom
.
b Display the image you want to
enlarge with b/B.
c Press
(playback zoom).
The image is enlarged twice.
d Select a portion of the image
to enlarge with v/V/b/B.
MENU
To cancel enlarged viewing
Mode dial
Press
Move to v
Move
to b
Command dial
Move
to B
Move to V
v: To view a portion of the top of the
image
V: To view a portion of the bottom of
the image
b: To view a portion of the left side
of the image
B: To view a portion of the right side
of the image
84
(playback zoom) again.
• You cannot use Playback zoom with movies or
images recorded in Multi Burst mode.
• The images displayed in Quick Review
(page 29) can be enlarged using the procedures
outlined in Steps 3 to 5.
Recording an enlarged
image – Trimming
a After you have viewed an
image using playback zoom,
press MENU.
The menu appears.
b Select [Trimming] with B, then
c Select the image size with v/V,
then press the center of the
multi-selector.
Playing back
successive images
Set the following items with v/V/b/B.
– Slide show
Interval settings
3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min
Mode dial:
You can play back recorded images in
succession, one after another. This is useful
for checking your images, or for giving a
presentation.
MENU
Mode dial
Image
Folder:Plays back all the images in the
selected folder.
All:Plays back all the images in the
recording medium.
Repeat
On:Plays the images back repeatedly.
Off:Plays through the images one time
and then stops.
d Select [Start] with V/B, then
The slide show begins.
To cancel the slide show setting
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
.
To stop slide show playback
The image is recorded, and the screen
image returns to the size it was before
enlargement.
• The trimmed image is recorded in the recording
folder as the newest file, and the original image
is retained.
• The trimmed image may suffer some
deterioration in image quality.
• You cannot trim to 3:2-sized image.
• You cannot trim RAW data file/uncompressed
(TIFF) images.
• You cannot trim images displayed with Quick
Review.
c Select
(Slide) with b/B,
multi-selector.
Press the center of the multi-selector, select
[Exit] with B, then press the center.
85
To skip to the next/previous
image during slide show
Rotating still images
Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b
(previous).
– Rotate
b Press MENU.
Mode dial:
• The interval setting time is approximate, and
may vary according to the playback image size.
a Set the mode dial to , and
display the image you want to
rotate.
Images shot when holding the camera
vertically can be rotated and displayed
horizontally.
The menu appears.
c Select
(Rotate) with b/B,
multi-selector.
d Select
with v , and rotate
the image with b/B.
e Select [OK] with v/V, then
To cancel the rotation
MENU
Mode dial
86
• You cannot rotate protected images, movies,
Multi Burst mode, RAW data file and
uncompressed (TIFF) images.
• You may not be able to rotate images shot with
other cameras.
• When viewing images on a computer, the
image rotation information may not be
reflected depending on the application
software.
Playing back images
shot in Multi Burst
mode
Mode dial:
You can play back Multi Burst images
continuously or play them back frame by
frame. This function is used for checking
the images.
Playing back continuously
Playing back frame by frame
.
b Select the Multi Burst image
with b/B.
The selected Multi Burst image is
played back continuously.
80 min
101
14/14
Mode dial
101-0014
PAUSE
2004 1 1 10:30PM
BACK/NEXT
.
b Select the Multi Burst image
with b/B.
The selected Multi Burst image is
played back continuously.
c Press the center of the multiselector when the desired
frame is displayed.
“Step” appears.
VOLUME
80 min
101
To pause
• When Multi Burst images are played back on a
computer or on a camera without the Multi
Burst function, the 16 frames you shot will be
displayed at the same time as part of one image.
• You cannot divide the Multi Burst image.
101-0014
PLAY
2004 1 1 10:30PM
FRAME BACK/NEXT
VOLUME
d Advance the frame with b/B.
B:The next frame is displayed. When
you move the multi-selector to B
and hold it, the frame advances.
b:The previous frame is displayed.
When you move the multi-selector
to b and hold it, the frame advances
in the reverse direction.
Press the center of the multi-selector. To
resume playback, press the center again.
The playback starts from the frame
14/14
Step
3/16
To return to normal playback
In Step 4, press the center of the multiselector. The playback starts from the frame
87
To delete shot images
When using this mode, you cannot delete
only certain frames. When you delete
images, all 16 of the frames are deleted at
the same time.
1 Display the Multi Burst image you want
to delete.
2 Press
(delete).
3 Select [Delete], then press the center of
the multi-selector.
All of the frames are deleted.
88
Still image editing
Protecting images
– Protect
On the Index screen
.
Mode dial:
protect with b/B.
To prevent accidental erasure of an
important image, you can protect it.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
MENU
Mode dial
d Select - (Protect) with b/B,
multi-selector.
The image currently being displayed is
now protected, and the - (Protect)
mark is indicated on the screen.
80 min
VGA
101
2/9
• Note that formatting the recording medium
erases all the data in the recording medium
even if images are protected, and these images
cannot be recovered.
• It may take some time to protect the images.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select - (Protect) with b/B,
multi-selector.
d Select [Select] with b/B, then
e Select the image you want to
protect with v/V/b/B, then
BACK/NEXT
e To protect other images,
protect with b/B, then press
The green - (Protect) mark is
indicated on the selected image.
SELECT
To cancel the protection
In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the
multi-selector again. The - mark
disappears.
MENU
Still image editing
Protect
Exit
/
a Set the mode dial to , press
/
(index) to switch to the
Index screen.
TO NEXT
f To protect other images,
repeat Step 5.
89
g Press MENU.
h Select [OK] with B, then press
The - mark turns white and the
selected image is protected.
To cancel the protection
In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8,
select [Exit].
To release protection
In Step 5, select an image for which you
want to release protection with v/V/b/B
and press the center of the multi-selector.
The - mark turns gray and repeat this
operation for all the images for which you
want to release protection. Then, press
MENU, select [OK], and press the center of
the multi-selector.
To release protection of all the
images in the folder
Changing image size
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], and
press the center of the multi-selector. Then
select [Off], and press the center.
– Resize
Mode dial:
You can change the image size of a
recorded image, and save it as a new file.
You can resize to the following sizes.
8M, 5M, 3M, 1M and VGA.
The original image is retained even after
resizing.
MENU
Mode dial
To protect all the images in the
folder
In Step 4, select [All In This Folder], then
press the center of the multi-selector. Next,
select [On], then press the center.
resize with b/B.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
90
.
d Select
(Resize) with b/B,
multi-selector.
e Select the new size with v/V,
multi-selector.
The resized image is recorded in the
recording folder as the newest file.
To cancel the resizing
– Print (DPOF) mark
Mode dial:
You can designate certain images to be
printed.
This function is convenient when you want
to print images at a shop or using a printer
that conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print
Order Format) standard or using
PictBridge-compliant printers.
• In E-Mail mode, the print (DPOF) mark is
marked on the normal size image that was
recorded at the same time.
• When you mark images shot in Multi Burst
mode, all the images are printed on one sheet
divided into 16 panels.
• If you mark an image shot in TIFF mode with a
print (DPOF) mark, only the uncompressed
(TIFF) image is printed, and the JPEG image
recorded at the same time is not printed.
• You cannot set the number of print sheets.
MENU
Mode dial
Still image editing
• You cannot change the size of movies, Multi
Burst mode, RAW data file or uncompressed
(TIFF) images.
• When images are resized from a smaller to a
larger size, the image quality will deteriorate.
• You cannot resize to 3:2-sized image.
• If you resize a 3:2-sized image, black bands
will appear at the top and bottom of the image.
Choosing images to
print
/
• You cannot mark movies or images recorded in
RAW mode.
91
On the Index screen
.
print with b/B.
b Press MENU.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
d Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with b/
B, then press the center of the
multi-selector.
The
image.
80 min
mark is indicated on this
VGA
101
and
press /
(index) to switch
to the Index screen.
2/9
The menu appears.
c Select [DPOF] (DPOF) with B,
multi-selector.
• You cannot mark using the [All In This
Folder] option.
DPOF
Exit
BACK/NEXT
e To mark other images, display
the image you want to mark
with b/B, then press the center
of the multi-selector.
To delete the
The green
mark is indicated on the
selected image.
mark
In Step 4 or 5, press the center of the
multi-selector again. The
mark
disappears.
92
e Select the images you want to
mark with v/V/b/B, then press
SELECT
MENU
TO NEXT
f To mark other images, repeat
Step 5 for each of them.
g Press MENU.
h Select [OK] with B, then press
The
mark turns white and the
setting is completed.
To delete the
mark
In Step 5, select the image you want to
delete the
mark with v/V/b/B, and
press the center of the multi-selector.
To delete all the
marks from
the images in the folder
select [Off], then press the center.
To cancel the marking
In Step 4, select [Cancel], or in Step 8,
select [Exit].
Still image printing (PictBridge printer)
Connecting to a
PictBridge printer
* An Index print function may not be provided
depending on the printer.
• When printing images, we recommend that you
use the AC Adaptor to prevent the camera
turning off.
Set the USB mode on the camera to connect
the camera with a printer.
Mode dial
Connecting the camera to
the printer
Connect the (USB) jack on the camera
and the USB connector on the printer using
a USB cable. The connection can be made
regardless of whether the camera is turned
on or off.
When the camera is turned on, the camera
turns to playback mode regardless of the
mode dial position and the newest image in
the selected recording folder is displayed on
the screen.
b Select
(Setup 2) with V, then
select [USB Connect] with B/
v/V.
After the connection
is made, the
mark is indicated on
the screen.
c Select [PictBridge] with B/v,
multi-selector.
Setup 2
File Number:
USB Connect:
PictBridge
Video Out:
PTP
Clock Set:
Normal
8M
101
101-0002
BACK/NEXT
Even if you do not have a computer, you
can easily print images shot using your
camera by connecting the camera to a
PictBridge-compliant printer. For
preparation, you only need to select the
USB connection in the SET UP settings and
connect the camera to the printer.
Using a PictBridge-compliant printer
allows you to easily print the Index prints*.
Preparing the camera
2/9
2004 1 1 10:30AM
VOLUME
Printer
The USB mode is set.
93
When [USB Connect] is not set
to [PictBridge] in the SET UP
settings
You cannot use the PictBridge function,
even when you turn on the camera. Set
[USB Connect] to [PictBridge].
1 Press MENU and select [USB Connect],
then press the center of the multiselector.
2 Select [PictBridge] with v , then press
the center.
Printing images
You can select an image and print it. Set up
the camera following the procedure on page
93, and then connect the printer.
a Select the recording medium
with the
/CF switch and
print with b/B.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select
(Print) with b/B, then
d Select [This image] with v/V,
multi-selector.
USB Connect
PictBridge
PTP
Normal
/
MENU
The Print screen appears.
/CF switch
8M
101
2/9
Print
• You cannot print movies and images recorded
in RAW mode.
• When printing E-mail mode images or
uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their
corresponding JPEG files are printed.
• If an error message is sent from the connected
printer during the connection,
flashes for
about five seconds. In such cases, check the
printer.
• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the
/CF switch while printing images.
94
Index
Date
Quantity
Exit
Off
Off
1
OK
e Select [Quantity] with v/V,
select the number of images
with b/B.
You can select the number up to 20.
f Select [OK] with V/B, then
The image is printed.
Do not disconnect the USB cable
while the
(Not disconnect USB
cable) mark is indicated on the screen.
101
2/9
In Step 5, select [Date], then select the
date format with b/B. You can select from
[Day&Time] or [Date]. The date is inserted
in the images printed.
This function may not be provided
On the Index screen
with the
/CF switch and
press /
(index) to switch
The screen turns to the index screen.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
Printing
1/3
Exit
To cancel printing
In Step 4, select [Cancel] or in Step 6,
select [Exit].
To print other images
After Step 6, select another image, then
select [Print] with v .
To print all the images indicated
with the
mark
c Select
(Print) with B, then
e Select the image you want to
print with v/V/b/B, then press
8M
To insert the date and time on
images
The
selected image.
In Step 4, select [DPOF image]. All the
images indicated with the
mark are
printed in the specified number, regardless
of the image displayed.
SELECT
MENU
TO NEXT
95
f To print other images, repeat
Step 5.
g Press MENU.
Print
Index
Date
Quantity
Exit
Off
Off
1
OK
h Select [Quantity] with v/V,
with b/B.
All the images selected are printed in
the specified number.
i Select [OK] with V/B, then
The images are printed.
while the
the screen.
To cancel printing
select [Exit].
with the
mark
mark are
printed in the specified number, regardless
of the image displayed.
To print all the images in the
folder
Printing index-images
You can print some images side-by-side.
We refer to this function as an index print*.
You can lay single images side-by-side in a
specified number and print them, or lay
different images side-by-side to make a set
by combining multiple different images and
print the set in the specified number of
copies.
Set up the camera following the procedure
on page 93, and connect the printer.
* An index print function may not be provided
depending on a printer.
images
/
MENU
Printing
2/3
Exit
96
/CF switch
with the
/CF switch and
print with b/B.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select
(Print) with b/B, then
d Select [This image] with v/V,
multi-selector.
f Select [Quantity] with v/V,
laid side-by-side with b/B.
You can lay the specified number of
images side-by-side.
g Select [OK] with V/B, then
The image is printed.
while the
(Not disconnect USB
cable) mark is indicated on the screen.
8M
101
8M
101
2/9
2/9
Printing Index
1/1
Exit
• You cannot print movies and images recorded
in RAW mode.
• When printing E-mail mode images or
uncompressed (TIFF) images, only their
corresponding JPEG files are printed.
• If an error message is sent from the connected
printer during the connection,
flashes for
about five seconds. In such cases, check the
printer.
• Note that printing is canceled if you switch the
/CF switch while printing images.
Print
Index
Date
Quantity
Exit
Off
Off
1
OK
e Select [Index] with v , select
[On] with b/B.
To cancel printing
select [Exit].
To print other images
After Step 7, select another image, then
select [Print] with v . Then repeat from
Step 4.
97
On the Index screen
g Press MENU.
mark are
printed, regardless of the image displayed.
with the
/CF switch and
press /
(index) to switch
h Select [Index] with v , then
select [On] with b/B.
images
b Press MENU.
with the
mark
• All the images may not be laid on a sheet
depending on the number of images.
The menu appears.
i Select [Quantity] with v/V,
select the number of copies
you want to print with b/B.
c Select
(Print) with B, then
j Select [OK] with V/B, then
The images are printed.
while the
the screen.
e Select the desired image with
v/V/b/B, then press the center
of the multi-selector.
The
selected image.
Printing Index
1/3
Exit
To cancel printing
select [Exit].
SELECT
MENU
TO NEXT
f To print other images, repeat
Step 5.
98
with the
mark
mark are
printed, regardless of the image displayed.
images
To print all the images in the
folder
99
Enjoying movies
• The [640 (Fine)] image size can be used
only when you record the image into the
“Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive.
Shooting movies
Mode dial:
You can shoot movies with audio.
down.
“REC” appears on the screen and the
camera starts recording the image and
sound.
MENU
Mode dial
Shutter button
80 min
101
REC 00:00:02[00:10:48]
• When the capacity of the recording
medium is used up, recording stops.
e Press the shutter button fully
down again to stop recording.
.
b Press MENU.
The menu appears.
c Select
(Image Size) with b,
then select the desired size
with v/V.
You can choose from [640 (Fine)],
[640 (Standard)], or [160].
100
Indicators on the screen while
you are shooting movies
These indicators are not recorded.
Each time you press
(screen status), the
status of the screen changes as follows:
Indicators off t Indicators on.
A histogram is not displayed.
See page 152 for a detailed description of
the indicated items.
To shoot close-ups (Macro)
Set the mode dial to
and follow the
procedure on page 33.
To shoot with a self-timer
Set the mode dial to
and follow the
• Be careful not to touch the microphone (page
12) during shooting.
• The following functions cannot be used.
– Digital zoom
– Inserting date and time
• When you select [640 (Fine)] with the supplied
A/V connecting cable plugged in the A/V OUT
(MONO) jack, you cannot check the shooting
image using the screen. The screen turns blue.
• See pages 135, 136 for the recording time
allowed for each image size.
Viewing movies on
the screen
Mode dial:
You can view movies on the screen of the
camera and hear sounds from the speaker of
the camera.
b Select the desired movie with
b/B.
Movies with the image size [640
(Fine)] or [640 (Standard)] are
displayed on the full screen.
80 min
101
10/10
00:00:00
Speaker
101_0010
PLAY
Mode dial
VOLUME
Movies with the image size [160] are
displayed a size smaller than still
images.
c Press the center of the multiselector.
The movie images and sound are
played back.
B (playback) appears on the screen
while a movie is playing back.
80 min
101
10/10
00:00:03
.
Playback bar
101_0010
STOP
2004 1 1 10:30PM
REV/CUE
To fast-forward / rewind
Move the multi-selector to B (next) or b
(previous) while playing back a movie.
To return to normal playback, press the
center of the multi-selector.
VOLUME
Each time you press
(screen status),
the status of the screen changes as follows:
Indicators off t Indicators on.
A histogram is not displayed.
See page 154 for a detailed description of
the indicated items.
• The procedure for viewing movies on a TV is
the same as that for viewing still images
(page 41).
• A movie recorded using other Sony devices
may be displayed a size smaller than still
images.
Enjoying movies
Adjust the volume with v/V.
Indicators on the screen while
you are viewing movies
2004 1 1 10:30PM
BACK/NEXT
To adjust the volume
To stop playback
Press the center of the multi-selector again.
101
Deleting movies
Mode dial:
You can delete unwanted movies.
Mode dial
On the Index screen
.
b Select the movie you want to
delete with b/B.
c Press
(delete).
The movie has not yet been deleted at
this point.
d Select [Delete] with v , then
“Access” appears on the screen and the
movie is deleted.
/
• You cannot delete the protected movies.
• Note that the movies once deleted cannot be
recovered.
e To delete other movies, display
the movie you want to delete
with b/B, then repeat Step 4.
and
press /
(index) button to
switch to the Index screen.
b Press
(delete).
c Select [Select] with b/B, then
d Select the movies you want to
delete with v/V/b/B, then
The
(delete) mark is indicated on
the selected movie.
In Step 4 or 5, select [Exit].
SELECT
TO NEXT
this point.
e Repeat Step 4 to delete other
movies.
f Press
102
(delete).
g Select [OK] with B, then press
“Access” message appears on the
screen and the movie will be deleted.
In Step 3 or 7, select [Exit].
To delete all the images in the
folder
select [OK], then press the center. To cancel
the deletion, select [Cancel] with b, then
press the center.
Editing movies
<Example> Cutting the movie numbered
101_0002
101_0003
101_0001
Mode dial:
You can cut movies, or delete unnecessary
portions of movies. This is the
recommended mode to use when the
recording medium capacity is insufficient,
or when you attach movies to your e-mail
messages.
1. Cutting scene A.
The file numbers assigned when
movies are cut
2. Cutting scene B.
The cut movies are assigned new numbers
and recorded as the newest files in the
recording folder. The original movie is
deleted and its file number is skipped.
1
3
2
101_0002
1
A
B
2
Divide point
3
101_0002
101_0004
1
3
A
2
101_0005
B
Divide
point
3. Deleting scenes A and B if they are
unnecessary.
101_0004
1
3
101_0007
A
B
2
Delete
4. Only the desired scenes remain.
1
3
2
Enjoying movies
101_0006
Delete
101_0006
103
Cutting movies
80 min
Divide
101
10/10
00:00:02
Dividing
Point
MENU
OK
Cancel
Exit
Mode dial
When you want to adjust the cutting
point, select [c/C] (frame
forward/ rewind) and adjust the cutting
point with b/ B. If you want to change
the cutting point, select [Cancel]. The
playback of the movie starts again.
f When you have decided on a
cutting point, select [OK] with
v/V, and press the center of
the multi-selector.
.
b Select the movie you want to
cut with b/B.
c Press MENU.
The menu appears.
d Select
(Divide) with B, then
press the center of the multiselector. Next, select [OK] with
v , then press the center.
The playback of the movie starts.
e Decide on a cutting point.
104
Press the center of the multi-selector at
the desired cutting point.
g Select [OK] with v , then press
The movie is cut.
To cancel cutting
In Step 5 or 7, select [Exit]. The movie
appears on the screen again.
• You cannot cut the following images.
– Still images
– Movies not long enough to cut
– Protected movies
• You cannot restore movies once you cut them.
• The original movie is deleted when you cut it.
• The cut movie is recorded in the selected
recording folder as the newest file.
Deleting unnecessary
portions of movies
a Cut an unnecessary portion of
a movie.
b Display the portion of the
movie you want to delete.
c Press
(delete).
this point.
d Select [Delete] with v , then
The movie currently displayed on the
screen is deleted.
Enjoying images on your computer
Copying images to
your computer
– For Windows users
Recommended computer
environment
• This camera is compliant with USB 2.0.
• Use with a USB 2.0 (High-Speed USB)
compatible computer environment allows highspeed data transfer.
• If you connect two or more USB equipment to
a single computer at the same time, some
equipment, including your camera, may not
operate depending on the type of USB
equipment.
USB mode
There are two modes for a USB connection
when connecting with a computer,
[Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default
setting is the [Normal] mode.
* Compatible only with Windows XP. When
connected to a computer, only the data in the
folder selected by the camera is copied to the
computer. To select the folder, follow the
Communication with your
computer
When your computer resumes from the
suspend or sleep mode, communication
between your camera and your computer
may not recover at the same time.
When a USB connector is not
provided on your computer
When neither a USB connector nor a
recording medium slot is provided, you can
copy images using an additional device. See
the Sony Website for details.
http://www.sony.net/
Contents of the CD-ROM
x USB Driver
This driver is needed in order to connect the
camera to a computer.
When using Windows XP, you need not
install the USB driver.
x Image Transfer
This application is used to easily transfer
images from the camera to a computer.
x ImageMixer
This application is used to display and edit
images that are stored in a computer.
• The required operations may differ
depending on your OS.
• Close down all applications
running on the computer before
installing the USB driver and
application.
• When using Windows XP or Windows
2000, log on as Administrators.
• The display settings should be 800 × 600
dots or more and High Color (16-bit
color, 65000 colors) or more. When set to
less than 800 × 600 dots or 256 colors or
less, the install title screen does not
appear.
OS: Microsoft Windows 98, Windows
98SE, Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows Millennium Edition, Windows
XP Home Edition, or Windows XP
Professional
The above OS must be installed at the
factory. Operation is not assured in an
environment upgraded to the operating
systems described above or in a multi-boot
environment.
CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster
USB connector: Provided as standard
Display: 800 × 600 dots or more
High Color (16-bit color, 65000 colors) or
more
• Operations are not guaranteed when using a
USB hub.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the
recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
105
Installing the USB driver
When using Windows XP, you need not
install the USB driver.
Once the USB driver is installed, you need
not install the USB driver.
c Click [USB Driver] on the title
screen.
e Click [Yes, I want to restart my
computer now], then click
[Finish].
a Turn on your computer, and
insert the supplied CD-ROM
into the CD-ROM drive.
Do not connect your camera to
your computer at this time.
The model selection screen appears. If
it does not appear, double-click
(My Computer) t
(ImageMixer)
in that order.
The “InstallShield Wizard” screen
appears.
d Click [Next]. When the
“Information” screen appears,
click [Next].
b Click [Cyber-shot] on the
model selection screen.
The installation menu screen appears.
The USB driver installation starts.
When the installation is completed, the
screen informs you of completion.
106
Your computer restarts. Then, you can
establish USB connection.
Installing “Image Transfer”
You can use the “Image Transfer” software
to copy images to your computer
automatically when you connect the camera
to your computer.
c Click [Next]. When “License
Agreement” screen appears,
click [Yes].
e Select the folder to be
installed, then click [Next].
Select the program folder, then
click [Next].
a Click [Cyber-shot] on the
model selection screen.
b Click [Image Transfer] on the
installation menu screen.
Select the desired language,
then click [OK].
The “Welcome to the InstallShield
Wizard for Image Transfer” screen
appears.
• This section describes the English screen.
Read the agreement carefully. If you
accept the terms of the agreement,
proceed with the installation. The
“Information” screen appears.
d Click [Next].
f Confirm if the checkbox is
checked on the “Image
Transfer Settings” screen,
then click [Next].
The installation menu screen appears.
When the installation is completed, the
screen informs you of completion.
107
g Click [Finish].
Installing “ImageMixer”
You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for
Sony” software to copy, view and edit
images, and create video CDs. For details,
see the software’s help files.
The “InstallShield Wizard” screen
closes.
If you wish to continue with the
installation of “ImageMixer,” click
[ImageMixer] on the installation menu
screen and then follow the procedure.
• The USB driver is needed in order to use
“Image Transfer.” If the necessary driver is not
already installed on your computer, a screen
that asks if you want to install the driver will
appear. Follow the instructions that appear on
the screen.
a Click [ImageMixer] on the
installation menu screen.
Select the desired language,
then click [OK].
The “Welcome to the InstallShield
Wizard” screen appears.
• This section describes the English screen.
b Follow instructions on each
succeeding screen.
Install “ImageMixer” according to the
screen.
• When you use Windows 2000 or Windows XP,
install “WinASPI.”
108
• If DirectX8.0a or a later version is not installed
in your computer, the “Information” screen
appears. Follow the procedure on the screen.
c Restart your computer
according to the screen.
d Remove the CD-ROM.
Connecting the camera to
your computer
a Insert the recording medium
with the images you want to
copy into the camera. Connect
the supplied AC Adaptor, and
plug the adaptor into a wall
outlet (wall socket).
Memory Stick
b Turn on your computer and the
camera.
Access
indicators*
Switch on MENU
“USB Mode Normal” appears on the screen
of the camera. When a USB connection is
established for the first time, your computer
automatically runs the used program to
recognize the camera. Wait for a while.
d Connect the USB cable to your
computer.
* During communication, the access indicators
turn red.
• If “USB Mode Normal” does not appear in Step
4, press MENU, select [USB Connect], and
set it to [Normal].
• When using a Microdrive/CF card, opening the
CF card cover cancels the USB connection. Do
not open the CF card cover during the USB
connection.
To a wall outlet
(wall socket)
• Select the recording medium with the
/CF
switch (page 21).
• When you copy images to your computer using
the battery pack, copying may be failed or
cause data corruption by battery shutoff. We
recommend that you use the AC Adaptor.
USB Mode
Normal
AC Adaptor
c Connect the supplied USB
cable to the (USB) jack of
the camera.
• When using a desktop computer, connect the
USB cable to the USB connector on the rear
panel.
• When using Windows XP, the AutoPlay wizard
automatically appears on the desktop. Proceed
to page 112.
109
P Disconnecting the USB
cable, removing the recording
medium, or turning off the
camera during a USB
connection
For Windows 2000, Me, or XP users
1 Double-click
on the tasktray.
Copying images using
“Image Transfer”
– Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me
Connect the camera and your
computer with the USB cable.
“Image Transfer” launches and the images
are automatically copied to the computer.
When copying is complete, “ImageMixer”
automatically launches and images appear.
– Windows XP
Connect the camera and your
computer with the USB cable.
“Image Transfer” starts up automatically
and the images are automatically copied to
the computer.
Windows XP is set so that the OS AutoPlay
Wizard activates.
If you want to cancel the setting, follow the
procedure below.
a Click [Start], then click [My
Computer].
Double-click here
2 Click
b Right-click [Sony
MemoryStick], then click
[Properties].
(Sony DSC), then click [Stop].
3 Confirm the device on the confirmation
window, then click [OK].
c Cancel the setting.
4 Click [OK].
Step 4 is unnecessary for Windows XP
users.
5 Disconnect the USB cable, remove the
recording medium, or turn off the
camera.
For Windows 98 or 98SE users
Confirm that the access indicators
(page 109) on the screen are turned white
and carry out only Step 5 above.
• Normally “Image Transfer” and “Date” folders
are created inside the “My Documents” folder,
and all of the image files recorded with the
camera are copied into these folders.
• You can change the “Image Transfer” settings
(page 111).
1 Click [AutoPlay].
2 Set [Content type] to [Pictures].
3 Check [Select an action to perform]
under [Actions], select [Take no
action], then click [Apply].
4 Set [Content type] to [Video files]
and proceed Step 3. Set [Content
type] to [Mixed content] and
proceed Step 3.
5 Click [OK].
The [Properties] screen closes.
The OS AutoPlay Wizard does not
start up automatically even if the
USB connection is made next time.
110
Changing “Image Transfer”
settings
Copying images without
using “Image Transfer”
You can change “Image Transfer” settings.
Right-click the “Image Transfer” icon on
the tasktray, select [Open Settings]. The
settings you can set are as follows: [Basic],
[Copy], and [Delete].
– Windows 98/98SE/2000/Me
When the “Image Transfer” starts, the
below window appears.
a Double-click [My Computer],
then double-click [Removable
Disk].
The contents of the recording medium
inserted in your camera appear.
• This section describes an example of copying
images to the “My Documents” folder.
• When the “Removable Disk” icon is not shown,
see page 112.
• When using Windows XP, see page 112.
b Double-click [DCIM], then
double-click the folder that the
image files you want to copy
are stored.
c Right-click the image file to
display the menu, then select
[Copy] from the menu.
The image files are copied to the “My
Documents” folder.
Right-click here
If you do not set to launch “Image Transfer”
automatically, you can copy images as
following procedure.
d Double-click the “My
Documents” folder and rightclick on the “My Documents”
window to display the menu,
then select [Paste] from the
menu.
When you select [Settings] from the above
window, you can only change the [Basic]
setting.
111
When an image with the same
file name exists in the copy
destination folder
The overwrite confirmation message
appears. When you overwrite the existing
image with the new one, the original file
data is deleted.
To change the file name
To copy an image file to the computer
without overwriting, change the file name
to the desired name. However, note that if
you change the file name, you may not be
able to play back that image with your
camera. To play back images with the
camera, perform the operation on page 116.
When a removable disk icon is
not shown
1 Right-click [My Computer] to display
the menu, then click [Properties].
The “System Properties” screen appears.
2 Display [Device Manager].
1 Click [Hardware].
2 Click [Device Manager].
• For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users,
Step 1 is unnecessary. Click the
[Device Manager] tab.
3 If [ Sony DSC] is displayed, delete it.
1 Right-click [ Sony DSC].
2 Click [Uninstall].
The “Confirm Device Removal”
screen appears.
• For Windows 98, 98SE, Me users,
click [Remove].
3 Click [OK].
The device is deleted.
Try the USB driver installation again using
the supplied CD-ROM (page 106).
– Windows XP
Copying images using the
Windows XP AutoPlay wizard
a Make a USB connection
(page 109). Click [Copy
pictures to a folder on my
computer using Microsoft
Scanner and Camera Wizard],
then click [OK].
The “Scanner and Camera Wizard”
screen appears.
b Click [Next].
The images stored on the recording
medium are displayed.
c Click the checkbox of images
that you do not want to copy to
your computer to remove the
checkmark, then click [Next].
The “Picture Name and Destination”
screen appears.
d Select a name and destination
for your pictures, then click
[Next].
Image copying starts. When the
copying is completed, the “Other
Options” screen appears.
112
e Select [Nothing. I’m finished
working with these pictures],
then click [Next].
The “Completing the Scanner and
Camera Wizard” screen appears.
f Click [Finish].
Viewing the images on your
computer
a Click [Start], then click [My
Documents].
The “My Documents” folder contents
are displayed.
The wizard closes.
• This section describes the procedure for
viewing copied images in the “My Documents”
folder.
• When not using Windows XP, double-click
[My Documents] on the desktop.
• You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for
Sony” software to view and edit images on your
computer. For details, see the software’s help
files.
b Double-click the desired image
file.
The image is displayed.
• To continue copying other images, follow the
procedure given under P on page 110 to
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it.
Then, perform the procedure from Step 1
again.
113
Image file storage destinations and file names
The image files recorded with your camera
are grouped as folders in the recording
medium.
Example: when viewing folders on
Windows XP (when using a “Memory
Stick”)
Folder containing image data which was
recorded using the camera not equipped
with the folder creating function.
Folder containing image data which was
recorded using your camera. When not
creating any folders, there is only the
“101MSDCF” folder.
Folder containing E-Mail and TIFF mode
image data/movie data/ Voice mode audio
data which was recorded using the camera
not equipped with the folder creating
function.
• Even when using a Microdrive/CF card,
“Sony MemoryStick” may be displayed,
depending on your computer
environment.
114
• You cannot record any images to
“100MSDCF” or “MSSONY” folders.
The images in these folders are available
only for viewing.
• For more information about the folder,
see pages 50, 83.
Folder
File name
File meaning
101MSDCF to
999MSDCF
DSC0ssss.JPG
• Still image files shot in
– Normal mode (page 27)
– Exposure Bracket mode (page 63)
– Burst mode (page 75)
– Multi Burst mode (page 76)
• Still image files recorded simultaneously in
– RAW mode (page 79)
– TIFF mode (page 80)
– E-Mail mode (page 81)
– Voice mode (page 81)
DSC0ssss.JPE
• Small-size image files shot in E-Mail mode (page 81)
DSC0ssss.MPG
• Audio files shot in Voice mode (page 81)
• Uncompressed (TIFF) image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 80)
DSC0ssss.SRF
• RAW data file recorded in RAW mode (page 79)
MOV0ssss.MPG
• Movie files (page 100)
MOV0ssss.THM
• Index image files recorded in movie mode (page 100)
• ssss stands for any number within the range from 0001 to 9999.
• The numerical portions of the following files are the same.
– A RAW data file shot in RAW mode and its corresponding image file
– An uncompressed image file shot in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file
– A small-size image file shot in E-Mail mode and its corresponding image file
– An audio file shot in Voice mode and its corresponding image file
– A movie file recorded in movie mode and its corresponding index image file
DSC0ssss.TIF
• To view a RAW data file, you have to install exclusive application software from the supplied
CD-ROM.
115
Viewing an image previously
copied to a computer
This operation is required for viewing
image files that have been copied
previously to a computer and already
deleted from the recording medium using
the camera.
Copy the image files stored on your
computer to a recording medium and view
them on the camera.
• Skip Step 1 if you have not changed the file
name assigned by this camera.
• You may not be able to view the image
depending on the image size.
• Images modified with a computer or images
shot using other than this camera may not be
able to be played back on the camera.
• If the warning message for overwriting the data
appears, enter other numbers in Step 1.
• If there is no folder to store the image file,
create a new folder, then copy the image file.
For details on how to create the folder, see
page 50.
116
a Right-click the image file, then
click [Rename]. Change the file
name to “DSC0ssss”.
ssss stands for any number within
the range from 0001 to 9999.
• A file extension may be indicated
depending on the setup of the computer.
The extension of a still image is “JPG”
and that of a movie is “MPG”. Do not
change the extension.
b Copy the image file to a folder
on the recording medium.
1 Right-click the image file, then
click [Copy].
2 Select the [DCIM] folder from
[Removable Disk] or [Sony
MemoryStick] in [My Computer].
3 Right-click the [sssMSDCF]
folder, then click [Paste].
sss stands for any number
within the range from 100 to 999.
Copying images to
your computer
– For Macintosh users
Recommended computer
environment
• If you connect two or more USB equipment to
a single computer at the same time, some
equipment, including your camera, may not
operate depending on the type of USB
equipment.
• Operations are not guaranteed when using a
USB hub.
• Operations are not guaranteed for all the
recommended computer environments
mentioned above.
USB mode
Communication with your
computer
When your computer resumes from the
suspend or sleep mode, communication
between your camera and your computer
may not recover at the same time.
When a USB connector is not
provided on your computer
Disconnecting the USB cable,
removing the recording medium, or
turning off the camera during a USB
connection
Drag and drop the drive icon or the icon of
the recording medium to the “Trash” icon,
then remove the USB cable, remove the
recording medium, or turn off the camera
• If you are using Mac OS X v10.0, remove the
USB cable etc., after you have turned your
computer off.
b Copying images
When neither a USB connector nor a
recording medium slot is provided, you can
copy images using an additional device. See
the Sony Website for details.
http://www.sony.net/
1 Double-click the newly recognized icon
on the desktop.
The contents of the recording medium
inserted in your camera appear.
a Connecting your camera to
your computer
3 Double-click the folder that the images
you want to copy are stored.
For details, see page 109.
2 Double-click “DCIM.”
4 Drag and drop the image files to the hard
disk icon.
The image files are copied to your hard
disk.
For details on the storage location of the
images and file names, see page 114.
OS: Mac OS 9.1, 9.2, or Mac OS X (v10.0/
v10.1/v10.2)
The above OS must be installed at the
factory.
USB connector: Provided as standard
Display: 800 × 600 dots or more
32000-color mode or more
computer. To select the folder, follow the
There are two modes for a USB connection
when connecting with a computer,
[Normal] and [PTP]* modes. The default
setting is the [Normal] mode.
* Compatible only with Mac OS X. When
connected to a computer, only the data in the
folder selected by the camera is copied to the
117
c Viewing the images on your
computer
1 Double-click the hard disk icon.
2 Double-click the desired image file in
the folder containing the copied files.
The image file opens.
• Close down all applications running on
the computer before installing
application.
• You can use the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for
Sony” software to copy images to your
computer and to view images on your
computer. For details on installing, see
operating instructions supplied with the CDROM. For details on operation, see the
software’s help files.
• When the image cannot be displayed, increase
the virtual memory capacity.
• “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” cannot be used
with Mac OS X.
• “Image Transfer” cannot be used with
Macintosh.
118
For Mac OS X users
When you click an E-Mail mode image file,
“There is no application available to open
the document "DSC0ssss.JPE".” may
be shown. In this case, carry out the
following setup. The screen may differ
depending on your OS version.
1 Click [Choose Application...] on the
screen “There is no application available
to open the document
"DSC0ssss.JPE".”
2 Change [Recommended Applications]
to [All Applications].
3 Select [QuickTime Player] from the
application list, then click [Open].
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting
If you have trouble with your camera, try
the following solutions.
1 First, check the items on pages 119 to
129. If the screen shows
“C:ss:ss,” the self-diagnosis
function is working. Please see
page 133.
2 Should your camera still not work
properly, press the RESET button
located inside the battery/“Memory
Stick” cover, then turn on the camera
again. (This will clear the date and time
settings, etc.)
3 Should your camera still not work
properly, consult your Sony dealer or
local authorized Sony service facility.
RESET
Battery and power
Cause
Solution
You cannot charge the
battery pack.
• The camera is turned on.
p Turn the camera off (page 18).
The battery pack cannot
be installed.
• The battery pack is not installed correctly.
p Install the battery pack while pushing the battery eject lever
down using the front edge of the battery pack (page 14).
The e on the display
window flashes quickly
when charging a battery
pack.
• The battery pack has malfunctioned.
p Install the battery pack correctly (page 14).
p Consult your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service
facility.
The r on the display
window does not flash
when charging a battery
pack.
• The AC Adaptor is disconnected.
• The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.
p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 14).
facility.
—
• The battery pack is completely charged.
Troubleshooting
Symptom
119
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The battery remaining
indicator is incorrect, or
sufficient battery
remaining indicator is
displayed but the power
runs out soon.
• You have used the camera for a long time in an
extremely hot or an extremely cold location.
• A deviation has occurred in the remaining
battery time.
• The battery pack is discharged.
• The battery pack is dead (page 147).
p See page 146.
The battery pack runs
down too quickly.
• You have used the camera in an extremely cold
location.
• The DC plug is dirty so the battery pack is not
charged enough.
p See page 146.
• The AC Adaptor is disconnected.
• The AC Adaptor has malfunctioned.
p Properly connect the AC Adaptor (page 17).
facility.
p Install a charged battery pack (page 14).
p Replace the battery pack with a new one.
You cannot turn on the
camera.
The power turns off
suddenly.
• If you do not operate the camera for about three
minutes when using a battery pack, the camera
turns off automatically to prevent wearing down
the battery (page 18).
p Charge the battery pack after using it completely. The battery
remaining indicator displays the correct time (page 15).
p Install a charged battery pack (page 14).
p Clean the DC plug with a cotton bud, etc., and charge the battery
pack (page 143).
p Turn on the camera again (page 18) or use the AC Adaptor
(page 17).
p Replace it with a charged battery pack (page 14).
Shooting still images / movies
120
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The LCD screen is not
turned on even when the
power is turned on.
• The FINDER/LCD switch is set to FINDER.
p Set it to LCD (page 29).
The subject is not visible
on the finder.
• The diopter scale is not properly adjusted.
p Adjust the finder adjustment lever (page 29).
The subject is not visible
on the screen.
• The mode dial is not set to
or
.
, P, S, A, M, SCN p Set it to
, P, S, A, M, SCN or
(pages 27 and 100).
Symptom
Cause
The shooting image is not
displayed on the screen
during a movie shooting.
• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when the A/ p Disconnect the A/V connecting cable.
V connecting cable is connected to the A/V OUT p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
(MONO) jack.
Solution
p Set the macro recording mode. Make sure to place the lens
farther away from the subject than the shortest shooting distance
when shooting (page 33).
•
(Twilight mode) or
(Landscape mode) is p Set it to other modes (page 37).
selected for the Scene Selection function.
• Manual focus mode is selected.
p Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).
The image is out of focus. • The subject is too close.
Precision digital zoom
does not function.
Smart zoom does not
function.
• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Smart] in the SET UP
settings.
• You are shooting in RAW mode.
p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Precision] (pages 30, 48, 140).
• [Digital Zoom] is set to [Precision] in the SET
UP settings.
• The image size is set to [8M] or [3:2].
p Set [Digital Zoom] to [Smart] (pages 30, 48, 140).
• You are shooting in Multi Burst mode.
• You are shooting in RAW mode.
p The precision digital zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages
30, 79).
p Set image size to other settings except [8M] and [3:2]
(page 24).
p The smart zoom cannot be used in Multi Burst mode (pages 30,
76).
p The smart zoom cannot be used in RAW mode (pages 30, 79).
• You are shooting a subject with a light source
behind the subject.
The image is too bright.
• You are shooting a spot lighted subject in a dark
location such as on a stage.
• The brightness of the screen is too high.
p Adjust the exposure (page 59).
When looking at the
screen in a dark place,
some noise may show up
on the screen.
• The camera temporarily brightens the screen to
allow you to check the image being displayed
while you are using the camera in a dark place.
p This will have no effect on the image you shoot.
Vertical streaks appear
when you are shooting a
very bright subject.
• The smear phenomenon is occurring.
p This is not a malfunction.
• The brightness of the screen is too low.
p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).
Troubleshooting
p Select the metering mode (page 58).
p Set the flash mode to (Forced flash) (page 68).
p Adjust the brightness of the screen (pages 48, 141).
The image is too dark.
121
Symptom
Cause
p Insert a recording medium (pages 22, 23).
p Delete the images saved in the recording medium (page 43).
p Change the recording medium.
p Set the switch to the proper position (page 21).
Recording takes a long
time.
• NR slow shutter function is activated.
p Set to a faster shutter speed than 1/25 second (page 55).
A sound is made when
changing between the
NightShot and
NightFraming modes, or
when the shutter button is
lightly pressed while
NightFraming is set.
• The sound is made by the lens in operation.
The image colors are not
correct.
• The NightShot or NightFraming function is set.
p Cancel the Nightshot/NightFraming functions (pages 77 and
78).
p Cancel Picture Effect (page 79).
• Picture effect is activated.
NightShot or
NightFraming does not
function.
122
Solution
You cannot shoot images. • No recording medium is inserted.
• The capacity of the recording medium is
insufficient.
• The
/CF switch is not set to the proper
position.
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick”
is set to the LOCK position.
• The CF card cover is open.
• You cannot shoot while the flash is charging.
, P, S, A, M or
SCN when you want to shoot a still image.
when you want to
shoot a movie.
• The image size is set to [640 (Fine)] when you
shoot a movie.
• The mode dial is set to S, A, M or SCN.
• Manual focus mode is selected.
p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
p Close the CF card cover (page 23).
—
p Set the mode dial to
, P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27).
(page 100).
p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
p Set the image size to any position other than [640 (Fine)].
p Set it to
, P or
(only for NightShot) (pages 77 and 78).
p The NightFraming function cannot be used when manual focus
mode is selected. Set the FOCUS switch to AUTO (page 67).
Symptom
Cause
Solution
Cannot shoot images with
the flash.
• The mode dial is set to
.
• The flash is set to
(No flash).
, P, S, A, M or SCN (page 27).
p Set the flash to “Auto” (No indicator), (Forced flash), or
(Slow synchro) (page 68).
p Set it to other settings (page 37).
•
•
•
•
•
•
(Twilight mode) is selected for the Scene
Selection function.
(Landscape mode) is selected for the Scene
Selection function.
The camera is in Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure
Bracket mode.
[Hot Shoe] in the SET UP settings is set to [On].
When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual] in the
SET UP settings, you did not pop the flash up
using the
NightShot is activated.
p Set the flash to
(Forced flash) (page 37).
p Cancel the Multi Burst, Burst, or Exposure Bracket mode.
p Set it to [Off] (pages 48 and 140).
p Set [Pop-up Flash] to [Auto] in the SET UP settings (pages 48,
140) or pop the flash up using the
OPEN (FLASH) switch
(page 69).
p Select the NightFraming function or cancel the NightShot
function (pages 77 and 78).
p Set it to other settings (page 37).
•
Cannot record in Multi
Burst, Burst, or Exposure
Bracket mode.
• [Mode] (REC Mode) is set to other than
[Normal].
p Set it to [Normal].
The eyes of the subject
come out red.
—
p Set [Red Eye Reduction] to [On] (page 69).
The date and time are
recorded incorrectly.
• The date and time are not set correctly.
p Set the correct date and time (page 19).
The aperture value and
shutter speed flash when
you press and hold the
shutter button halfway
down.
• The exposure is incorrect.
(Twilight mode) or
(Landscape mode)
is selected for the Scene Selection function.
Troubleshooting
The macro mode does not
function.
123
Viewing images
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The image cannot be
played back.
.
• You changed the folder/file name on a computer.
• You cannot play back the image on the camera if
you modify the image on a computer.
• The camera is in USB mode.
p See page 116.
—
The image is coarse right
after being played back.
• The image momentarily becomes rough for
image processing.
The images cannot be
played back on a TV.
• The [Video Out] setting for the camera in SET
UP is incorrect.
• The connection is not correct.
p Set [Video Out] to [NTSC] or [PAL] (pages 48 and 142).
The images cannot be
played back on a
computer.
—
p See page 125.
(page 39).
p Cancel USB communication (page 110).
p Check the connection (page 41).
Deleting/editing an image
124
Symptom
Cause
Your camera cannot
delete an image.
• The image is protected.
p Cancel the protection (page 89).
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
Solution
You have deleted the
image by mistake.
• Once you have deleted an image, you cannot
restore it.
The resizing function
does not work.
• You cannot resize movies, Multi Burst, RAW
data files, and uncompressed (TIFF) images.
—
You cannot attach a print
(DPOF) mark.
• Print (DPOF) marks cannot be attached to
movies or images recorded in RAW mode.
—
You cannot cut a image.
• The movie is not long enough to cut.
• Protected movies cannot be cut.
• Still images cannot be cut.
p Protecting the image can prevent accidental erasure (page 89).
p The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” will prevent
you from deleting images by mistake (page 144).
—
p Cancel the protection (page 89).
—
Computers
Symptom
Cause
Solution
You do not know whether
or not your OS can be
used with the camera.
—
p Check “Recommended computer environment” (pages 105,
117).
You cannot install the
USB driver.
—
p In Windows 2000, log on as Administrator (authorized
Administrators) (page 105).
Your computer does not
recognize your camera.
•
•
•
•
p Turn on the camera (page 18).
p Use the AC Adaptor (page 17).
p Use the supplied USB cable (page 109).
p Disconnect the USB cable, and securely connect it again. Make
sure that “USB Mode” is displayed on the screen (page 109).
p Set it to [Normal] (page 142).
The camera is turned off.
The battery level is too low.
You are not using the supplied USB cable.
The USB cable is not connected securely.
You cannot copy images.
• The camera is not correctly connected to your
computer.
• The copy procedure differs depending on your
OS.
—
—
p Disconnect the USB cables except for those connected to the
keyboard and the mouse.
p Directly connect the camera and your computer without using a
USB hub.
p Install the USB driver (page 106).
p Delete the erroneously recognized device from your computer,
then install the USB driver (pages 106, 112).
p Connect the camera and your computer correctly (page 109).
p Follow the copy procedure for your OS (pages 110, 111, 117).
Troubleshooting
• [USB Connect] is not set to [Normal] in the SET
UP settings.
• The USB connectors on your computer are
connected to other equipment besides the
keyboard, the mouse.
• The camera is not directly connected to your
computer.
• The USB driver is not installed.
• Your computer does not properly recognize the
device because you connected the camera and
your computer with the USB cable before you
installed the “USB Driver” from the supplied
CD-ROM.
p If you are using the “Image Transfer” software, see page 110.
p If you are using the “ImageMixer Ver. 1.5 for Sony” software,
click on HELP.
125
Symptom
Cause
Solution
After making a USB
connection, “Image
Transfer” does not
automatically start.
—
p Select [Launch Image Transfer automatically when the camera,
etc., is connected.] at [Basic] setting (page 111).
p Make a USB connection when the computer is turned on.
The image cannot be
played back on a
computer.
• You try to play back the image recorded in the
RAW mode.
—
—
—
p Install exclusive software from the supplied CD-ROM
(page 79).
click on HELP.
p Consult the computer or software manufacturer.
The image and sound are
affected by noise when
you play back a movie on
a computer.
• You are playing back the movie directly from
the recording medium.
p Copy the movie to the hard disk of the computer and then play
the movie file back from the hard disk (pages 110, 111, 117).
You cannot print an
image.
—
—
p Check the printer settings.
click on HELP.
The error message
appears when loading the
supplied CD-ROM.
• The computer display is not set correctly.
p Set the display mode of your computer as follows:
For Windows, 800 × 600 dots or more, high color (16-bit color,
65000 colors) or more.
For Macintosh, 800 × 600 dots or more, 32000 colors or more.
“Memory Stick”
126
Symptom
Cause
Solution
You cannot insert a
“Memory Stick.”
• You are inserting it backwards.
p Insert it from the right side (page 22).
You cannot record on a
“Memory Stick.”
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick”
• The “Memory Stick” is full.
• The
/CF switch is set to CF.
• When shooting movies, the image size is set to
[640 (Fine)].
p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
You cannot format a
“Memory Stick.”
p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102).
p Set the switch to
(page 21).
p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” p Set it to the recording position (page 144).
Symptom
Cause
You have formatted a
“Memory Stick” by
mistake.
• All the data on the “Memory Stick” are erased by p We recommend that you set the “Memory Stick” write-protect
formatting. You cannot restore them.
switch to the LOCK position to protect accidental erasure
(page 144).
Solution
Microdrive/CF card
Symptom
Cause
Solution
You cannot insert a
Microdrive/CF card.
• You try to insert an unusable CF card.
• You are inserting it backwards.
—
p Insert it from the right side (page 23).
You cannot record on a
Microdrive/CF card.
•
•
•
•
•
p Delete unnecessary images (pages 43, 102).
—
p Set the switch to CF (page 21).
p Use a “Memory Stick PRO” or the Microdrive (pages 100, 144).
p Set the image size to any setting other than [640 (Fine)].
The Microdrive/CF card is full.
An unusable CF card is inserted.
The CF card cover is open.
The
/CF switch is set to
.
When shooting movies using a CF card, the
image size is set to [640 (Fine)].
The Microdrive is heated.
• You are using the Microdrive for a long time.
You have formatted a
Microdrive/CF card by
mistake.
• All the data on the Microdrive/CF card are
erased by formatting. You cannot restore them.
—
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The connection cannot be
established.
• The printer is not compliant with the PictBridge
standard.
• The printer does not set for the connection with
the camera.
• [USB Connect] is not set to [PictBridge] in the
SET UP settings.
p Consult with the printer manufacturer.
p Check that the printer is turned on and can connect with the
camera.
p Set it to [PictBridge] (page 142).
Troubleshooting
PictBridge-compliant printer
127
Symptom
Cause
Solution
You cannot print images.
• The camera does not connect to the printer.
p Check that the camera and the printer are properly connected
using the USB cable.
p Turn on the printer. For further information, refer to the
operating instructions supplied with it.
—
• The printer is not turned on.
• Movies and images recorded in RAW mode
cannot be printed.
• Images modified with a computer or images shot
using other than this camera may not be able to
be printed.
Printing is canceled.
• You disconnected the USB cable before the
(Not disconnect USB cable) mark
disappears.
• You switched the
/CF switch while
printing.
You cannot insert the date
or print images in the
index mode.
• The printer does not provide these functions.
“---- -- --”is printed on the
date-inserted part.
• The recording date data is not recorded on the
image.
• The date may not be inserted in the index mode
—
—
—
p Consult with the printer manufacturer whether the printer
provides these function or not.
p Consult with the printer manufacturer.
p The images that do not have the recording date data cannot be
printed with the date inserted. Set [Date] to [Off] and print it.
Others
Symptom
Cause
Solution
The camera does not
work, no operations can
be performed.
• You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” battery
pack.
• The battery level is low or zero (The
indicator appears.).
• The AC Adaptor is not connected securely.
p Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 146).
• The internal system is not working properly.
p Remove, and then, after one minute, reinstall the battery pack
and turn on the camera. If this does not work, press the RESET
button located inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover with a
pointed object, then turn the power on again. (This will clear the
date and time settings, etc.)
The power is on, but the
camera does not work.
128
p Charge the battery pack (page 14).
p Connect it securely to the DC IN jack of the camera and to a wall
outlet (wall socket) (page 17).
Symptom
Cause
Solution
You cannot identify the
indicator on the screen.
—
p Check the indicator (pages 149 to 154).
The lens gets fogged.
• Condensation is occurring.
p Turn off the camera, leave the camera for about an hour and then
try to use it again (page 143).
The camera gets hot if you
use it for a long time.
—
Troubleshooting
129
Warnings and
messages
The following messages appear on the screen.
130
Message
Meaning/ Corrective Action
No Memory Stick
• Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 22).
• Set the
/CF switch to CF and record the image using the Microdrive/CF card.
System error
• Turn the power off and on again (page 18).
Memory Stick error
• The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144).
• The “Memory Stick” is damaged, or the terminal section of the “Memory Stick” is dirty.
• Insert the “Memory Stick” correctly (page 22).
Memory Stick type error
• The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera (page 144).
Read only memory
• You cannot record or delete images on the “Memory Stick” with this camera.
Memory Stick locked
• The write-protect switch on the “Memory Stick” is set to the LOCK position. Set it to the recording position
(page 144).
No memory space
• The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or data (pages
43, 102).
No CF card
• Insert the Microdrive/CF card (page 23).
• Set the
/CF switch to
and record the image using the “Memory Stick.”
CF card error
• An unusable CF card is inserted (page 145).
• The Microdrive/CF card is damaged, or the terminal section of the Microdrive/CF card is dirty.
• Insert the Microdrive/CF card correctly (page 23).
CF card type error
• The inserted CF card cannot be used with your camera (page 21).
CF card locked
• The Microdrive/CF card is set to be unrecordable. Consult with the Microdrive/CF card manufacturer.
No CF card space
• The capacity of the Microdrive/CF card is insufficient. You cannot record images. Delete unnecessary images or
data (pages 43, 102)
Cover open
• Close the CF card cover.
Format error
• The recording medium format failed. Format the recording medium again (page 45).
For “InfoLITHIUM” battery
only
• The battery pack is not the “InfoLITHIUM” type.
Message
• The battery level is low or zero. Charge the battery pack (page 14). Depending on the conditions of use or the type
of battery pack, the indicator may flash even though there are still 5 to 10 minutes of remaining battery time left.
Folder error
• A folder with the same first three digits number already exists on the recording medium. (For example: 123MSDCF
and 123ABCDE) Select other folders, or create a new folder.
Cannot create more folders • The folder whose first three digits of the name is “999” exists on the recording medium. You cannot create any more
folders.
Cannot record
• You attempted to select the folder that is available only for viewing with your camera. Select other folders (page 51).
• The amount of light is not sufficient, or camera shake may occur because a slower shutter speed is set. Use the flash,
or mount the camera on a tripod to steady the camera.
“Night shot”
• An operation that is not valid while NIGHTSHOT is set was attempted.
“Night framing”
• An operation that is not valid while NIGHTFRAMING is set is attempted.
Manual focus is invalid
• The FOCUS switch is set to MANUAL when the mode dial is set to
The flash is not open
• Pop the flash up using the
640 (Fine) is not available
• A recording medium that does not correspond to the [640 (Fine)] size movie is inserted (page 100).
Busy
• When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate.
Buffer over
• When using the Microdrive, the data writing process was not performed due to a drop in data transmission rate. (This
message is indicated after the “Busy” message appeared.)
Read error
• The movies stored on the Microdrive cannot be played back due to an internal temperature problem or vibration.
• The file is corrupted.
File error
• An error occurred while playing back the image.
Image size over
• You are playing back an image of a size that cannot be played back on your camera.
No file in this folder
• No images have been recorded in this folder.
Cannot divide
• The movie is not long enough to be divided.
• The file is not a movie.
Invalid operation
• You are playing back a file that was created on equipment other than your camera.
Enable pritner to connect
• [USB Connect] is set to [PictBridge], however the camera is connected to a non-PictBridge-compliant device.
Check the device.
Connect to
• You tried to print images before the printer connection was established.
Troubleshooting
device
.
OPEN (FLASH) switch (page 69).
131
Message
No printable image
• You tried to execute [DPOF image] without checking the
mark.
• You tried to execute [All In This Folder] while selecting the folder that stores only movies or images recorded in
RAW mode. You cannot print movies or images recorded in RAW mode.
Printer busy
• Since the printer is busy, it cannot receive print requests. Check the printer.
Paper error
• A paper error occurred, such as paper-out, paper-jam, etc. Check the printer.
Ink error
• An ink error occurred. Check the printer.
Printer error
• The camera received an error from the printer. Check the printer, or check the image you want to print is corrupted.
• The data is being transferred to the printer. Do not disconnect the USB cable.
132
–If a code starting with an
alphabet letter appears
Your camera has a self-diagnosis display.
This function displays the condition of the
camera on the screen using a combination
of a letter and four numerical digits. If this
occurs, check the following code chart and
take the corresponding countermeasure.
The last two digits (indicated by ss) will
differ depending on the state of the camera.
Code
Cause
Countermeasure
C:32: ss
There is trouble with your
camera’s hardware.
Turn the power off and on again (page 18).
C:13: ss
The camera cannot read or write
data on the recording medium.
Re-insert the recording medium several
times.
An unformatted recording
medium is inserted.
Format the recording medium (page 45).
The inserted recording medium
cannot be used with your camera,
or the data is damaged.
Insert a new recording medium (pages 21,
22, 23).
A camera malfunction that you
cannot reverse has occurred.
Press the RESET button (page 119) located
inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover,
then turn on the camera again.
E:61: ss
E:91: ss
If your camera is not still functioning well
after trying the countermeasure a couple of
times, the camera may need to be repaired.
Contact your Sony dealer or local
autholized Sony service facility and inform
them of the 5-digit code.
Troubleshooting
133
The number of images
that can be saved/
shooting time
The number of images that can be saved and
the shooting time are different, depending
on the capacity of the recording medium,
the image size, and the image quality. Refer
to the following charts when you choose a
recording medium.
“Memory Stick”
RAW
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
(Units: images)
16MB
0 (0)
—
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
32MB
1 (1)
—
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
64MB
3 (3)
—
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)
128MB
6 (6)
—
6 (6)
6 (7)
7 (7)
7 (7)
MSX-256 MSX-512
10 (11)
22 (24)
—
—
11 (12)
23 (25)
12 (12)
25 (26)
12 (13)
26 (26)
13 (13)
27 (27)
16MB
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
0 (0)
32MB
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
1 (1)
64MB
2 (2)
2 (2)
2 (2)
2 (2)
2 (2)
2 (2)
128MB
4 (4)
5 (5)
4 (5)
5 (5)
5 (5)
5 (5)
MSX-256 MSX-512
8 (8)
17 (18)
9 (9)
18 (20)
8 (9)
17 (18)
9 (9)
18 (19)
9 (9)
19 (19)
9 (9)
19 (19)
16MB
3 (7)
3 (7)
6 (11)
9 (17)
22 (38)
69 (121)
32MB
8 (14)
8 (14)
12 (22)
19 (34)
45 (78)
140 (245)
64MB
16 (29)
16 (29)
25 (45)
39 (69)
91 (157)
281 (492)
TIFF
• The number of images is listed in Fine
(Standard) order.
• The values for the number of images that
can be saved and the shooting time may
vary, depending on the shooting
conditions.
• For normal shooting times and numbers
of images that can be saved, see pages 25,
26.
• When the remaining number of images
recordable is more than 9999, “ >9999 ”
is indicated on the screen. And when it is
more than 999, “ 999 ” is indicated on the
display window.
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
(Units: images)
Voice*
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
MSX-1G
34 (37)
38 (41)
36 (38)
38 (39)
39 (39)
40 (40)
(Units: images)
* For five-second audio recording
134
MSX-1G
45 (49)
—
48 (51)
51 (53)
53 (54)
55 (55)
128MB MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
32 (58)
58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)
32 (58)
58 (106) 119 (216) 242 (442)
50 (91)
90 (166) 183 (337) 375 (689)
79 (138) 142 (246) 290 (500) 592 (1022)
183 (316) 324 (549) 660 (1117) 1347 (2280)
564 (987) 1020 (1785) 2074 (3630) 4234 (7410)
E-mail
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
(Units: images)
16MB
4 (7)
4 (7)
6 (11)
9 (17)
23 (42)
81 (162)
32MB
8 (14)
8 (14)
12 (23)
20 (35)
47 (85)
163 (327)
64MB
128MB
16 (29)
32 (59)
16 (29)
32 (59)
25 (46)
50 (94)
40 (71)
80 (143)
96 (171) 192 (343)
328 (657) 658 (1317)
MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)
59 (108) 120 (220) 244 (449)
91 (170) 186 (345) 380 (705)
145 (255) 296 (518) 604 (1058)
340 (595) 691 (1210) 1411 (2470)
1190 (2381) 2420 (4841) 4940 (9881)
Multi Burst
1M
(Units: images)
16MB
24 (46)
32MB
50 (93)
64MB
101(187)
128MB
202 (376)
16MB
—
32MB
—
64MB
—
128MB
—
MSX-256 MSX-512 MSX-1G
357 (649) 726 (1320) 1482 (2694)
Movie
640 (Fine)
640
(Standard)
160
MSX-256 MSX-512
0:02:57
0:06:02
MSX-1G
0:12:20
0:00:42
0:01:27
0:02:56
0:05:54
0:10:42
0:21:47
0:44:27
0:11:12
0:22:42
0:45:39
1:31:33
2:51:21
5:47:05
11:44:22
The numbers indicate the recording time. For example: “1:31:33” indicates “1 hour, 31 minutes, 33 seconds.”
135
Microdrive
RAW
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
TIFF
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
Voice*
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
E-mail
(Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
50 (55)
—
54 (57)
56 (58)
59 (60)
61 (61)
(Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
38 (41)
42 (45)
40 (42)
42 (43)
43 (44)
44 (44)
(Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
269 (490)
269 (490)
416 (764)
657 (1133)
1494 (2528)
4695 (8217)
* For five-second audio recording
136
8M
3:2
5M
3M
1M
VGA
Multi Burst
1M
(Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
271 (498)
271 (498)
421 (782)
670 (1173)
1565 (2739)
5478 (10956)
(Units: images)
1G (DSCM-11000)
1643 (2988)
Movie
640 (Fine)
640
(Standard)
160
1G (DSCM-11000)
0:13:41
0:49:13
12:42:06
The numbers indicate the recording time. For
example: “12:42:06” indicates “12 hours, 42
minutes, 6 seconds.”
Menu items
Menu items that can be changed differ
depending on the position of the mode dial.
The screen shows only the items you can
operate based on the current position of the
mode dial. Default settings are indicated
with x.
When the mode dial is set to
Item
(Image Size)
Mode (REC Mode)
Setting
Description
x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA
Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).
RAW
TIFF
Voice
E-Mail
–
–
–
–
Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79).
Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80).
Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81).
Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size
(page 81).
– Records an image using the normal recording mode.
xNormal
Item
SCN (Scene)
ISO (ISO)
Setting
/
/
Description
/x
800 / 400 / 200 / 100 / 64 / xAuto
Sets the Scene Selection mode (page 37). (This setting can be made only in SCN
mode.)
Selects the ISO sensitivity. When shooting under dark conditions or shooting a fastmoving subject, use a high-number setting. When recording high-quality images, use
a low-number setting (page 64). (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Image Size)
x 8M/3:2/5M/3M/1M/VGA
Selects the image size when shooting still images (page 24).
(P.Quality)
xFine / Standard
Records images with fine image quality mode. / Records images in the standard
image quality mode (page 49).
When the mode dial is set to P, S, A, M or SCN
137
Item
Setting
Description
Mode (REC Mode)
RAW
TIFF
Voice
E-Mail
–
–
–
–
xNormal
BRK (Bracket Step)
Records RAW data file in addition to the JPEG file (page 79).
Records uncompressed (TIFF) file in addition to the JPEG file (page 80).
Records an audio file (with a still image) in addition to the JPEG file (page 81).
Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG file in addition to the selected image size
(page 81).
– Records an image using the normal recording mode.
±1.0EV/x±0.7EV/±0.3EV
Sets the exposure compensation value when recording three images with each
exposure value shifted (page 63). (This setting can be made only in Exposure Bracket
mode using the
/BRK button.)
(Interval)
1/7.5 / 1/15 / x1/30
Selects the Multi Burst between-frame shutter interval (page 76). (This setting can be
made only in Multi Burst mode using the
/BRK button.)
(Flash Level)
High / xNormal / Low
Selects the amount of flash light (page 70).
PFX (P.Effect)
Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff
Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).
COLOR (Color)
Real/ xStandard
Selects the color reproduction mode (page 74).
(Saturation)
+ / xNormal / –
Adjusts the saturation of the image. The
indicator appears (except when the
setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Contrast)
+ / xNormal / –
Adjusts the contrast of the image. The
indicator appears (except when the setting
is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
+ / xNormal / –
Adjusts the sharpness of the image. The
indicator appears (except when the
setting is Normal.) (This setting cannot be made in SCN mode.)
(Sharpness)
Item
(Image Size)
PFX (P.Effect)
138
Setting
Description
640 (Fine)/ x 640 (Standard)/160
Selects the image size when shooting movies (page 100).
Solarize / Sepia /Neg.Art / xOff
Sets the special effects for the image (page 79).
Item
(Folder)
Setting
Description
OK/Cancel
Selects the folder that contains the images you want to play back (page 83).
- (Protect)
—
Protects/unprotects images against accidental erasure (page 89).
DPOF (DPOF)
—
Selects still images you want to attach/cancel the print (DPOF) mark (page 91).
(Print)
—
Prints images using a PictBridge-compliant printer (page 93).
(Slide)
Interval
– Sets the slide show interval (page 85). (For single-image screen only.)
x3 sec/ 5 sec/ 10 sec/ 30 sec/ 1 min
– Selects images from either folder or recording media.
xFolder/All
– Repeats the slide show.
xOn/Off
– Starts the slide show.
– Cancels the settings and execution of the slide show.
Image
Repeat
Start
Cancel
(Resize)
(Rotate)
(Divide)
8M / 5M / 3M / 1M / VGA / Cancel Changes the recorded image size (page 90). (For single-image screen only.)
(counter-clockwise) /
(clockwise) / OK / Cancel
OK / Cancel
Rotates the still image (page 86). (For single-image screen only.)
Divides a movie (page 104). (For single-image screen only.)
139
SET UP items
Set the mode dial to SET UP. The SET UP
screen appears.
Default settings are indicated with x.
1
Item
Setting
Description
AF Mode
Single / xMonitor / Cont
Selects the focus operation mode (page 66).
Digital Zoom
Smart / xPrecision
Selects the digital zoom mode (page 30).
Date/Time
Day&Time / Date / xOff
Selects whether to insert the date and time into the image (page 36). When shooting
movies or images recorded in Multi Burst mode, the date and time cannot be inserted
in the image. Also, the date and time will not be displayed when shooting. The date
and time will be displayed when the image is played back.
Red Eye Reduction
On / xOff
Reduces the red-eye phenomenon when using a flash (page 69).
Hologram AF
xAuto / Off
Selects whether to emit hologram AF light. Used when it is difficult to focus on the
subject in dark conditions (page 35).
Auto Review
On / xOff
When shooting still images, selects whether to display the image just after you shoot
a still image. Setting this to [On] displays the recorded images for about two seconds.
During this time, you cannot shoot the next image.
Item
Setting
Description
Expanded Focus
xOn / Off
When focusing manually, the image is enlarged to 2× (page 67).
Hot Shoe
On / xOff
Selects whether to use a commercially available external flash (page 72).
Pop-up Flash
xAuto / Manual
Selects whether to pop up the flash automatically (page 69).
2
140
(Camera 1)
(Camera 2)
(Memory Stick Tool) (When the
/CF switch is set to
)
Item
Setting
Description
Format
OK / Cancel
Formats the “Memory Stick.” Note that formatting erases all data on a “Memory Stick,” including even
protected images (page 45).
Create REC.
Folder
OK / Cancel
Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).
Change REC.
Folder
OK / Cancel
Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).
(CF Card Tool) (When the
/CF switch is set to CF)
Setting
Description
Format
OK / Cancel
Formats the Microdrive/CF card. Note that formatting erases all data on a Microdrive/CF card, including
even protected images (page 45). You cannot format it using the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor that is
compliant with the CompactFlash slot (page 145).
Create REC.
Folder
OK / Cancel
Creates a folder for recording images (page 50).
Change REC.
Folder
OK / Cancel
Changes a folder for recording images (page 51).
Item
Setting
Description
LCD Brightness
Bright/ xNormal/
Dark
Selects the LCD brightness. This has no effect on the recorded images.
LCD Backlight
Bright/ xNormal
Selects the brightness of the LCD backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see
when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster.
Displayed only when you are using the camera with the battery pack.
EVF Backlight
Bright/ xNormal
Selects the brightness of the finder backlight. Selecting [Bright] makes the screen bright and easy to see
when using the camera outdoors or in other bright locations, but also uses up the battery charge faster.
Shutter
– Turns on the shutter sound when you press the shutter button.
– Turns on the beep/shutter sound when you press the center of the multi-selector/the shutter button.
– Turns off the beep/shutter sound.
(Setup 1)
Beep
x On
Off
Item
141
Item
Language
Setting
Description
—
Displays the menu items, warnings and messages in selected language.
(Setup 2)
Item
Setting
Description
File Number
x Series
– Assigns numbers to files in sequence even if the recording medium is changed or the recording folder
is changed.
– Resets the file numbering and starts from 0001 each time the folder is changed. (When the recording
folder contains a file, a number one higher than the largest number is assigned.)
Reset
142
USB Connect
PictBridge/PTP/
xNormal
Switches the USB mode when connecting with a computer or a PictBridge-compliant printer using the
USB cable.
Video Out
NTSC
PAL
– Sets the video output signal to NTSC mode (e.g., Japan, USA).
– Sets the video output signal to PAL mode (e.g., Europe).
Clock Set
OK / Cancel
Sets the date and time (pages 19, 48).
Precautions
Do not leave the camera in the
following places
• In extremely hot place, such as in a car
parked in the sun. The camera body may
become deformed or this may cause a
malfunction.
• Under direct sunlight or near a heater.
The camera body may become deformed
or this may cause a malfunction.
• On rocking vibration
• Near strong magnetic place
• On sandy or in dusty place
Do not let sand get into the camera. Sand
or dust may cause the camera to
malfunction and sometimes this
malfunction cannot be repaired.
Cleaning the LCD screen
Clean the screen surface with an LCD
cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove
fingerprints, dust, etc.
Cleaning the lens
Wipe the lens with a soft cloth to remove
fingerprints, dust, etc.
Cleaning the camera surface
Clean the camera surface with a soft cloth
slightly moistened with water, then wipe the
surface with a dry cloth. Do not pour volatile
insecticide on the camera, contact with
rubber or vinyl for a long time, or use the
following as this may damage the finish or
the casing.
• Thinner
• Benzine
• Alcohol
• Diposable cloth
Note on operating temperature
The camera is designed for use within a
temperature range of 0°C to 40°C (32°F to
104°F). (When using a Microdrive: 5°C to
40°C (41°F to 104°F)) Shooting in
extremely cold or hot locations that exceed
this range is not recommended.
On moisture condensation
If the camera is brought directly from a cold
to a warm location, or is placed in a very
damp room, moisture may condense inside
or outside the camera. This moisture
condensation may cause a malfunction of
the camera.
Moisture condensation occurs easily
when:
• The camera is brought from a cold
location such as a ski slope into a warmly
heated room.
• The camera is taken from an airconditioned room or car interior to the hot
outdoors, etc.
To prevent moisture condensation
When bringing the camera from a cold
place to a warm place, seal the camera in a
plastic bag and leave it in the new location
for about an hour. Remove the plastic bag
when the camera has adapted to the new
temperature.
If moisture condensation occurs
Turn off the camera and wait about an hour
for the moisture to evaporate. Note that if
you attempt to shoot with moisture
remaining inside the lens, you will be
unable to record clear images.
Cleaning
Cleaning the DC plug
Clean the DC plug of the AC Adaptor with
a dry cotton bud. Do not use the dirty plug.
Use of the dirty plug may not properly
charge the battery pack.
143
The internal rechargeable button
battery
This camera has an internal rechargeable
button battery for maintaining the date and
time and other settings regardless of
whether the power is on or off.
This rechargeable button battery is
continually charged as long as you are using
the camera. However, if you use the camera
for only short periods it discharges
gradually, and if you do not use the camera
at all for about one month it becomes
completely discharged. In this case, be sure
to charge this rechargeable button battery
before using the camera.
Note that even if this rechargeable button
battery is not charged, you can still use the
camera as long as you do not record the date
and time.
How to charge
Connect the camera to a wall outlet (wall
socket) using the AC Adaptor, or install the
charged battery pack, and leave the camera
for 24 hours or more with the power turned
off.
• The rechargeable button battery is located
inside the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Never
remove the rechargeable button battery.
144
4) [640
The “Memory Stick”
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable
and versatile IC recording medium with a
data capacity that exceeds the capacity of a
floppy disk.
The “Memory Stick” that can be used with
this camera is as follows. However, we have
no guarantee of proper operation.
“Memory Stick”
Memory Stick
Memory Stick Duo 1)
Memory Stick Duo (MagicGate/
higher speed data transmission
compatible) 1)
MagicGate Memory Stick
MagicGate Memory Stick Duo 1)
Memory Stick PRO
Memory Stick PRO Duo 1)
1) When
Recording/
playback
Yes
Yes
(Fine)] size movies can be recorded or
played back only using a “Memory Stick PRO”
or Microdrive.
• The “Memory Stick” formatted with a computer
is not guaranteed to operate with this camera.
• The data read/write time differs depending on
the combination of the “Memory Stick” and a
device.
Notes on use of the “Memory Stick”
• You cannot record, edit, or delete images when
the write-protect switch is set to LOCK. The
position or the shape of the write-protect switch
may differ depending on the “Memory Stick”
you use.
Terminal
Yes 2)3)
Yes 2)
Yes 2)
Yes2)3)
Yes 2)3)
using it with this camera, be sure to
insert into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.
2) “MagicGate Memory Stick” is equipped with
the MagicGate copyright protection
technology. MagicGate is copyright protection
technology that uses encryption technology.
However, because your camera does not
support the MagicGate standards, data recorded
with your camera is not subject to MagicGate
copyright protection.
3) Supports high-speed data transmission using
the parallel interface.
Write-protect
switch
Labeling position
• Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while
reading or writing data.
• Data may be damaged in the following cases:
– Removing the “Memory Stick” or turning off
the camera while reading or writing data.
– Using the camera in a location subject to the
effects of static electricity or noise.
• We recommend you back up any important
data.
• Do not attach any other material than the
supplied label on the labeling position.
• When you attach the supplied label, be sure to
attach it to the labeling position. Be careful that
the label does not stick out.
• When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,”
put it in the case supplied with it.
• Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory
Stick” with your hand or a metal object.
• Do not strike, bend or drop a “Memory Stick.”
• Do not disassemble or modify a “Memory
Stick.”
• Do not expose the “Memory Stick” to water.
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in
the following places:
– In a car parked in the sun, or at a high
temperature.
– Under direct sunlight.
– In a humid place or near corrosive material.
Notes on use of the “Memory Stick
Duo”
Note on use of the “Memory Stick
PRO”
“Memory Stick PRO” with a capacity of up to
1 GB is verified for this camera.
The Microdrive
A Microdrive is a compact and lightweight
hard disk drive that complies with Compact
Flash TypeII. Camera operations are
confirmed using a Microdrive (Hitachi
Global Storage Technologies, Inc. DSCM11000 (1 GB)).
Notes on use of the Microdrive
• Be sure to format the Microdrive using this
camera when you use it for the first time.
• The Microdrive is a compact hard disk drive.
Since the Microdrive is a rotating disk, the
Microdrive is not strong enough to resist
vibration and shock compared to a “Memory
Stick,” which uses flash memory.
Be sure not to transmit vibration or shock to the
Microdrive during playback or shooting.
• Data may be damaged in the following cases:
– Removing the Microdrive while reading or
writing data.
– If you store the Microdrive near corrosive
material.
• Note that the use of the Microdrive under 5°C
(41°F) may bring performance degradation.
Operating temperature range when using the
Microdrive: 5° to 40°C (41°F to 104°F)
• Note that the camera cannot be used under low
atmospheric pressure (above 3 000 meters
above sea-level).
• If the data transmission rate becomes slow in an
extremely high or low temperature and writing
movie data cannot be done, “Busy” is indicated
on the screen and writing data stops (page 131).
• Be sure to insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into
the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor when using the
“Memory Stick Duo” with the camera. If you
insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the camera
without attaching the Memory Stick Duo
Adaptor, you may not be able to remove the
“Memory Stick Duo.”
• Verify that you are inserting the “Memory Stick
Duo” in the proper direction when inserting it
into the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor.
• Verify that you are inserting the Memory Stick
Duo Adaptor in the proper direction when
inserting it into the camera. Inserting it in the
wrong direction may cause a malfunction.
• Do not insert a “Memory Stick Duo” that is not
inserted into a Memory Stick Duo Adaptor into
a “Memory Stick”-compatible unit. This may
cause a malfunction of the unit.
• When formatting the “Memory Stick Duo,”
insert the “Memory Stick Duo” into the
Memory Stick Duo Adaptor and use the
“Memory Stick” slot.
• When the “Memory Stick Duo” is equipped
with the write protect switch, release its lock.
• You can use the Memory Stick Duo Adaptor
that is compliant with the CompactFlash slot,
however, you cannot format it using this camera
and cannot record [640 (Fine)] movies.
145
• The Microdrive may be hot just after it has been
used. Be careful when you handle it.
• Do not write on the label.
• Do not remove the label or attach a new label
over the label.
• When you carry or store the Microdrive, put it
in the case supplied with it.
• Do not expose the Microdrive to water.
• Do not press on the label strongly.
• Hold the sides of the Microdrive in your hand
and do not squeeze the Microdrive.
On “InfoLITHIUM”
battery pack
What is the “InfoLITHIUM”
battery pack?
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack is a
lithium-ion battery pack that has functions
for communicating information related to
operating conditions of your camera.
The “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack
calculates the power consumption
according to the operating conditions of
your camera, and displays the remaining
battery time in minutes.
Effective use of the battery pack
• Battery performance decreases in lowtemperature surroundings. So, the time
that the battery pack can be used is
shorter in cold places. We recommend the
following to ensure longer battery pack
use:
– Put the battery pack in a pocket close to
your body to warm it up, and insert it in
your camera immediately before you
start shooting.
• Frequently operating the zoom or flash
wears out the battery charge faster.
• We recommend having spare battery
packs handy for two or three times the
expected shooting time, and making trial
shots before taking the actual shots.
• Do not expose the battery pack to water.
The battery pack is not water-resistant.
Charging the battery pack
We recommend charging the battery pack
in an ambient temperature of between 10°C
to 30°C (50°F to 86°F). You may not be
able to efficiently charge the battery pack
outside of this temperature range.
146
Remaining battery time indicator
The power may go off although the battery
remaining indicator shows there is enough
power to operate. Use the battery pack up
and charge the battery pack fully again so
that the indication on the battery remaining
indicator is correct. Note, however, that the
correct battery indication sometimes will
not be restored if the camera is used in high
temperatures for a long time or left in a fully
charged state, or the battery pack is
frequently used.
How to store the battery pack
• If the battery pack is not to be used for a
long time, do the following procedure
once per year to maintain proper function.
1 Fully charge the battery.
2 Discharge on your camera.
3 Remove the battery from your camera
and store it in a dry, cool place.
• To use the battery pack up on your
camera, leave the camera to on in slide
show playback mode (page 85) until the
power goes off.
Battery life
x Camera
[System]
CCD
Lens
7.1× zoom lens
f=7.1 to 51 mm
200 mm)
F2.0-2.8
Exposure control
White balance
One-push
compatible
(Monaural)
Recording medium
Viewfinder
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
Electric viewfinder (color)
[Output connectors]
Minijack
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω, unbalanced,
sync negative
Accessory jack
USB jack
mini-B
USB communication
[LCD screen]
LCD panel used
134 400 (560×240) dots
[Finder]
LCD panel used
235 200 (980×240) dots
• The battery life is limited. Battery
capacity decreases little by little as you
use it more and more, and as time passes.
When the battery operating time is
shortened considerably, a probable cause
is that the battery pack has reached the
end of its life. Buy a new battery pack.
• The battery life varies according to how it
is stored and the operating conditions and
environment for each battery pack.
Flash
Specifications
147
[Power, general]
Accessories
Used battery pack
NP-FM50
Power requirements
7.2 V
screen on)
2.2 W
0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
+40°C (41° to +104°F))
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm
(5 3/8 × 3 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)
included)
Mass
included)
Speaker
Dynamic speaker
Power requirements
AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption
0.35 − 0.18 A
Power consumption
18 W
Output voltage
8.4 V DC, 1.5 A
0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
Maximum dimensions
Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
(2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D),
Mass
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Exif Print
Compatible
Compatible
PictBridge
Compatible
148
Used battery
Lithium-ion battery
Maximum voltage
DC 8.4 V
Nominal voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
AC Adaptor (1)
USB cable (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
Lens cap (1)
Lens cap strap (1)
Lens hood (1)
without notice.
* The selected mode mark or setting value is not
displayed on the display window as it is in the
LCD screen/finder. Note that the mark on the
display window is not changed even when you
change the mode or setting value.
Display window
1
7
2
8
3
9
The page numbers in parentheses indicate
the location of additional important
information.
4
q;
5
6
F EV adjustment indicator* (59)
G Aperture value indicator (56)/
Available movie recording time
indicator (second) (100)
H Burst/Multi Burst/Exposure
bracket indicator* (63, 75, 76)
I Metering mode indicator (58)
J Remaining number of recordable
images indicator (25, 26)
A Self-diagnosis display (133)/
Shutter speed indicator (55)/
Available movie recording time
indicator (minute) (100)/
Available shooting time indicator
(15)/
PLAY indicator
B Flash mode (68)
C Self-timer indicator (34)
D White balance indicator* (73)
E Battery remaining indicator (15)
149
The LCD/finder screen
For shooting still images
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
q;
qa
qs
qd
qf
150
80min
SOLARIZE
MAF
VGA FINE 101
1/30"
400
DATE
C:32:00
REAL ISO400
0.3EV
250 F2.0 +2.0EV
qg
qh
qj
qk
ql
w;
wa
ws
wd
wf
wg
wh
wj
wk
A Burst/Multi Burst indicator
(75, 76)
B Image size indicator (24)/
Multi Burst between-frame
interval indicator (76)
C Recording mode indicator
(79–81)
D AE/AF lock indicator (27)
E Battery remaining indicator (15)
F White balance indicator (73)/
Mode dial indicator/
Scene Selection indicator (37)/
Flash mode (34)/Red-eye
reduction (69)
G Sharpness indicator (138)/
Saturation indicator (138)/
Contrast indicator (138)/
Hologram AF indicator (35, 140)
H Metering mode indicator (58)/
Picture effect indicator (79)
I NightShot/NightFraming
indicator (77)
J Low battery warning (131)
K Macro (33)
L AF mode (66)/
AF range finder frame indicator
(65)/
Focus distance information
indicator (67)
• Pressing the MENU button switches the menu/
guide menu on/off.
M NR slow shutter indicator (55)/
Shutter speed indicator (55)
N Aperture value indicator (56)
O Image quality indicator (49)
P Recording folder indicator (50)
Q Remaining number of recordable
images indicator (25, 26)
R Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
S Self-diagnosis display (133)/
Date/time indicator (36)/
Color reproduction indicator
(74)/
ISO sensitivity (64)
T Bracket step indicator (63)
U Self-timer indicator (34)
V Vibration warning indicator (131)
W Spot metering cross hair (58)
X AF range finder frame (65)
Y Histogram indicator (60)
wh AE LOCK indicator (62)
wj EV adjustment indicator (59)
wk Menu/guide menu (47)
information.
151
For shooting movies
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
152
80min
STBY
101
00:00:00 [00:28:25]
C:32:00
SOLARIZE
Image size indicator (100)
Recording mode indicator (100)
Battery remaining indicator (15)
White balance indicator (73)
Metering mode indicator (58)/
Picture effect indicator (79)
NightShot indicator (77)
Low battery warning (131)
Macro (33)
AF range finder frame indicator
(65)
Recording time [Maximum
recordable time] indicator (100)
Recording folder indicator (50)
+2.0EV
q;
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
qh
qj
qk
ql
L Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
M Self-diagnosis display (133)
N Self-timer indicator (34)
O AF range finder frame (65)
P Spot metering cross hair (58)
Q AE LOCK indicator (62)
R EV adjustment indicator (59)
S Menu/guide menu (47)
For still image playback
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
80min
x1.3
VGA
101
12/12
C:32:00
+2.0EV ISO400
AWB
2000 F5.6
8
BACK/NEXT
VOLUME
J Image number
K Number of images recorded in
the playback folder
L Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
M Self-diagnosis display (133)
N EV adjustment indicator (59)/
ISO sensitivity (64)
O Metering mode indicator (58)/
Flash indicator/
White balance indicator (73)
P Shutter speed indicator (55)/
Aperture value indicator (56)
Q Histogram indicator (60)
R Recording date/time of the
image (19)/Menu/guide menu (47)
A PictBridge connecting indicator
(93)
B Change folder indicator (83)
C Image size indicator (24)
D Recording mode indicator
(79–81)
E Volume indicator (81)/
Protect mark indicator (89)/
Print (DPOF) mark indicator (91)
F Zoom indicator (30)/
Jog playback indicator (87)
G Not disconnect USB cable
indicator (93)
H Folder-file number (114)
I Playback folder indicator (83)
9
q;
qa
qs
qd
qf
qg
qh
qj
qk
information.
153
For movie playback
1
2
3
80min
4
101
101
VOL.
8/8
00:00:12
5
6
7
8
9
q;
qa
DPOF
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
154
Change folder indicator (83)
Image size indicator (101)
Recording mode indicator (101)
Playback indicator (101)/
Volume indicator (101)
Playback folder indicator (83)
Image number/Number of
images recorded in the playback
folder
Recording folder indicator (50)
Remaining recording medium
capacity indicator
Counter (101)
Playback screen (101)
Playback bar (101)
Menu/Guide menu (47)
qs
information.
Quick reference chart
This section describes the restrictions in the setup of the following functions, depending on the mode dial position or the setup of some functions
: shutter speed, aperture, flash, etc.
Quick chart of exposure, white balance, and auto focus functions (based on the mode dial position)
Aperture
ISO
White
balance
Metering
mode
AF range
finder
frame
Auto (1/8 to 1/3200)
Auto (F2 to F8)
Auto (64 to 200)
Auto
Multi-pattern
metering
Multipoint
P
Auto (1 to 1/3200)
Auto (F2 to F8)
Auto (64 to 200)/Setup is
available from 64 to 800
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
S
Setup is available from 30 to 1/2000 F2 to F8
Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
A
8 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to
F7.1)
Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is
to F8
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
Setup is available from F2 Auto (64 fixed)/Setup is
to F8
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
Setup is
available
8 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)
M
30 to 1/2000 (aperture value F2 to
F7.1)
30 to 1/3200 (aperture value F8)
• Note that shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not as valid for the above table when the flash strobes.
• When using the digital zoom or horogram AF, the AF is automatically set to focus on the centrally-located subject.
Shutter speed (second)
155
Quick chart of flash mode
Mode dial
Normal/E-Mail/Voice/RAW/TIFF
P
Auto/ /
/
Auto/ /
/
S
/
A
/
M
/
SCN
Exposure
Bracket
Multi Burst
/
NightShot
NightFraming
—
—
—
—
—
—
Twilight
—
—
—
—
—
Twilight
portrait
—
—
—
—
—
Landscape
Portrait
/
Auto/ /
/
• When shooting movies, the flash mode is set to
(No flash).
• When [Pop-up Flash] is set to [Manual], the flash mode is set to
156
Burst
(Forced flash),
(Slow synchro), or
(No flash).
—
—
—
—
The relation between the shutter
speed and aperture
To shoot clear images, selecting the proper
exposure is very important, adding to the
chance of achieving the proper focus. The
exposure is an amount of light that is
determined by the shutter speed and
aperture value. The shutter speed is adjusted
by the time, longer or shorter. The aperture
is adjusted by the scale of the lens hole,
larger or smaller. When the shutter speed is
faster by one step, the aperture is opened by
one step to get the same exposure.
The movement of the program diagram
The program diagram shows the movement of the combination of the shutter speed and
aperture value.
The program shift function (page 54) quickly shifts the combination of exposure that the
camera has decided upon.
Program diagram (example)
The movement of the program shift (EV: 10, ISO sensitivity: 100) (example)
• When the EV value remains the same, the brightness of the recorded image is the same.
Brighter subject
3
4
5
6
Darker subject
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
EV
2
F8
F5.6
F4
Aperture
F2
1/4
1
1/2
1/15
1/60
1/250 1/1000
1/8
1/30
1/125
1/500 1/2000
Shutter speed
F2.8
157
Index
Index
A
A/V connecting cable ...................................... 41
AC Adaptor ................................................ 14, 17
Access lamp ..................................................... 22
Advanced accessory shoe ................................ 71
AE LOCK ........................................................ 62
AE/AF lock ................................................ 27, 29
AF .................................................................... 27
AF Mode .......................................................... 66
AF range finder ................................................ 65
Aperture priority .............................................. 56
Auto adjustment mode ..................................... 27
Auto Focus ................................................. 29, 65
Auto Power Off function ................................. 18
Auto Review .................................................. 140
CompactFlash .................................................. 21
Continuous AF ................................................. 67
Contrast .......................................................... 138
Copying images to your computer ......... 110, 111
Cutting movies ............................................... 104
D
DC plug ...................................................... 14, 17
Deleting movies ............................................. 102
Deleting still images ........................................ 43
Digital zoom .................................................... 31
Display window ............................................. 149
Divide ............................................................ 104
DPOF ............................................................... 91
E
E-Mail .............................................................. 81
EV adjustment ................................................. 59
Exposure bracket ............................................. 63
B
Battery remaining indicator ............................. 15
Beep/shutter sound ........................................ 141
Burst ................................................................ 75
C
CD-ROM ....................................................... 106
Center AF ........................................................ 65
Charging the battery pack ................................ 14
Charging time .................................................. 15
Cleaning ......................................................... 143
Clock Set ........................................... 19, 48, 142
Color ................................................................ 74
Command dial ................................................. 48
158
H
Histogram ........................................................ 60
Hologram AF ........................................... 35, 140
Hot Shoe ........................................................ 140
I
Image quality ................................................... 49
Image size .................................................. 24, 25
Image Transfer ............................................... 107
ImageMixer .................................................... 108
Index screen ..................................................... 39
Indicators on the screen during shooting ......... 30
InfoLITHIUM battery pack ........................... 146
Inserting a Memory Stick ................................ 22
Inserting a Microdrive ..................................... 23
Inserting the date and time ............................... 36
Installation ..................................... 106, 107, 108
ISO ................................................................... 64
J
F
File names ...................................................... 114
File storage destinations ................................ 114
Finder ............................................................... 29
Finder adjustment ............................................ 29
Flash ........................................................... 34, 68
Flash Level ....................................................... 70
Flexible spot AF .............................................. 66
Folder ......................................................... 50, 83
Format .............................................................. 45
Framing burst ................................................... 75
JPG ................................................................. 115
L
LCD screen brightness ................................... 141
LCD screen display ........................................ 150
Lens hood ......................................................... 13
M
Macro ............................................................... 33
Manual exposure .............................................. 57
Manual focus ................................................... 67
Memory Stick ................................................ 144
Menu ........................................................ 47, 137
Metering mode .................................................58
Microdrive ......................................................145
Mode dial ..........................................................27
Moisture condensation ...................................143
Monitoring AF ..................................................66
MPG ...............................................................115
Multi Burst .................................................76, 87
Multi-pattern metering .....................................58
Multipoint AF ...................................................65
Multi-selector ...................................................18
N
NightFraming ...................................................78
NightShot .........................................................77
NR slow shutter ................................................55
NTSC ..............................................................142
Number of images that can be saved or shooting
time .....................................16, 25, 26, 134
P
Quick reference chart .................................... 155
Quick Review .................................................. 29
USB driver ..................................................... 106
Using your camera abroad ............................... 17
V
R
RAW ................................................................ 79
Red Eye Reduction .......................................... 69
RESET button ................................................ 119
Resize .............................................................. 90
Rotate ............................................................... 86
VGA ................................................................. 25
Viewing images on TV .................................... 41
Viewing movies on the LCD screen .............. 101
Viewing the images on the LCD screen .......... 39
Voice ................................................................ 81
W
S
Saturation ....................................................... 138
Scene Selection ................................................ 37
Self-diagnosis display .................................... 133
Self-timer ......................................................... 34
SET UP .................................................... 48, 140
Sharpness ....................................................... 138
Shooting movies ............................................ 100
Shooting still images ....................................... 27
Shutter speed priority ...................................... 55
Single AF ......................................................... 66
Single screen .................................................... 39
Slide show ....................................................... 85
Smart zoom ...................................................... 31
Speed burst ...................................................... 75
Warnings and messages ................................. 130
White balance .................................................. 73
Z
Zoom ................................................................ 30
T
TIFF ................................................................. 80
Trimming ......................................................... 85
Index
PAL .................................................................142
PictBridge .........................................................93
Picture effect .....................................................79
Playback zoom .................................................84
Pop-up Flash .....................................................69
Power on/off .....................................................18
Precautions .....................................................143
Precision digital zoom ......................................31
Print (DPOF) mark ...........................................91
Program auto shooting ...............................28, 54
Program shift ....................................................54
Protect ...............................................................89
Q
U
USB ....................................................... 109, 117
159
3
0
8
4
9
9
6
Printed on 100% recycled paper
using VOC (Volatile Organic
Compound)-free vegetable oil
based ink.
1
1
Sony Corporation Printed in Japan
Additional information on this product and answers to frequent
asked questions can be found at our Customer Support Website.
DSC-F828
SERVICE MANUAL
LEVEL
2
US Model
Canadian Model
AEP Model
UK Model
E Model
Hong Kong Model
Australian Model
Korea Model
Tourist Model
Chinese Model
Japanese Model
Ver 1.1 2004. 04
Revision History
How to use
Acrobat Reader
Link
SPECIFICATIONS
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
SERVICE NOTE
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
REPAIR PARTS LIST
DISASSEMBLY
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• For ADJUSTMENTS (SECTION 6), refer to SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ (987627951.pdf).
• For INSTRUCTION MANUAL, refer to SERVICE MANUAL, LEVEL 1 (987627941.pdf).
• Reference No. search on printed wiring boards is available.
• When the laser unit is repaired,
Make sure to follow the items of “NOTE ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE”.
On the SY-096 board
This service manual provides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair
inside the SY-096 board.
Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board, mounted parts location and electrical parts list of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
The following pages are not shown.
Schematic diagram ............................. Pages 4-25 to 4-44
Mounted parts location ............................. Pages 4-65 to 4-66
Printed wiring board ............................ Pages 4-59 to 4-62
Electrical parts list ................................... Pages 5-14 to 5-18
DIGITAL STILL CAMERA
DSC-F828
SPECIFICATIONS
x Camera
[System]
CCD
Lens
7.1× zoom lens
f=7.1 to 51 mm
200 mm)
F2.0-2.8
Exposure control
White balance
One-push
compatible
(Monaural)
Recording medium
Flash
0.5 to 4.5 m (19 3/4 inches to
0.6 to 3.3 m (23 5/8 inches to
Viewfinder Electric viewfinder (color)
[Output connectors]
[LCD screen]
LCD panel used
134 400 (560×240) dots
Power requirements
AC 100 − 240 V, 50/60 Hz
Current consumption
0.35 − 0.18 A
Power consumption
18 W
Output voltage
8.4 V DC, 1.5 A
0° to +40°C (32° to +104°F)
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
Maximum dimensions
Approx. 56 × 31 × 100 mm
(2 1/4 × 1 1/4 × 4 inches) (W/H/D),
Mass
[Finder]
LCD panel used
235 200 (980×240) dots
[Power, general]
Used battery pack
NP-FM50
Power requirements
7.2 V
screen on)
2.2 W
0° to + 40°C (32° to +104°F)
+40°C (41° to +104°F))
−20° to +60°C (−4° to +140°F)
134.4 × 91.1 × 157.2 mm
(5 3/8 3 × 5/8 × 6 1/4 inches)
included)
Mass
included)
Speaker
Dynamic speaker
Exif Print
Compatible
Compatible
PictBridge
Compatible
Minijack
Video: 1 Vp-p, 75 Ω , unbalanced,
sync negative
Accessory jack
USB jack
mini-B
USB communication
Used battery
Lithium-ion battery
Maximum voltage
DC 8.4 V
Nominal voltage
DC 7.2 V
Capacity
8.5 Wh (1 180 mAh)
Accessories
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
AC Adaptor (1)
USB cable (1)
Shoulder strap (1)
Lens cap (1)
Lens cap strap (1)
Lens hood (1)
without notice.
—2—
DSC-F828
CAUTION
procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.
CAUTION :
SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!
COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH
MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS
LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE
COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS
APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS
PUBLISHED BY SONY.
ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT
À LA SÉCURITÉ!
LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFÉS PAR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES
DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT
CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE
REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈSES SONY
DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU
DANS LES SUPPÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.
SAFETY CHECK-OUT
After correcting the original service problem, perform the following
safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered
connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes
and bridges.
Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are
"pinched" or contact high-wattage resistors.
Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly
transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point
them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.
Look for parts which, through functioning, show obvious signs
of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and
recommend their replacement.
Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.
Flexible Circuit Board Repairing
• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270˚C
during repairing.
• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of the
circuit board (within 3 times).
• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when soldering
or unsoldering.
Unleaded solder
Boards requiring use of unleaded solder are printed with the leadfree mark (LF) indicating the solder contains no lead.
(Caution: Some printed circuit boards may not come printed with
the lead free mark due to their particular size.)
: LEAD FREE MARK
Unleaded solder has the following characteristics.
• Unleaded solder melts at a temperature about 40°C higher than
ordinary solder.
Ordinary soldering irons can be used but the iron tip has to be
applied to the solder joint for a slightly longer time.
Soldering irons using a temperature regulator should be set to
about 350°C.
Caution: The printed pattern (copper foil) may peel away if the
heated tip is applied for too long, so be careful!
• Strong viscosity
Unleaded solder is more viscous (sticky, less prone to flow) than
ordinary solder so use caution not to let solder bridges occur such
as on IC pins, etc.
• Usable with ordinary solder
It is best to use only unleaded solder but unleaded solder may
also be added to ordinary solder.
—3—
DSC-F828
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
SERVICE NOTE
• AS-050 FLEXIBLE
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ···························· 4-14
• UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)
• LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
• CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
• FP-756 FLEXIBLE
• SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)
• AJ-007 (JACK)
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)
• CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR ······················································· 1-1
1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING
CAPACITOR ··································································· 1-1
1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig ···················································· 1-1
1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor ··············································· 1-1
1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE
[LASER UNIT] ······························································· 1-2
1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY ······ 1-2
2.
DISASSEMBLY
2-1.
2-2.
2-3.
2-4.
2-5.
2-6.
2-7.
2-8.
2-9.
2-10.
2-11.
2-12.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-17.
2-18.
2-19.
2-20.
2-21.
2-22.
2-23.
2-24.
2-25.
2-26.
2-27.
CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ············ 2-2
STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 2-3
ST SECTION ·································································· 2-4
ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION ································· 2-4
ST CABINET ASSEMBLY ············································ 2-5
MT-067 BOARD ····························································· 2-5
SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT ······································ 2-6
LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT ····································· 2-7
REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························ 2-8
EVF SECTION ································································ 2-8
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER) ······················ 2-9
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT ······· 2-9
BTH SECTION ····························································· 2-10
SY-096 BOARD ···························································· 2-11
DD-204 BOARD ··························································· 2-12
CF-097 BOARD ···························································· 2-12
LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY ······················ 2-13
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR ······························· 2-13
AJ-007 BOARD ···························································· 2-14
DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD ····················· 2-14
FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ·························· 2-15
HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY ·························· 2-16
SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION ························ 2-16
CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ·································· 2-17
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP) ·························· 2-19
CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION ································· 2-20
CIRCUIT BOARDS AND
FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION ······························ 2-21
3.
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-1.
3-2.
3-3.
3-4.
3-5.
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3) ··························· 3-1
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2) ································ 3-7
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2) ································ 3-9
4.
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4) ······················· 4-1
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (2/4) ······················· 4-3
4-2. SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
• DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)
• LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)
• ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)
• LS-067 (AF LASER)
• MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR)
• SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED)
Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
Pages from 4-25 to 4-44 are not shown.
4-3. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
• DD-204 (DC/DC CONVERTER)
PRINTED WIRING BOARD ······················· 4-49
• LR-018 (BATTERY, RESET SW)
• ST-088 (FLASH CONTROL)
• MT-067 (FLASH MOTOR)
• LS-067 (AF LASER)
• SI-037 (FLASH, IR LED)
• UA-003 (AV, USB JACK)
• LB-091 (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
• CF-097 (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
• AJ-007 (JACK)
• SW-410 (FUNCTION KEY)
• FP-748 (CONNECTOR)
Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not
shown.
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION ································· 4-63
Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board is not
shown.
Page 4-65 to 4-66 are not shown.
5.
REPAIR PARTS LIST
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS ······················································ 5-3
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION ····················································· 5-3
5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ························· 5-4
5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1 ················ 5-5
5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2 ················ 5-6
—4—
DSC-F828
5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY ············································· 5-7
5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY ····················· 5-8
5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY ···························································· 5-9
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST ········································ 5-10
Parts list of the SY-096 board are not shown.
—5—
DSC-F828
SECTION 1
SERVICE NOTE
1-1. NOTE FOR REPAIR
Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of
bent at the terminal.
Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.
When remove a connector, don't pull at wire of connector.
Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
When installing a connector, don't press down at wire of connector.
Be in danger of the snapping of a wire.
Cut and remove the part of gilt
which comes off at the point.
(Take care that there are
some pieces of gilt left inside)
1-2. DISCHARGING OF THE FLASH UNIT’S CHARGING CAPACITOR
The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential.
There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the capacitor is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged
voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the DSC-F828 is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage
must be discharged as described below.
1-2-1. Preparing the Short Jig
1-2-2. Discharging the Capacitor
To preparing the short jig. a small clip is attached to each end of a
resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11)
Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent
electrical shock.
Short circuits between the positive and the negative terminals of
charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.
Short jig
(1kΩ /1W)
1 kΩ/1 W
Wrap insulating tape.
04
-2
DD
DD-204 board
1-1
DSC-F828
1-3. NOTES ON HANDLING THE LASER DIODE [LASER UNIT]
Note: Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
Refer to “21. AF Laser Output Adjustment” (page6-29) and “22.
AF Laser Axis Check” (page6-30) of SERVICE MANUAL, ADJ
(987627951.pdf).
The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown because of the
potential difference generated by the charged electrostatic load, etc.
on clothing and the human body.
During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown and also use
the procedure in the printed matter which is included in the repair
parts.
The flexible board is easily damaged and should be handled with
care.
Laser unit
(D001)
Soldering Conditions of Laser Unit
Temperature of
the Soldering Iron
Time to Solder
Interval to Solder
Less than 350 °C
3 seconds
Next terminal is soldered after waiting
for 1 second
1-4. DESCRIPTION ON SELF-DIAGNOSIS DISPLAY
• C: ss: ss
by customer, are displayed.
• E: ss: ss
by engineer, are displayed.
Display Code
Countermeasure
Cause
Caution Display During Error
C:32:01
Turn off the main power then back on.
Trouble with hardware.
SYSTEM ERROR
C:13:01
Replace the memory stick.
Format the memory stick with the DSC-F828.
• The type of memory stick that cannot be
used by this machine, is inserted.
• Data is damaged.
• Unformatted memory stick is inserted.
MEDIA ERROR
E:91:01
Checking of flash unit or replacement of
flash unit.
Abnormality when flash is being
charged.
Flash LED
Flash display
Flashing at 3.2 Hz
Checking of lens drive circuit
When failed in the focus initialization.
E:61:00 *1
E:61:10 *1
Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective flash unit.
*1: The error display is given in two ways.
1-2E
—
DSC-F828
SECTION 2
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
The following flow chart shows the disassembly procedure.
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
Discharging the Capacitor
DISASSEMBLY
04
-2
DD
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
HELP
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
DISASSEMBLY
SY-096 board
service position
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
HELP
DISASSEMBLY
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
q;
qa
2-1.
2-2.
2-9.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-18.
2-20.
2-21.
2-24.
CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2)
STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3)
REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8)
BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10)
SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11)
DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13)
DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14)
FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15)
CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)
2-1
DSC-F828
NOTE: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.
2-1. CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD
Caution
Tape (A)
Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch
the extra length of flexible board because
it can be easily pinched during installation.
FP-751 flexible board
3 Three screws (M2 × 4), lock ace
7 SW-410 board
5 Tape (A)
2 FP-751 flexible board
(6P)
6 FP-751
flexible board (6P)
4 Cabinet (LR) assembly
2-2
1 Six screws (M2 × 4),
lock ace
DSC-F828
2-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY
2 Peel the Radiation sheets (LR)
from flexible boards.
Dowel
Caution
1 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
Radiation sheet (LR)
Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
Harness processing
ST-088 board
harness
(PT132)
8 Two screws
(M2 × 4), lock ace
3 Claw
Note: Be careful not to drop
the ferrite core.
(51P)
(51P)
ST-088 board
(21P)
Adhesion side (Ferrite core)
7 AJ-006 flexible board
(6P)
q; Stroboscope block assembly
9 harness (PT132)
2-3
DSC-F828
2-3. ST SECTION
5 ST section
1 Two screws (M2 × 4),
lock ace
2 LS-067 board
(6P)
4 MT-067 board
(16P)
3 SI-037 board (26P)
2-4. ST-088 BOARD, LENS SECTION
8 Lens section
(22P)
(22P)
3 ST-088 board
4 Flexible board (Lens)(39P)
7 Harness guide
1 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
6 Two claws
2-4
DSC-F828
2-5. ST CABINET ASSEMBLY
2 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
3 ST blind cover
4 Four tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4)
6 ST section
1 AS-050 flexible board
(10P)
5 ST cabinet assembly
2-6. MT-067 BOARD
1 Three tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4)
2 Claw
Stroboscope motor
3 STFPC cover
4 Screw (M1.7 × 2),
grip
6 Remove the two solderings.
5 Screw (M1.7 × 2),
grip
9 MT-067 board
7 Stroboscope motor
8 Three claws
2-5
DSC-F828
2-7. SI-037 BOARD, FLASH UNIT
Remove the ST unit holder from the SI-037 board by disengaging
the claw while sliding the (A) section of the SI-037 board in the
direction of the arrow (B).
5 ST cover
SI-037 board
ST unit holder
(A) Section
(B)
3 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
2
8 Claw
1
7 Open the ST unit holder section
4 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
6 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
9 ST unit holder
q; Two claws
qa Remove soldering from the three points
qs Flash unit
qd SI-037 board
2-6
DSC-F828
2-8. LS-067 BOARD, LASER UNIT
1 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
2 Two dowels
3 Two grooves
6 Laser unit (D001)
4 ST laser holder
5 Remove the
three solderings
7 LS-067 board
Caution
When soldering the laser unit on the LS-067 board,
observe the following things.
(Refer to Service Note (page 1-2)).
Observe the following conditions of temperature
and time of soldering.
Temperature of soldering iron : 350 °C
Time of contacting the soldering : 3 seconds
iron with the solder
The laser diode may suffer electrostatic breakdown
because of the potential difference generated by the
charged electrostatic load, etc. on clothing and the
human body.
During repair, pay attention to electrostatic breakdown
and also use the procedure in the printed matter which
is included in the repair parts.
The flexible board is easily damaged and should be
handled with care.
2-7
DSC-F828
2-9. REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY
5 Screw (M2 × 4), lock ace
Caution
The LB-091 board may be damaged if you
remove the rear cabinet block assembly forcibly.
Be very careful not to damage the flexible board.
4 Screw (M2 × 4),
lock ace
2 Screw (M2 × 4),
lock ace
6 LB-091 board
(22P)
7 Control switch block (under)
(50P)
lock ace
lock ace
8 Rear cabinet block assembly
2-10.EVF SECTION
3 Three claws
4 Prism sheet
5 Illuminator
7 Two claws
6 LCD (LCX044AK-1)
(18P)
8 LB-091 board
9 Lamp guide (20)
2 EVF section
q; LCD (LCX044AK-1)
1 Four tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4)
2-8
DSC-F828
2-11.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
3 Block light guide plate (6P)
5 Cabinet (rear) assembly
Caution
Control switch block (under)
4 LCD module (24P)
2 Control switch block
(mid)(10p)
7 Control switch block
(under)
Tape (A)
6 Tape (A)
Caution
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
Install the control switch block (under) in the
cabinet (rear) assembly so that the tip of the
control switch block (under) go under the
bottom of the control switch block (mid).
2-12.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID), LCD UNIT
8 CF lid assembly
2 Open the CF lid
7 Two screws (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
6 LCD unit
5 Block light guide plate
4 Tape (A)
Caution
Tape (A)
1 Five screws (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
3 Control switch block (mid)
Block light guide plate
2-9
DSC-F828
2-13.BTH SECTION
Caution
Note: When installing, be careful not to pinch
the flexible board or harness during installation.
6 Harness (microphone)
7 Harness (speaker)
(21P)
4 Control switch block (top)
(12P)
5 LCD module (26P)
(51P)
q; Harness (PT-132)
qs BTH section
(51P)
Use the groove on side
when installing it.
8 UA-003 board
(12P)
qa Connector (3P)
2-10
lock ace
DSC-F828
2-14.SY-096 BOARD
(10P)
(51P)
6 SY-096 board
3 FP-748 board
(60P)
5 Cushion (SY)
lock ace
Caution
Cushion (SY)
SY-096 board
2-11
DSC-F828
2-15.DD-204 BOARD
Caution
Note: The power supply capacitor of the flash unit is charged to the high tension
voltage as high as 300 V at a maximum. You will get electrical shock when
you touch the terminal of the charged capacitor . The charged potential
remains even after the main power of the machine is turned off. Discharge
the remaining power in the capacitor referring to Service Note
(See page 1-1). High-voltage cautions. Short jig (R: 1k Ω /1W)
6 FP-748 board
7 Remove soldering from two point
9 DD-204 board
4 Two claws
2 Two screws (M1.7 × 3)
lock ace
3 LR-018 board (6P)
4
20
5 Battery terminal board (3P)
DD
8 Capacitor
Caution
1 Fuse replacement caution label
DD-204 board
Fuse replacement caution label
2-16.CF-097 BOARD
Caution
4 Tape (A)
Tape (A)
Ferrite bead
5 Ferrite bead
2 SY retainer
(51P)
1 Four screws (M1.7 × 3)
lock ace
6 CF-097 board
2-12
DSC-F828
2-17.LR-018 BOARD, LITHIUM BATTERY
2 Two claws
4 Remove soldering
from the two points.
3 LR-018 board
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)
5 Lithium battery
2-18.MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR
2 Hook
(10P)
5 Memory stick connector
Caution
3 Sheet (MS)
Sheet (MS)
1 Tapping screw (M1.7 × 4)
Memory stick connector
2-13
DSC-F828
2-19.AJ-007 BOARD
1 Screws (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
2 AJ-006 flexible board
(6P)
3 AJ-007 board
2-20.DC-IN CONNECTOR, UA-003 BOARD
Jack holder assembly
4 Three Claws
3 Two tapping screws
(M1.7 × 4)
5 UA-003 board
6 Jack ground plate
7 Jack holder assembly
Harness processing
DC-IN connector
lock ace
2 DC-IN connector
Hook
UA-003 board
2-14
DSC-F828
2-21.FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD
Caution
1 Ferrite core
Tape (A)
2 harness (PT132)
3 Screw (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
5 Radiation sheet (LR)
lock ace
4 Flexible guide (R)
Harness processing
7
Harness processing
9 Tape (A)
harness (PT132)
Flexible guide (R)
8 harness (PT132)
Harness (PT-132)
q; Tape (A)
Caution
qg FP-754 flexible board
qh FP-746 flexible board
qf Adhesive tape
qs Two claws
Tape (A)
qa Ferrite core
qd Flexible guide (L)
qj FP-747 flexible board
2-15
DSC-F828
2-22.HINGE/CABINET (LL) ASSEMBLY
Hinge /Cabinet (LL) Assembly
Remove it while rotating the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly.
3
4
2 Two screws(2 × 4),
lock ace
1 Rotate the Hinge/Cabinet (LL) Assembly up to the position
where screw becomes visible.
2-23.SPEAKER/MICROPHONE SECTION
Harness processing
2 Speaker /Microphone
section
1 Three screws (M1.7 × 3),
lock ace
Speaker
Microphone
Microphone holder
8 Speaker
retainer plate
9 Speaker
5 Microphone
6 Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
7 Claw
4 Microphone gom
3 Microphone grille
2-16
DSC-F828
2-24.CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY
4 Three tapping screws (M1.7 × 4)
2 Notch
5 Control switch block (top),
LCD module section
lock ace
3 Cabinet upper section
6 MD cushion
Control switch block (top)
Caution
When installing it, align the switch position
as shown.
2-17
7 Cabinet upper assembly
DSC-F828
[SERVICE POSITION (SY-096 BOARD) ]
(51P)
FP-749 flexible board (10P)
Control switch block (top) (12P)
CN709
SY-096 board
Control switch block (under) (50P)
CN706
CN701
CN751
CN711
CN703
CN707
(51P)
ST-088 board
CN451
CN702
CN502
CN402
UA-003 board
CN401
CN103
CD-469 board
CN404
Caution
Note: High-voltage cautions.
harness (2P)
(PT-132)
DD-204 board
CN401
Extension cable
CN601
CN001
DC-IN connector
(6P)
DC-IN
CN001
SW-410 board
AC power
adaptor
PROCEDURE OF REMOVING THE SY-096 BOARD (SERVICE POSITION)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
q;
qa
2-1.
2-2.
2-9.
2-13.
2-14.
2-15.
2-16.
2-18.
2-20.
2-21.
2-24.
CABINET (LR) ASSEMBLY, SW-410 BOARD ................................ (page 2-2)
STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-3)
REAR CABINET BLOCK ASSEMBLY ........................................... (page 2-8)
BTH SECTION .............................................................................. (page 2-10)
SY-096 BOARD ............................................................................. (page 2-11)
DD-204 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
CF-097 BOARD ............................................................................ (page 2-12)
MEMORY STICK CONNECTOR .................................................. (page 2-13)
DC-IN CONNECTOR,UA-003 BOARD ......................................... (page 2-14)
FP-747/746/754 FLEXIBLE BOARD ............................................ (page 2-15)
CABINET UPPER ASSEMBLY ..................................................... (page 2-17)
2-18
AC IN
DSC-F828
2-25.CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
3 LCD panel
2 Two claws
Caution
4 Control switch block (top)
Tape (A)
1 Tape (A)
2-19
DSC-F828
2-26.CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
CF-097
DD-204
SY-096
ST-088
UA-003
SW-410
AJ-007
Board Name
Function
SY-096
CAMERA DSP, CAMERA SYSTEM CONTROL, CF DRIVE I/F, USB I/F, MODE CONTROL,
AUDIO AMP, LCD DRIVER, EVF, LCD DRIVER, CONNECTOR, POWER SUPPLY
UA-003
AV, USB JACK
SW-410
FUNCTION KEY
AJ-007
JACK
ST-088
FLASH CONTROL
CF-097
CF CARD CONNECTOR
DD-204
DC/DC CONVERTER
2-20
DSC-F828
2-27.CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
FP-748
FP-749
(flexible)
SI-037
LR-018
FP-754
(flexible)
AJ-006
(flexible)
FP-746
(flexible)
FP-751
(flexible)
Control switch block (mid)
FP-756
(flexible)
LB-091
LS-067
MT-067
FP-747
(flexible)
FP-750
(flexible)
Board Name
Function
SI-037
FLASH, IR LED
MT-067
FLASH MOTOR
LS-067
AF LASER
LB-091
EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT
FP-748
CONNECTOR
LR-018
BATTERY, RESET SW
2-21E
DSC-F828
2003. 12. 8 Update
HELP
Sheet attachment positions and procedures of processing the flexible boards/harnesses are shown.
STROBOSCOPE SECTION
CABINET (LR) SECTION
Tape (A)
Tape (A)
SW-410 board
FRONT CABINET SECTION
Radiation sheet (LR)
Tape (A)
Tape (A)
Tapping screw
(M1.7 × 4)
Radiation sheet (LL)
AJ-007 board
REAR CABINET SECTION
Tape (A)
Tape (A)
Block light guide plate
HELP
DSC-F828
BTH SECTION
CF radiation sheet (B)
CF radiation sheet (A)
SY-096 board
Cushion (SY)
BT holder assembly (front side)
BT holder assembly (rear side)
Tape (A)
Ferrite bead
DD-204 board
Sheet (MS)
Fuse replacement caution label
HELP
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
Link
OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
DSC-F828
SECTION 3
BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
( ) : Number in parenthesis ( ) indicates the division number of schematic diagram where the component is located.
3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/3)
LENS UNIT (1/3)
FP-756
SY-096 BOARD (1/3)
IRIS
SHUTER
CCD IMAGER
S/H,AGC
A8
28,27,23
H8-H6,H4
B4-B8,A7 G5,G3
E7
E6
D9
F5
F6
TIMING
GENERATOR
D1
E2
F2
E1
F1
IC452
FP-754
FLEXIBLE
CAM AD0
CAM AD13
18
4
5
17
G) (1,3)
CAM SO,SCK
H1A,B,C
H2A,B,C
A2,B1,J2,
(C,D,E,F,
J5
HJ J2
XCAM RST
MCK TG
20,19
CAM HD
CAM F
F1 C9 B9 J4 G5 J3
SHD,SHP
17
V1A,B,C
V2
V3A,B,C
V4
V5A,B,C
V6
RG
C3-C7
C1
B1
A/D CONV.
(AA,AB,AC,
(AA,AB,Y)
U,V,W,Y)
(13-17)
MC D0-D15
CLP OB
21
1
Y18
MC A1-A25
3
TGCLK
SHD
SHP
19
1
21
CN711
MCK TG
TG CLK
AC16
AC20
T23
MC CKIO
CAM SO,SCK
CAM SO,S1,SCK
AA7
EEPROM
FP-746
FLEXIBLE
(1/6)
CAM HD
CAM F
M
20
13
SHUTTER
MOTOR
M
5
FOCUS
MOTOR
M
24
FOCUS A
FOCUS A
FOCUS B
FOCUS B
21
IR FILTER
MOTOR
M
SHUTTER +
SHUTTER -
8
39
IR +
IR -
36
F7
E7
D7
SHUTTER
DRIVE
A6
B5
A4
B4
FOCUS MOTOR
DRIVE
C1
D2
G1
G2
H2
G3
IR FILTER
DRIVE
34
33
35
21
22
CA HD
CA F
AU LRCK
28
CN701
FP-747 FLEXIBLE
(2/6)
CN702
F8
41
11
C8
C7
B8
B7
37
36
38
15
16
14
HR DQ00
(A-E,
HR DQ31
L-M,
B3
A2
29
13
40
12
MSHUT DIR
IR FILTEREN EN
IR FILTEREN DIR
XFC RST SENS
XIR RST SENS
HR AQ12
L21
A4,
P21
(B,C,D),
(1-3,
AA5
(4-8)
7-9)
B8
HR EN2
HR DIR2A
HR DIR2B
MSHUT EN
9
45
7
IR FILTER
SENSOR
34
42
10
BUFFER
4
46
6
4
FP-746
FLEXIBLE
(3/6)
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
1
3
FC RING FG A
FC RING FG B
30
29
FP-747
FLEXIBLE
(3/6)
CN701
22
23
HR QCLK
C7
N20
AD11
W21
AE17
Y21
AD13
AD18
A16
A2
AE13
AA4
A7
AB3
1
2
SP+
SP-
19
21
19
21
33
31
33
31
37
37
15
CF RESET
15
20
20
32
32
CN103
COMPACT FLASH
MICRO DRIVE
C7
FLEXIBLE
CN706
9
MS SDIO/DATA0-3,MS BS, MS SCLK
MEMORY
STICK
CONNECTOR
3
FR SO,SI,SCK
XSYS RST
XACCESS LED
XCF COVER OPEN
2
XPROGRAM DIAL A
XPROGRAM DIAL B
XMINL LCD BL ON
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
(PAGE 3-6)
XAE LOCK ON
XSHTR ON
STRB CHG
XSTRB FULL
EXT STRB CONT
STRB POP UP CNTSENS
Q302-Q304
VIDEO AMP
3
PRELAMP AF CONT
PD LV
SELF TIMER LED
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
(PAGE 3-3)
XSTRB POP UP
STRB POP UP DC EN
STRB POP UP DC DIR
STRB POP UP DC BRAKE
UA-003 BOARD
E23
C23
XCAM RST
D23
IRIS RESET SENS AD
C18
ZOOM POS OUT
D17
IC303
SYS SO,SI,SCK
PRELAMP AF ON
B6
U20
BUFFER
2
M7
CF A0-A10
A16
AB4
IR LED ON
AC12
AC9
AU A IN
G26
(AA,AB,AC,
E4
T,U,W,Y)
E4
(1-4)
(4/10)
50
PHY DATA0-DATA15
29
IC251
AU A OUT
N1
4
AC3
F23
PHY CLKOUT
USB2.0
I/F
55
PHY RESET
28
5
4
11
12
USBPHY D+,D-
CN707
11
10
CN001
(USB)
CX251
12MHz
T20
XSYS RST
MIC IN
39
D15
AC14
STRB ON
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
A11
AE14
AE12
A17
D16
AD12
AF14
1
3
39
D21
H20
B15
MIC
(1-3)
B21
AC15
J1
CAM SO,SI,SCK
CN713
SP901
SPEAKER
(2/10)
M21
(1/10)
CN712
MIC901
B20
AC19
U20
HDO
PANEL V
V OUT
FOCUS
RING
FG
J,K,L)
C22
H25
ZOOM POS OUT
CN702
3
13
FP-749
E26
H21
EXT STRB ON
6
49
13
F21
HOT STRB ON
XFC RST SENS
(PAGE 3-3)
1
(F,G,H
(E,F,G)
C19
D5
1
49
C17
IC304
1
XIR RST SENS
41
12
D14
(F-J)
IRIS RESET SENS AD
43
48
41
12
B16
(1/10)
3
32
27
(23-26)
B17
FC RING
FG AMP
ZOOM RING
POSITION
SENSOR
(23-26)
D24
10
B9,D12,
(1-3),H11
XSYS RST
M2
Y21
IRIS RESET
SENSOR
48
C11
HR AQ00
N21
MSHUT EN
MSHUT DIR
HR EN2
HR DIR2A
HR DIR2B
FOCUS RESET
SENSOR
4
11
40
SRRAM
512Mbit
P,R)
(1-3,
7-9)
(A-D)
(13-17)
HR EN3
HR DIR3A
HR DIR3B
IR FILTEREN EN
IR FILTEREN DIR
4
11
40
CAMERA
SYSTEM
CONTROL
IC302
U21
24
P,R,T-W,Y)
IC501
CAMERA
DSP
AB18
CN702
HR EN3
HR DIR3A
HR DIR3B
(AA,AB,N,
M,N)
A10
(1/10)
(A-G)
XCAM RST
(H,J,K,L,
A8
K1
D8
IC301
Y17
CN701
8 12 7
18
19
17
MC A0-A10,A24
(1/10)
31
30
43 44 40 45
IRIS DRIVE
X501
27MHz
XCAM RST
(1-4),
G4
H4
G5
H6
MC A0-A25
MC CKI0
3
4
2
CF D0-D15
(1-4)
(8-10)
(J,K,L,M,
FP-747
FLEXIBLE(1/6)
IRIS
MOTOR
L,M)
(A-F)
CLP OB
N,P,R,T,U)
MCK TG
FP-746
FLEXIBLE(2/6)
MC D0-D15
(1-4)
ADCLK
9
IRIS A
IRIS A
IRIS B
IRIS B
MC D0-D15
(1-4)
CN101
CN451
MICRO
DRIVE
I/F
(H,J,K,
J8
ADCLK
15
12-13
V OUT
CCDINP
CCDINM F9
E9
CF-097 BOARD
FLEXIBLE
(3/10)
MELODY
MELODY EW
Q601
MOD
BEEP
AU A IN
AU A OUT
MIC IN
SP+
SP-
E1
(6/10)
B4
5
A OUT
IC601
H4
H5
AUDIO
AMP
B9
A2
D1
5
AUDIO SIGNAL
VIDEO SIGNAL
VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL
3-1
3-2
J001
A/V OUT (MONO)
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
SY-096 BOARD (2/3)
4
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
(PAGE 3-5)
AJ-006
FLEXIBLE
LENS UNIT (2/3)
CN702
STRB POPUO DC EN
STRB POPUO DC DIR
11
STRB POPUO DC BRAKE
9
12
FP-747
FLEXIBLE(4/6)
B2
A1
F2
41
43
40
STROB
POPUP
MOTOR
DRIVE
2
2
6
6
1
E1
E2
AJ-007 BOARD
FP-750
FLEXIBLE
J201
ACC
(Accessory)
CN201
LANC SIG
ACC STRB ON
ST-088
BOARD
MT-067
BOARD
CN503
CN501
22
1
4
19
4
16
STRB POPUP+
STRB POPUP-
M
M910
FLASH
MOTOR
LANC SIG
EXT STRB CONT
IC703
13
8
44
16
7
23
8
15
2
26
19
4
2
27
25
12
11
25
27
5
11
12
1
10
13
CN701
29
(9/10)
4
HOT STRB ON
EXT STRB ON
4
S001
MOTOR POSITION
DETECT
39
STRB POPUP CNTSENS
FP-746 FLEXIBLE(4/6)
CAM -7.5V
CN001
26
FP-747
FLEXIBLE(5/6)
LANC SIG
5
D504
CN702
8
9
FLASH
DRIVE
11
10
7
6
HOT
EXT STRB ON CN
ACCESSORY
SHOE
4
(9/10)
3
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
(PAGE 3-2)
SYS SO,SI,SCK
IC702
PANELAMP AF ON
PANELAMP AF CONT
PD LV
SELF TIMER LED
30
22
31
21
15
37
CN701
26
XSTRB POPUP
STRB POPUP DC EN
STRB POPUP DC DIR
STRB POPUP DC BRAKE
4
2
AF LD
DRIVE
LD OUT
CN504
3
PD OUT
LED DRIVE
26
5
18
6
17
SELF TIMER LED
6
Q501
15
24
CN505
LED DRIVE
8
6
IC502
IC701
STRB ON
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
2
Q502-504
STRB ON
4
29
IR LED ON
23
14
FLASH
DRIVE
9
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(UNDER) (1/2)
(PAGE 3-1)
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
HDO
PANEL V
HDO
PANEL V
SYS SO,SI,SCK
40
39
38
43
42
47
48
46
(7/10)
IC801
RGB DRVE
TIMING
GENERATOR
(LCD)
VR
VG
VB
19
20
21
VCOM
HCNT,
MVLK,
OE,
GRES,
STBYB,
SRT,
GSRT,GPCK,CP
25
35
32
16
6
2
(7/10)
31
28
TRIGGER
TRANSFORMER
23
XE-L
26
SI-037 BOARD
BL ON
BL LEVEL
IC802
CN703
29
21
25
CN002
30
22
26
1
2
17
13
9
24
5
7
20
22
26
30
18
14
10
23
6
8
19
21
25
29
CN502
2
LCD901
CN001
2.5INCH
LCD
UNIT
10
8
9
1
7
3
24
21
BL H BLREG
BACK LIGHT
CN004
1
BL
REG
ND901
BL UNREG
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
HDO
PANEL V
SYS SO,SI,SCK
40
39
38
43
42
47
48
46
(8/10)
IC902
RGB DRVE
TIMING
GENERATOR
(EVF)
R
G
B
19
20
21
COM
PCG
VST
VCK
STB
EN
DWN
HST
HCK2,HCK1
23
35
31
15
14
LB-091 BOARD
CN901
LCD902
CN001
15
16
14
4
3
5
17
1
3
16
12
7
COLOR
EVF
UNIT
4
2
16
28
DC1
EXTDA
Q901-903
BACK LIGHT
DRIVE
21
D001
BACK LIGHT
VIDEO SIGNAL
3-3
9
13
14
FP-747
FLEXIBLE(6/6)
PANEL R
PANEL G
PANEL B
D001
Infrared ray emitter
XE-H
L001
2
(9/10)
EXT STRB ON
FLEXIBLE
D004
Self-timer
S001
FLASH
OPEN DETECT
1
FP-746 FLEXIBLE(5/6)
CN702
28
AS-050
LS-067
BOARD
HOT STRB ON
1
D001
AF LASER UNIT
4
3-4
DC 300V
5
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(3/3)
(DD-204)
(PAGE 3-5)
XENON
TUBE
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
SW-410 BOARD
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(UNDER)
SY-096 BOARD (3/3)
LENS UNIT
(3/3)
(5/10)
IC401
S001-007
HI CONTROL
XACCESS LED
XCHARGE/
B1
XSTRB LED
XCHARGE/XSTRB LED
XCF COVER OPEN
CN001
OPEN(FLASH),FLASH,
METERING MODE,MACRO,
BURST/BRACKET,FOCUS,
NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FLAMING
2
3
2
3
KEY AD3
24 KEY AD4
25
CN701
28
27
FP-746
FLEXIBLE
(6/6)
FP-751
FLEXIBLE
J7 KEY AD3
H7 KEY AD4
XPROGRAM DIAL A
XPROGRAM DIAL B
KEY AD0
KEY AD 0 J6
(8/10)
LCD903
CHARACTER
DISPLAY
UNIT
IC201
CN201
1
25
COMO-COM3,SEG1-SEG20
12
9
8
LCD
DRIVE
37
C1 DDCON SO
D3 DDCON SCK
DDCON SO,SCK
X401
32.768KHz
IC402
RESET
RST VIN
17
50
49
1
D001
FLASH
36
35
9
CF COVER OPEN
40
38
39
37
7
8
46
42
45
41
44
43
CN003
GUI DOWN
3
5
GUI UP
4
S001-006
3V
REG
KEY AD2
KEY AD 2 G6
KEY AD0 L5
J5 32KHz OUT
5
D7 XRSTX
6
A5
BACK UP VCC
H4
3
7
KEY AD1
KEY AD 1 H6
D001
ACCESS
18
J4 32KHz IN
(5/10)
VL 3V
CN002
CN703
Q701
LED DRIVE
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(MID)
10
2
FINDER/LCD,SCREEN STATUS,
SELF TIMER/INDEX,
DIGITAL ZOOM,QUICK REVIEW,
MEMORY STICK/CF CARD
9
1
S003-005
CN709
KEY AD0 L2
8
CN602
S001
LR-018
BOARD
RESET
5
BT001
LITHIUM
BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
3
XRST SW
VL 3V
CN751
CN601
33
33
35
35
MODE DIAL 0 J8
MODE DIAL 1 J9
XMINI LCD
BL ON
F1 BATT SIG
DD-204 BOARD
A7 BATT/XEXT
H2 FAST CHARGE
BATT SIG
BATT/XEXT
FAST CHARGE
CN002
Q001,002
S
E8 SYS DD ON
RST VIN
3
XPWR ON B8
25
27
XAE LOCK ON
29
XACCESS LED
IC001
CN001
37
37
FR SO D2
FR SI D1
XFR SCK E1
LANC SI
48
LANC SIG
51
J901
DC IN
27
28
2
3
POWER
S002
5
6
SHUTTER
S001
SYS DD ON
DDCON SO,SCK
FR SO,SI,SCK
XSYS RST
XACCESS LED
XCF COVER OPEN
LANC SO
50
DC/DC
CONVERTER
1
9
9
11
11
7
7
23
23
19
17
19
17
LANC SIG
4
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
(PAGE 3-3)
XPROGRAM DIAL A
XPROGRAM DIAL B
XMINI LCD BL ON
2
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/3)
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK(TOP)
(PAGE 3-2)
XAE LOCK ON
XSHTR ON
STRB CHG
XSTRB FULL
DD 1.8V
DD P5V
DD 2.95V
DD 4.7V
DD 3.3V
DD 4.2V
DD 15V
DD -7.5V
3
IC004
FP-748
FLEXIBLE
ACV UNREG
BL UNREG
STRB CHG
XSTRB FULL
STRB UNREG
HI VOLTAGE
CHARGER
Q401,402,407
D006
MINI LCD BACK LIGHT
D001
POWER
2
XPWR ON
29
XSYS RST B3
38
MODE
DIAL
X MINI LCD BL ON
F2 LANC SO
D001
LANC
I/O
WHITE BALANCE,
EXPOSURE,
DISPLAY WINDOW BACKLIGHT
9
8
12
XPOWER LED ON B2
27
F3 LANC SI
2
Q704
LED DRIVE
25
BATT UNREG
1
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
MODE DIAL 0
MODE DIAL 1
EVER 3.0V
10
15
15
13
13
CN401
1
DC300V
C405
(FLASH)
5
TO
OVER ALL
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/3)
(ST-088)
(PAGE 3-4)
3-5
3-6
COMMAND
DIAL
MULTISELECTOR
MENU,
AE LOCK
S002,S012
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-4. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (1/2)
DD-204 BOARD
1
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
S
2
F001
CN002
BATT UNREG
Q401,402,407,T401
BATT SIG
F004
Q001,002
F003
1
2
3
SY-096 BOARD (2/3)
5V UNREG
STRB CHG
XSTRB FULL
BL UNREG
BL UNREG
13 13
41 41
41 41
FP-748
BOARD
(2/2)
31
31
VREF 37
RT 30
CN002
27 25
27 25
29
29
DC/DC CONVERTER
LANC I/O
D001
31
31
CN751
SY-096 BOARD (1/3)
Q007
SWITCHING
L002
DD 1.8V
37 37
37 37
BATT UNREG
45 45
ACV UNREG
43 43
45 45
56
VCC
43
VIN
Q008
SWITCHING
L757
DD P 5V
36 36
36 36
38 38
40 40
38 38
40 40
42 42
44 44
42 42
44 44
46 46
46 46
48 48
50 50
48 48
50 50
52 52
52 52
Q009
SWITCHING
L004
DD 2.95V
L759
D 2.95V
A 2.95V
OUT3 59
DDCON SCK C1
DDCON SCK D3
XCS DD CON H1
19 19
19 19
17 17
21 21
17 17
21 21
CTL1 38
23 23
23 23
DDCON SO,SCK,XCS
27
28
26
DIN
CLK
LD
38
CTL1
IN3 22
Q010
SWITCHING
L005
DD 4.7V
L751
53 53
PANEL 4.7V
53 53
H2 FAST CHARGE
1
3
OUT4 60
D7 XRSTX
XLANC IC ON A1
3
7
S002
POWER
3V
REG
BATTER IN
DETECT
6
A5
BACK UP VCC
H4
4
A9 BATT IN
D 1.2V
D 1.8V
A 2.95V
(10/10)
L753
D404
5
CAM 15V
CAM P 5V
D 2.95V
PANEL 2.95V
L760
J4 INIT CHARGE
RESET
D 1.2V
CAM P 5V
L761
HI CONTROL
A7 BATT/XEXT
2 VCH
,Q751
1.2V REG
43 43
F1 BATT SIG
IC402
D 1.8V
49 49
OUT2 58
IC401
(5/10)
49 49
PANEL 13.5V
PANEL 2.95V
PANEL 4.7V
EVER 3.0V
IC751
L003
IN2 21
G8 ACV SENS
BL UNREG
OUT1 57
(5/10)
H8 BATT SENS
MD 3.3V
STRB CHG
XSTRB FULL
(10/10)
IN1 20
RST VIN
3 3
CN751
47
3 3
CN002
CN001
CN601
Q006
5.6V
REG
52
54
IN4 23
XCTL 2
L011
V CONT
Q011
SWITCHING
LANC
I/O
MD 3.3V
L006
54 54
54 54
56 56
58 58
56 56
58 58
60 60
60 60
55 55
55 55
57 57
59 59
57 57
59 59
IC752
L754
5
CAM 3.3V
CAM 3.3V
3.3V
REG
MD 3.3V
LANC DC
OUT5 61
8
EVER 3.0V
CN709
IN5 24
3
B8 XPER ON
Q012
SWITCHING
F8 DDCON SENS
L007
DD 4.2V
1
L756
Q752
OUT6 62
PANEL 13.5V
13.5V REG
CN751
35 39
35 39
33
33
IN6 25
CN002
D010
RECT
(10/10)
L001
OUT7 63
TG 4.2V
TG 4.2V
DD 15.5V
47 47
2
47 47
IC753
1
CAM 15V
15.1V
REG
Q015
SWITCHING
-INE7 2
FP-748 BOARD(1/2)
CN001
35 39
35 39
33
33
2
CN601
EVER 3.0V
VL 3V
3
BT001
LITHIUM
BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
29
XRST SW CN602
5
RST
D011
RECT
IC004
1
DD -7.5V
L763
51 51
51 51
CAM -7.5V
CAM -7.5V
-7.5V
REG
S001
RESET
LANC DC
LR-018 BOARD
CN601
5 5
LANC DC
5 5
CN001
CN002
CN751
EVER 3.0V
POWER
13 13
CN601
29
29
IC001
D001
15 15
ACV UNREG
CN001
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(TOP)
15 15
BATT/XEXT
27 25
27 25
TO
UNREG3
F006
F002
1
(PAGE 3-10)
Q003,004
LF001
DC 300V
C405
BATT UNREG
CHARGE
SWITCH
J901
DC IN
1
F005
3
CN001
AV UNREG
CN401
HIGHT VOLTAGE
CHARGER
STRB UNREG
3-7
3-8
D 1.2V
2
TO
POWER
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(2/2)
(PAGE 3-9)
DSC-F828
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
3-5. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM (2/2)
FP-756
SY-096 BOARD (3/3)
FP-749
FLEXIBLE
Q451
L452
MD 3.3V
25
27
27
28
28
24
24
D 2.95V
CN103
CN101
K6
XSTRB FULL
CF POWER ON
L804
PANEL 4.7V
CN703
33
34
49
35
50
36
47
48
45
46
PANEL 2.95V
Q801,802
L803
CAM 15V
CN002
(7/10)
PANEL 13.5V
CN901
FB901
PANEL 13.5V
VDD
1
18
BL ON
BL LEVEL
COLOR
EVF
UNIT
RGB
DRIVE
TIMING
GENERATOR
31
28
24
12
20
VGH (15V)
XCSSAVE2
18
ND901
34
LB-091
BOARD
RGB DRIVE
TIMING
GENERATOR
EVF LED A
THERMISTOR
BACK LIGHT
L805
L806
30
33
28
31
48
47
BL H BL REG
1
D805
(RECT)
D001
BACK LIGHT
L902
27
CN004
6
BL THH
BL MODE
BL UNREG
LCD901
2.5INCH
LCD
UNIT
19
VDC (15V)
Q703
IC902
PANEL 4.7V
CN001
11
VSH (5V)
VDD (3V)
CONTROL
SWITCH
BLOCK
(UNDER)
IC801
LCD902
CN001
(8/10)
PANEL 2.95V
MEMORY
STICK
CONNECTOR
VCC
2
MS PWR ON
MICRO
DRIVE
I/F
STRB CHG
CN706
Q702
D 2.95V
COMPACT FLASH/
MICRO DRIVE
VCC
CF-097
BOARD
(3/10)
IC452
FLEXIBLE
CN451
25
(7/10)
6
19
IC802
5
9
BL UNREG
PANEL 13.5V
BL REG
1
3
BL L IN2-
3
PANEL 2.95V
EVER 3.0V
CN003
EVER 3.0V
2
D001
FLASH
TO
(DD-204)
1
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK (MID)
PANEL 4.7V
(PAGE 3-8)
R701
2
CN701
CAM P 5V
42
10
39
13
2
TO
POWER
BLOCK DIAGRAM
(1/2)
(1/10)
(1/10)
(9/10)
(8/10)
IC451
IC304
IC302
IC201
OR
GATE
FC RING
FG AMP
SDRAM
512Mbit
IC701
IC702
IC703
(PAGE 3-8)
6
FLASH
DRIVE
6
9
R509,510
FP-746
(3/10)
18
5
FP-750
FLEXIBLE
(1/2)
FLEXIBLE
LCD
DRIVE
IRIS/
SHUTTER/
FOCUS/
IR FILTER
DRIVE
BUFFER
AF LD
DRIVE
1
ZOOM POSI VCC 28
29
XMF SENS LED
FOCUS
RING
FG
D 2.95V
(6/10)
(1/10)
IC601
IC301
AUDIO
AMP
CAMERA
DSP
14
15
31
FOCUS
RESET
SENSOR
IRIS SENS VCC 11
12
IRIS
RESET
SENSOR
F SENS VCC
XIRIS RST LED
XIR SENS LED
(2/10)
L581
L582
U22
V22
T22
W20
XFC RST LED
XIRIS RST LED
L583
L584
XIR SENS LED
XMF SENS LED
AVDD PLL 1.2V
IC501
AVDD AD 2.95V
CAMERA
SYSTEM
CONTROL
AVDD DA 2.95V
AVRT DA 2.95V
IR SENS VCC
AE17
AD13
AC18
E25
AE19
STRB CHG
EEPROM
BUFFER
XSTRB FULL
35
LENS UNIT
IR FILTER
RESET
SENSOR
MS PWR ON
BL MODE
CAM DD ON
XMF SENS LED
AU 2.95V
D 1.2V
D 1.8V
A 2.95V
CAM 3.3V
38
37
XENON
TUBE
SI-037
BOARD
ZOOM RING
POSITION
SENSOR
2
MF VCC
FB301
XE H
D001
Infrared ray
emitter
ST-088 BOARD
XFC RST LED
CAM 15V
CAM P 5V
D 2.95V
CN505
CN502
Q502-504
CN501
17
8
44
32
20
31
21
CAM DD ON
L602
CAM 15V
CAM -7.5V
(1/10)
(4/10)
IC303
IC251
VIDEO
AMP
USB 2.0
I/F
CN702
XFC RST LED
21
XIRIS RST LED
19
XIR SENS LED
18
CAM DD ON
33
LANC DC
17
31
33
34
19
35
A/D
CONV.
S/H
AGC
3
3.45V
REG
5
3.45V
TIMING
GENER
CCD
IMAGER
FP-747
FLEXIBLE
CN701
TG 4.2V
CAM -7.5V
LANC DC
A 2.95V
36
35
16
17
CAM 3.3V
34
33
18
19
TG 4.2V
45
43
4
7
FP-746
CN201
AJ-006
FLEXIBLE
(2/2)
3-9
4
9
FLEXIBLE
3-10E
AJ-007
BOARD
J201
ACC
(Accessory)
DSC-F828
SECTION 4
PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
4-1. FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)
2
1
3
D001
Infrared ray emitter
A
5
4
CN505
6
7
9
8
11
10
12
13
26P
1
IR_LED_A
2
IR_LED_K
3
N.C.
4
N.C.
5
N.C.
STRB_POPUP+
22
1
STRB_POPUP+
6
XE_H
STRB_POPUP+
21
2
STRB_POPUP+
7
XE_H
STRB_POPUP-
20
3
STRB_POPUP-
8
XE_H
STRB_POPUP-
19
4
STRB_POPUP-
9
XE_H
SELF_TIMER_LED
18
5
SELF_TIMER_LED
10
N.C.
XSTRB_POPUP
17
6
XSTRB_POPUP
11
N.C.
REG_GND
16
7
REG_GND
12
N.C.
LANC_SIG
15
8
LANC_SIG
13
TRIGGER
REG_GND
14
9
REG_GND
14
TRIGGER
PD_OUT
13
10
PD_OUT
15
N.C.
LD_OUT
12
11
LD_OUT
16
N.C.
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
11
12
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
17
N.C.
XASHOE_JACK_IN
10
13
XASHOE_JACK_IN
18
REG_GND
STRB_ON
9
14
STRB_ON
19
REG_GND
IR_LED_ON
8
15
IR_LED_ON
20
N.C.
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
7
16
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
21
N.C.
CAM_P_5V
6
17
CAM_P_5V
22
N.C.
D_2.95V
5
18
D_2.95V
23
XE_L
HOT_STRB_ON
4
19
HOT_STRB_ON
24
XE_L
REG_GND
3
20
REG_GND
25
XE_L
REG_GND
2
21
REG_GND
26
XE_L
REG_GND
1
22
REG_GND
CN501
22P
22P
XENON TUBE
B
SI-037 BOARD
C
D
ST-088 BOARD
FP-750
FLEXIBLE
D001
AF LASER UNIT
CN504 6P
E
LS-067 BOARD
1
SELF_TIMER_LED
2
REG_GND
3
LD_OUT
4
PD_OUT
5
REG_GND
6
XSTRB_POPUP
1
CN502
TO
DD-204 BOARD
CN401
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP-
STRB_POPUP-
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
N.C.
HOT
HOT
N.C.
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
XASHOE_JACK_IN
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
REG_GND
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16P
1
S001
2
LENS UNIT(1/2)
(CD-469 BOARD)
F
OPEN
( FLASH
DETECT )
1
DC_300V
(PAGE 4-7)
CN503
D004
(Self-timer)
2P
REG_GND
Note:
Since a servce is not for the single
CD-469 Board.
Because adjustment is needed.
SW-410
BOARD
G
CN001 6P
AS-050
H
FLEXIBLE
10
LANC_SIG
9
REG_GND
8
N.C.
7
HOT
6
HOT
5
N.C.
4
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
3
XASHOE_JACK_IN
2
SHOE_GND
1
SHOE_GND
TO
LENS UNIT
(2/2)
(PAGE 4-3)
6P
1
N.C.
2
KEY_AD3
3
KEY_AD4
4
N.C.
5
5
REG_GND
6
6
N.C.
LANC_GND
1
1
LANC_GND
2
LANC_SIG
3
LANC_GND
4
LANC_DC
N.C.
1
KEY_AD3
2
KEY_AD4
3
N.C.
4
REG_GND
N.C.
CN001 10P
ACCESSORY SHOE
2
FP-751
FLEXIBLE
AJ-007 BOARD
I
S001
MOTOR POSITION
DETECT
MT-067 BOARD
CN201
6P
6P
J201
ACC(Accessory)
M910
FLASH MOTOR
J
LANC_SIG
2
LANC_GND
3
LANC_DC
4
XLANC_JACK_IN
5
5
XLANC_JACK_IN
ACC_STRB_ON
6
6
ACC_STRB_ON
AJ-006
FLEXIBLE
M
16
4-1
4-2
FRAME SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM (1/4)
DSC-F828
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
9
8
11
10
12
13
15
14
16
17
18
A
B
39P
1
REG_GND
1
REG_GND
2
REG_GND
3
REG_GND
4
REG_GND
5
XFE_CS
6
XCAM_SCK
7
CAM_SO
XCAM_RST
2
C
MF_OUT_F1
4
MF_GND
5
SHUTTER+
SHUTTER-
8
SHUTTER-
D
IRIS_SENS_OUT
11
IRIS_SENS_VCC
12
IRIS_SENS_VCC
IRIS_B
15
IRIS_B
16
IRIS_B
18
LENS
E
F
IRIS_A
IRIS_A
20
IRIS_A
21
FOCUS_B
22
FOCUS_A
23
FOCUS_B
24
FOCUS_A
Note:
Since a servce is not for the single
CD-469 Board.
Because adjustment is needed.
25
STATIC_GND
26
ZOOM_POSI_GND
27
ZOOM_POSI_OUT
ZOOM_POSI_VCC
30
GND(SENS,THERM)
31
F_SENS_VCC
12
13
REG_GND
14
CCD_TEMP
15
REG_GND
16
LENS_TEMP
17
REG_GND
18
CAM_DD_ON
19
MSHUT_REF
20
PD_LV
21
PRELAMP_AF_CONT
22
STRB_ON
23
IR_LED_ON
24
EXT_STRB_ON
25
HOT_STRB_ON
26
TO
SY-096 BOARD
PRELAMP_AF_ON
27
(PAGE 4-5)
MSHUT_EN
28
FC_RING_FGB
29
FC_RING_FGA
30
XFC_RST_LED
31
XCAM_DR_PS
32
XIRIS_RST_LED
33
XIR_SENS_LED
34
LANC_DC
35
XLANC_JACK_IN
36
SELF_TIMER_LED
37
FP-747 FLEXIBLE
XHSHOE_CONT
38
XLENS_EEP_WE
39
STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE
40
STRB_POPUP_DC_EN
41
F_SENS_OUT
33
THERM_OUT
34
IR_SENS_OUT
35
IR_SENS_VCC
36
11
CAM_SI
ZOOM_POSI_VCC
29
32
G
LENS UNIT(2/2)
(CD-469 BOARD)
IRIS_A
19
28
XCDS_CS
EXT_STRB_CONT
IRIS_B
14
17
10
IRIS_SENS_GND
10
13
XTG_CS
SHUTTER+
7
9
9
MF_VCC
3
6
8
MF_OUT_F0
XLENS_EEP_CS
42
STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR
43
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
44
REG_GND
45
REG_GND
46
REG_GND
47
REG_GND
48
IR-
37
IR-
38
IR+
39
IR+
2
REG_GND
49
REG_GND
50
REG_GND
51
51P
TO
LENS UNIT
(1/2)
51P
21P
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
ZOOM_POS_OUT
XFC_RST_SENS
XMF_SENS_LED
IRIS_SENS_AD
XIR_RST_SENS
MSHUT_DIR
IR_FILTER_IN
IR_FILTER_EN
HR_DIR2B
HR_EN2
HR_DIR2A
HR_DIR3B
HR_EN3
HR_DIR3A
VSUB_CONT
CA_HD
CA_F
PBLK
KEY_AD3
KEY_AD4
XSTRB_POPUP
XASHOE_JACK_IN
REG_GND
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
CAM_-7.5V
CAM_15V
CAM_3.3V
CAM_3.3V
A_2.95V
A_2.95V
D_2.95V
D_2.95V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
CAM_P_5V
TG_3.45V
TG_3.45V
TG_3.45V
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
CLP_OB
AD_GND
AD_GND
CA_AD00
CA_AD01
CA_AD02
CA_AD03
CA_AD04
CA_AD05
CA_AD06
CA_AD07
CA_AD08
CA_AD09
CA_AD10
CA_AD11
CA_AD12
CA_AD13
AD_GND
MCKTG
AD_GND
TG_CLK
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
(PAGE 4-2)
H
I
3
FP-746 FLEXIBLE
FP-754 FLEXIBLE
4
TO
SY-096 BOARD
TO
SY-096 BOARD
(PAGE 4-5)
(PAGE 4-6)
J
16
4-3
4-4
5
DSC-F828
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A
12P
CN709
EVER_3.0V
1
XPOWER_LED_ON
2
XPWR_ON
3
GND
4
XAE_LOCK_ON
5
XSHTR_ON
6
GND
7
B
C
LCD902
COLOR EVF UNIT
D
22P
22
N.C.
MODE_DIAL1
8
CN001 18P
21
EVF_LED_K
MODE_DIAL0
9
18
VDD
20
N.C.
KEY_AD0_L2
10
17
VSS
19
EVF_LED_A
GND
11
16
RCG
18
N.C.
XMINILCD_BL_ON
12
15
VST
17
COM
14
VCK
16
G
13
STB
15
R
12
ENB
14
B
11
DWN
13
TEST
10
RGT
12
HCK1
9
HST
11
HCK2
8
HCK2
10
HST
SP_-
2
7
HCK1
9
RGT
SP_+
1
6
TEST
8
DWN
5
B
7
ENB
4
R
6
STB
3
G
5
VCK
2
N.C.
4
VST
1
COM
3
PCG
2
VSS
1
VDD
LB-091
BOARD
D001
BACK LIGHT
E
CN713 2P
G
51
REG_GND
50
REG_GND
49
REG_GND
48
REG_GND
47
REG_GND
46
REG_GND
45
TG_4.2V
44
TG_4.2V
43
TG_4.2V
42
CAM_P_5V
SY-096 BOARD(1/2)
41
CAM_P_5V
40
CAM_P_5V
39
CAM_P_5V
38
D_2.95V
37
D_2.95V
36
A_2.95V
35
A_2.95V
34
CAM_3.3V
33
CAM_3.3V
32
CAM_15V
MIC_GND
2
MIC_IN
1
5
H
TO
LENS UNIT(2/2)
(PAGE 4-4)
30
FP-746
FLEXIBLE
29
28
27
12
USB_D+
11
USB_D-
10
USB_GND
9
USB_VBUS
8
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
7
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
6
A_OUT
5
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
4
AV_JACK_IN
3
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
2
V_OUT
1
J
KEY_AD3
23
PBLK
22
CA_F
21
CA_HD
20
VSUB_CONT
19
HR_DIR3A
13
12
11
10
9
8
K
2
D-
1
VCC
(USB)
26P
COM0
1
COM1
2
SEG0
3
SEG1
4
SEG2
5
SEG3
6
SEG4
7
8
SEG6
9
SEG7
10
SEG8
11
SEG9
12
SEG10
13
SEG11
14
SEG12
15
SEG13
16
SEG14
17
SEG15
18
SEG16
19
SEG17
20
SEG18
21
SEG19
22
SEG20
23
COM2
24
COM3
25
N.C.
26
LCD903
CHARACTER DISPLAY UNIT
HR_EN3
HR_DIR3B
HR_DIR2A
HR_EN2
HR_DIR2B
IR_FILTER_EN
IR_FILTER_IN
MSHUT_DIR
XIR_RST_SENS
IRIS_RESET_SENS_AD
XMF_SENS_LED
7
XFC_RST_SENS
6
ZOOM_POS_OUT
5
REG_GND
4
REG_GND
3
REG_GND
2
REG_GND
CN706
10P
VSS
1
D+
ASHOE_JACK_IN
24
14
ID
REG_GND
KEY_AD4
15
GND
3
LANC_SIG
25
16
5
4
REG_GND
XSTRB_POPUP
17
UA-003
BOARD
CAM_-7.5V
26
18
J001
A/V OUT(MONO)
CN001
SEG5
I
MIC901
12P
USB_GND
CN201
31
SP901
SPEAKER
CN712 2P
CN707
F
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP)
MIC
CN901
10
MS_BS
9
DATA1
8
SDIO/DATA0
7
DATA2
6
INT
5
DATA3
4
SCLK
3
VCC
2
VSS
1
REG_GND
CN701
51P
CN702
51P
CN711
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
XFE_CS
XCAM_SCK
CAM_SO
XCAM_RST
XTG_CS
XCDS_CS
CAM_SI
EXT_STRB_CONT
REG_GND
CCD_TEMP
REG_GND
LENS_TEMP
REG_GND
CAM_DD_ON
MSHUT_REF
PD_LV
PRELAMP_AF_CONT
STRB_ON
IR_LED_ON
EXT_STRB_ON
HOT_STRB_ON
PRELAMP_AF_ON
MSHUT_EN
FC_RING_FGB
FC_RING_FGA
XFC_RST_LED
XCAM_DR_PS
XIRIS_RST_LED
XIR_SENS_LED
LANC_DC
XLANC_JACK_IN
SELF_TIMER_LED
XHSHOE_CONT
XLENS_EEP_WE
STRB_POPUP_DC_BRAKE
STRB_POPUP_DC_EN
XLENS_EEP_CS
STRB_POPUP_DC_DIR
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
REG_GND
TG_CLK
D_GND
MCKTG
D_GND
CA_AD13
CA_AD12
CA_AD11
CA_AD10
CA_AD09
CA_AD08
CA_AD07
CA_AD06
CA_AD05
CA_AD04
CA_AD03
CA_AD02
CA_AD01
CA_AD00
D_GND
D_GND
CLP_OB
51
50
49
48
47
46
45
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
L
21P
FP-749
MEMORY STICK
CONNECTOR
FLEXIBLE
M
6
FP-747
3
FP-754
(PAGE 4-8)
FLEXIBLE
4
TO
LENS UNIT(2/2)
TO
LENS UNIT(2/2)
(PAGE 4-3)
N
FLEXIBLE
TO
SY-096 BOARD
(2/2)
(PAGE 4-4)
16
4-5
4-6
DSC-F828
2
1
3
5
4
6
7
9
8
10
11
12
13
15
14
16
18
17
A
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK
(MID)
15
A01
XINPACK
36
16
XINPACK
A02
35
17
A02
XWAIT
34
18
XWAIT
A03
33
19
A03
RESET
32
20
RESET
A04
31
21
A04
XCSEL
29
A06
28
CF-097 BOARD
VCC
26
25
VCC
24
IREQ
23
A07
22
VCC
29
IREQ
30
A07
2
REG_GND
4
5
STBYB
REG_GND
6
5
STBYB
REG_GND
7
SRT
REG_GND
8
7
SRT
REG_GND
8
9
OE
KEY_AD2
10
9
OE
KEY_AD2
10
XIOWR
A09
18
34
A09
XIORD
17
35
XIORD
XVS1
16
36
XOE
A10
15
37
A10
XCE2
14
38
XCE2
39
12
40
D15
D07
11
41
D07
42
9
43
D06
D13
8
44
D13
D05
7
45
D05
D12
6
46
D12
D04
5
47
D04
D11
4
48
D11
D03
D03
3
49
2
50
GND
1
51
12
13
MCLK
REG_GND
14 13
MCLK
REG_GND
14
15
REG_GND
REG_GND
16 15
REG_GND
REG_GND
16
17
HCNT
XACCESS_LED
18 17
XACCESS_LED
18
19
REG_GND
GSRT
20 19
REG_GND
GSRT
20
21
VG
GPCK
22 21
VG
GPCK
22
23
REG_GND
GRES
24 23
REG_GND
GRES
24
25
VB
27
REG_GND
29
VR
HCNT
31
REG_GND
33
VSH(5V)
35
VDD(3V)
37
VSS
39
VGL
41
C2
43
VSS
45
VDC(15V)
CP
26 25
VB
BL_L IN2-
28 27
REG_GND
BL_H BL_REG
30 29
VR
26
28
BL_H BL_REG
30
BL_THL
32 31
REG_GND
34 33
VSH(5V)
XCF_COVER_OPEN
36 35
VDD(3V)
XPROGRAM_DIAL_B
38 37
VSS
XPROGRAM_DIAL_A
40 39
VGL
XPROGRAM_DIAL_A
40
GUI_UP
42 41
C2
KEY_AD1
44 43
VSS
GUI_DOWN
46 45
VDC(15V)
47
VGH(15V)
49
VDD(3V)
EVER_3.0v
48 47
VGH(15V)
CHARGE_LED/XSTRB_LED
50 49
VDD(3V)
BL_THL
32
BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
34
XCF_COVER_OPEN
36
XPROGRAM_DIAL_B
38
GUI_UP
42
KEY_AD1
44
GUI_DOWN
46
D_2.95V
48
50
REG_GND
LANC_SI
11
2
REG_GND
13
XSTRB_FULL
REG_GND
14
14
REG_GND
XSTRB_FULL
13
15
REG_GND
16
16
REG_GND
STRB_CHG
15
DDCON_SCK
REG_GND
18
18
REG_GND
DDCON_SCK
17
19
DDCON_SO
REG_GND
20
20
REG_GND
DDCON_SO
19
1
ACV_UNREG
21
XCS_DDCON
REG_GND
22
22
REG_GND
XCS_DDCON
21
2
ACV_GND
23
SYS_DD_ON
REG_GND
24
24
REG_GND
SYS_DD_ON
23
3
BATT/XEXT
25
BATT_SIG
REG_GND
26
26
REG_GND
BATT_SIG
25
27
BATT/XEXT
REG_GND
28
28
REG_GND
BATT/XEXT
27
29
FAST_CHARGE
REG_GND
30
30
REG_GND
FAST_CHARGE
29
31
INIT_CHARGE
REG_GND
32
32
REG_GND
INIT_CHARGE
31
33
XRST_SW
REG_GND
34
34
REG_GND
XRST_SW
33
35
VL_3V
DD_P_5V
36
36
DD_P_5V
37
RST_VIN
DD_P_5V
38
39
EVER_3.0V
DD_P_5V
40
41
BL_UNREG
DD_P_5V
J901
DC IN
FP-748 BOARD
STRB_CHG
17
CN001 3P
VL_3V
35
38
DD_P_5V
RST_VIN
37
40
DD_P_5V
EVER_3.0V
39
42
42
DD_P_5V
BL_UNREG
41
BATT_UNREG
BATT_SIG
BT901
BATTERY TERMINAL
43
ACV_UNREG
DD_P_5V
44
44
DD_P_5V
ACV_UNREG
43
45
BATT_UNREG
DD_2.95V
46
46
DD_2.95V
BATT_UNREG
45
47
DD_15.5V
DD_2.95V
48
48
DD_2.95V
DD_15.5V
47
49
DD_1.8V
DD_2.95V
50
50
DD_2.95V
DD_1.8V
49
51
DD_-7.5V
DD_2.95V
52
52
DD_2.95V
DD_-7.5V
51
53
DD_4.7V
DD_3.3V
54
54
DD_3.3V
DD_4.7V
53
55
DD_4.2V
DD_3.3V
56
56
DD_3.3V
DD_4.2V
55
57
DD_4.2V
DD_3.3V
58
58
DD_3.3V
DD_4.2V
57
59
DD_4.2V
DD_3.3V
60
60
DD_3.3V
DD_4.2V
59
XSTRB
D_2.95V
1
KEY_AD1
GUI_DOWN
2
VSS
VGL
C2
C1
VSS
VDC (15V)
VGH (15V)
VDD (3V)
CP
GRES
GPCK
GSRT
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
ND901 BACKLIGHT
6
TO
SY-096 BOARD
(1/2)
(PAGE 4-6)
M
16
4-7
GUI_UP
VDD (3V)
13
LCD901
2.5INCH
LCD UNIT
BATT_GND
L
3
VSH (5V)
12
9
7
12
VR
LANC_SO
VB
REG_GND
11
10
VG
10
9
REG_GND
24P
10
LANC_SO
HCNT
9
MCLK
LANC_SIG
8
LANC_DC
REG_GND
OE
REG_GND
8
7
6
8
6
6
REG_GND
SRT
REG_GND
LANC_SIG
STBYB
5
LANC_DC
7
5
3
5
VBC
1
XLANC_IC_ON
4
XLANC_PWR_ON
REG_GND
VCOM
B TO B
REG_GND
4
3
60P
2
2
CN002 60P
B TO B
1
CN001 60P
B TO B
N.C.
4
9
(UNDER)
CN001
1 BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
2
REG_GND
2
REG_GND
XLANC_IC_ON
BL_H BL_REG
CN751
XLANC_PWR_ON
3
BL_THL
B TO B
1
HARNESS
CP
BL_L IN2-
BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
N.C.
60P
CN003 10P
CN004 6P
12
CN002 3P
REG_GND
51P
REG_GND
HARNESS
REG_GND
GND
LANC_SI
(PAGE 4-2)
12 11
XCD1
CN451
51P
REG_GND
D14
D06
XCD1
REG_GND
XCE1
D15
10
6
XWE
33
13
SY-096 BOARD(2/2)
11
3
KEY_AD0_L5
VBC
BL_L IN2-
1
28
DC_300V
2
VCOM
3
5
2
VCC
1
1
1
4
6
3
N.C.
4
VL_3V
5
REG_GND
REG_GND
6
REG_GND
XRST_SW
2P
VCC
27
31
B TO B
50P
2
REG_GND
DD-204 BOARD
CN601
CN602 6P
26
19
FLEXIBLE
I
21
CN002
KEY_AD0_L5
VCC
XIOWR
LR-018
H
K
A06
A08
CN101
J
24
32
G
TO
ST-088 BOARD
CN502
XCSEL
20
D14
CN401
23
25
FP-756
VCC
VCC
XCE1
1
27
B TO B
VBC
A05
A08
F
S001
22
50P
VCOM
3
11
XWE
RESET
30
CN703
1
1
37
XSTRB
XREG
A01
2
A00
14
D_2.95V
13
38
E
BT001
LITHIUM BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
10
39
4
XSPKR
A00
XREG
3
12
4
40
KEY_AD1
D00
XSPKR
GUI_DOWN
XSTSCHG
11
REG_GND
10
41
DIAL_A
42
D00
5
D01
XSTSCHG
5
9
GUI_UP
43
DIAL_B
D08
D01
6
D02
8
7
7
44
6
45
D08
7
D09
D02
DIAL_A
XIOIS16
6
REG_GND
D10
5
46
XCF_COVER_OPEN
4
47
REG_GND
48
D09
8
D10
XIOIS16
A05
CN103 50P
COMPACT FLASH
MICRO DRIVE
CN001 10P
8
XCD2
9
GND
3
10
2
49
DIAL_B
50
REG_GND
GND
XCD2
XCF_COVER_OPEN
GND
3
D
1
4
C
51
FLEXIBLE
B
GND
4-8
DSC-F828
Link
DD-204 BOARD (DC/DC CONVERTER)
LB-091 BOARD (EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT)
LR-018 BOARD (BATTERY, RESET SW)
CF-097 BOARD (CF CARD CONNECTOR)
ST-088 BOARD (FLASH CONTROL)
FP-756 FLEXIBLE BOARD
LS-067 BOARD (AF LASER)
SW-410 BOARD (FUNCTION KEY)
MT-067 BOARD (FLASH MOTOR)
AJ-007 BOARD (JACK)
SI-037 BOARD (FLASH, IR LED)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)
AS-050 FLEXIBLE BOARD
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (MID)
UA-003 BOARD (AV, USB JACK)
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
COMMON NOTE FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
DSC-F828
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For schematic diagrams)
• All capacitors are in µF unless otherwise noted. pF : µ
Link
µF. 50 V or less are not indicated except for electrolytics
and tantalums.
• Chip resistors are 1/10 W unless otherwise noted.
kΩ=1000 Ω, MΩ=1000 kΩ.
• Caution when replacing chip parts.
New parts must be attached after removal of chip.
Be careful not to heat the minus side of tantalum
capacitor, Because it is damaged by the heat.
• Some chip part will be indicated as follows.
Example
C541
L452
22U
10UH
TA A
2520
1. Connection
Pattern box
About 20cm
Kinds of capacitor
Front of the lens
Temperature characteristics
External dimensions (mm)
• Constants of resistors, capacitors, ICs and etc with XX
indicate that they are not used.
In such cases, the unused circuits may be indicated.
• Parts with * differ according to the model/destination.
Refer to the mount table for each function.
• All variable and adjustable resistors have characteristic
curve B, unless otherwise noted.
• Signal name
XEDIT → EDIT
PB/XREC → PB/REC
• 2: non flammable resistor
• 5: fusible resistor
• C: panel designation
• A: B+ Line
• B: B– Line
• J : IN/OUT direction of (+,–) B LINE.
• C: adjustment for repair.
• A: VIDEO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: VIDEO/AUDIO/SERVO SIGNAL (ANALOG)
• A: SERVO SIGNAL
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
(Measuring conditions voltage and waveform)
• Voltages and waveforms are measured between the
measurement points and ground when camera shoots
color bar chart of pattern box. They are reference values
and reference waveforms.
(VOM of DC 10 MΩ input impedance is used)
• Voltage values change depending upon input
impedance of VOM used.)
A B
Red
Blue
White
Magenta
H
Cyan
Green
Yellow
2. Adjust the distance so that the output waveform of
Fig. a and the Fig. b can be obtain.
A=B
B A
Fig. a (Video output terminal output waveform)
Fig.b (Picture on monitor TV)
When indicating parts by reference number, please
include the board name.
Note :
specified.
4-9
Note :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
2
3
DD-204 BOARD
4
6
7
ACV_UNREG
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
ACV_GND
2
BATT/XEXT
3
B
17
18
19
20
21
D003
MA8120-TX
LND001
8.1
R006
XX
1
R014
470k
STATIC_GND
R019
10
R022
1k
8.3
R-0.4
P-0.1
Q003
2SB1122-ST-TD-E
1.4A/32V
F002
1.4A/32V
F003
1.4A/32V
F004
1.4A/32V
F006
1.4A/32V
R403
15k
1/16W
R023
6800
8.3
C067
22u
16V
TA B
0
D004
1SS357-TPH3
Q004
DTC144EMT2L
1
BATT_SIG
2
BATT_GND
3
S
STRB_CHG
C070
22u
16V
TA B
R6.6
P6.9 3
7.9
R016
0
1M
Q001
SSM3K03FE(TPL3)
SWITCH
R401
10k
Q407
CPH3205-SONY-TL-E
SWITCH
0
Q007
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
6
1
5
3
4
8.3
0
C402
0.1u
10V
R402
47k
C038
10u
B
2
8.3
0
L002
22uH
8.3
C030
1u
470k
R005
Q401
2SK3018-T106
SWITCHING
1.9
4
5
CN002 3P
BATT_UNREG
C069
22u
16V
TA B
1.4A/32V
F005
HARNESS
C068
22u
16V
TA B
C404
0.022u
25V
R404
120
C401
22u
16V
2
7.9
C005
0.022u
D002
MAZT082H08S0
Q003,004
CHARGE ON SWITCH
R405
4700
XSTRB_FULL
2.9
0
4
5
D
1
L010
1uH
2
1
5.3
3
Q008
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
C039
10u
B
8.3
C031
1u
3
0
0
Q402
XP1211-TXE
SWITCH
L003
0uH
4
5
8.2
C405
250u
315V
(FLASH)
D403
RB160L-40TE25
D401
MA111-(K8).SO
BT901
BATTERY
TERMINAL
2
C406
1u
10V
C065
33u
10V
E
3
4
2
1
4
5
C019 0.0068u
5
3
2
1
LANC_SIG
RT
DATA_IN
CSCP
WAKE_UP
4
5
R4.6/P4.4
C042
10u
B
CN601
C066
47uF
6.3V
8.2
R4.6
P4.4
R6.6/P6.9
2
REG_GND
4
5
LANC_DC
REG_GND
7
LANC_SIG
REG_GND
8
9
LANC_SO
REG_GND
10
11
LANC_SI
REG_GND
12
6
1
5.6
5.6
5.6
XSTRB_FULL
REG_GND
14
15
STRB_CHG
REG_GND
16
17
DDCON_SCK
REG_GND
18
19
DDCON_SO
REG_GND
20
21
XCS_DDCON
REG_GND
22
23
SYS_DD_ON
REG_GND
24
25
BATT_SIG
REG_GND
26
27
BATT/XEXT
REG_GND
28
29
FAST_CHARGE
REG_GND
30
31
INIT_CHARGE
REG_GND
32
33
XRST_SW
REG_GND
34
35
VL_3V
DD_P_5V
36
37
RST_VIN
DD_P_5V
38
39
EVER_3.0V
DD_P_5V
40
41
BL_UNREG
DD_P_5V
42
43
ACV_UNREG
DD_P_5V
44
45
BATT_UNREG
DD_2.95V
46
47
DD_15.5V
DD_2.95V
48
DD_1.8V
DD_2.95V
50
DD_-7.5V
DD_2.95V
52
53
DD_4.7V
MD_3.3V
54
55
DD_4.2V
MD_3.3V
56
57
DD_4.2V
MD_3.3V
58
59
DD_4.2V
MD_3.3V
60
13
STRB_CHG
C043
10u
B
8.3
C035
1u
3
R039
2.2
XSTRB_FULL
Q012
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
4
5
7.6
LANC_SI
L007
22uH
3
8.3
DDCON_SCK
DDCON_SO
XCS_DDCON
8.3
SYS_DD_ON
2
6.9
C027
10u
2.2
0.2
6.9
Q006
MCH3310-TL-E
SWITCH
LANC_DC
2
1
LANC_SI
LANC_SIG
D006
1SS357-TPH3
XLANC_PWR_ON
C028
10u
BATT_SIG
BATT/XEXT
C045
2.2u
L001
47uH
C029
2.2u
B
FAST_CHARGE
Q015
LS5U17LP-TL
SWITCHING
4.7
3
4
2
5
2
3
1
4
INIT_CHARGE
D010
1SS383(T5RSONY1)
RST_VIN
8.0
4.7
C053
1u
IC004
D011
1SS383(T5RSONY1)
-7.5V REG
C058
1u
VSS
IC004
-VIN
2
C046
4.7u
B
R050
XX
49
-VOUT
1
C044
4.7u
B
3
XLANC_IC_ON
XX
XX
XX
C010
C017
C015
SYS_DD_ON
0.1u
0.1u
C011
C013
0.047u
0.022u
C008
C009
REG_GND
XLANC_IC_ON
LANC_SO
4.1
5.4
R-7.4
P-7.5
RST_VIN
XLANC_PWR_ON
3
LANC_SIG
3.8
LANC_SO
R036
100k
1
XLANC_IC_ON
LANC_DC
3.5
K
60P
XLANC_PWR_ON
6.7
1
0.2
0
7.6
33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48
L006
10uH
Q011
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
8.3
C034
1u
3.5
R040
470
DATA_OUT
XCTL2
RESET
OUTC3
CS
VIN
SEL
49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64
RST
VCONT
2.4
R009
4700
SENSE
REG_3V
XX
R047
R045
XX
R046
J
XX
C004
0.1u
CLK
VOUT
0
DIN
LANC_DC
VRO
0.7
VCC1
3.3
33k
VCC0
LD
3.0
R012
C003
0.1u
IC001
MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1
IN6
3.4
3.0
OUT2
OUT1
IN5
CTL1
3.0
DDCON_SCK
IN4
VREF
0
DDCON_SO
OUT3
DC/DC CONVERTER
VBAT
3.0
XCS_DDCON
IN3
3.0
4.1
OUT4
IC001
IN2
CDET
3.3
IN1
OUT5
GND
4.7
OUT6
2.5
3.0
3.3
R8.3
P6.7 3
-INS8
2.9
5.3
C041
10u
B
Q010
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
2
1
6
L005
22uH
3
2
1
7
C040
10u
B
Q009
CPH5802-TL-E
SWITCHING
2
1
R031
22k
R028
68k
C014 2200p
R020 68k
C012 4700p
C016 100p
8
out7
CS
1.5
R044
100k
Q014
HN1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
SWITCHING
I
9
GND0
VR
1.5
3
8.3
C033
1u
0.6
FB1
1.2
-INE1
1.2
C006
0.047u
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
0
XX
XX
XX
0
R013
4700
R011
1
R010
3
R042
47k
± 0.5%
R004
2.1
R007
2
R002
XX
6
R001
4
5
(PAGE 4-14)
4.7
R0.8/P0.4
FB2
1.2
-INE2
1.2
+INE2
1.2
-INE3
0.7
FB3
0.9
FB4
1.2
-INE4
1.1
+INE5
1.1
-INE5
R0.4/P0.6
FB5
1.3
+INE6
1.3
-INE6
0.8
FB6
0.8
FB7
1.2
-INE7
2.5
DTC6
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
R043
10k
1.5
TO
ST-088 BOARD
CN502
8.3
C032
1u
R032
12k
± 0.5%
3.8
C007 0.001u
G
H
REG_GND
L004
22uH
R033
68k
R018
62k
± 0.5%
R024
22k
R025
22k
R017
10k
± 0.5%
5.4
R034
R035
120k
18k
± 0.5% ± 0.5%
R048
10k
± 0.5%
R049
10k
± 0.5%
C018 0.0033u
F
3.0
DC_300V
2
3.0
R029
15k
± 0.5%
R030
1200
± 0.5%
4
5
D001
MA132WK-(K8).SO
2.1
2P
1
2
1
CN401
R041
10k
± 0.5%
22
D402
HAU160C030TP
L401
2.2uH
8.3
8.3
6
5
7
8
0
3
T401
INVERTER
TRASFORMER
F001
Q002
HAT1054R-EL
SWITCH
7.9
4
3
R008
22k
R003
XX
J901
1
C002 2
0.1
4
1
INIT_CHARGE
LF001
3P
FB001
0uH
C
8
2
1
HARNESS
FAST_CHARGE
C001
0.1
CN001
BATT/XEXT
BATT_SIG
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
DC IN
5
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
R :REC MODE
P :PB MODE
DC/DC CONVERTER
A
LR-018 BOARD
For Schematic Diagram
• Refer to page 4-49 for printed wiring board.
1
DD-204 BOARD
51
XC62KS0PXXMR
R-7.4
P-7.6
C062
4.7u
10V
TO SY-096 BOARD(10/10) CN751
THROUGH THE
( FP-748
BOARD )
L
(PAGE 4-43 of LEVEL3)
LR-018 BOARD
BATTERY, RESET SW
6P
S001
RESET
BT001
LITHIUM BATTERY
(SECONDARY)
M
16
CN602
6P
6
REG_GND
REG_GND
6
5
XRST_SW
XRST_SW
5
4
REG_GND
REG_GND
4
3
VL_3V
2
REG_GND
1
N.C.
VL_3V
3
REG_GND
2
N.C.
1
D007
MA8082-(K8).S0
Note :
specified.
4-11
4-12
Note :
pour la sécurité.
DD-204/LR-018
DSC-F828
ST-088 BOARD LS-067 BOARD MT-067 BOARD SI-037 BOARD
• Refer to page 4-51 for printed wiring board of ST-088 and MT-067.
• Refer to page 4-52 for printed wiring board of LS-067.
• Refer to page 4-53 for printed wiring board of SI-037.
2
1
A
3
5
4
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
LS-067 BOARD
AF LASER
S001
(FLASH OPEN DETECT)
ST-088 BOARD
D003
MA8082-(K8).S0
D002
MA8082-(K8).S0
D001
AF LASER UNIT
Note
B
FLASH CONTROL
6P
2
3
1
D004
SML-310LTT86
(Self-timer)
CN504
6
XSTRB_POPUP
5
REG_GND
4
PD_OUT
3
LD_OUT
2
REG_GND
1
SELF_TIMER_LED
NO MARK:REC/PB MODE
6P
XSTRB_POPUP
6
REG_GND
5
PD_OUT
4
LD_OUT
3
REG_GND
2
SELF_TIMER_LED
1
MT-067 BOARD
AS-050 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.
FLASH MOTOR
LND001
C
CN501
Note:Adustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
D
CN503
22P
(
E
)
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP+
1
STRB_POPUP+
21
2
STRB_POPUP+
STRB_POPUP+
2
STRB_POPUP-
20
3
STRB_POPUP-
STRB_POPUP-
3
STRB_POPUP-
19
4
STRB_POPUP-
STRB_POPUP-
4
SELF_TIMER_LED
18
5
LANC_SIG
LANC_SIG
5
10
LANC_SIG
LANC_SIG
10
XSTRB_POPUP
17
6
REG_GND
REG_GND
6
9
REG_GND
REG_GND
9
7
N.C.
N.C.
7
8
N.C.
N.C.
8
8
HOT
HOT
8
7
HOT
HOT
7
REG_GND
16
LANC_SIG
15
REG_GND
14
PD_OUT
13
FB501
0uH
FB502 0uH
D504
03P4J-T1
C501
0.01u
FB503
0uH
R503
1k
FB504
0uH
LND002
FLEXIBLE
9
HOT
HOT
9
6
HOT
HOT
6
10
N.C.
N.C.
10
5
N.C.
N.C.
5
12
11
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
11
4
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
4
11
12
XASHOE_JACK_IN
XASHOE_JACK_IN
12
3
XASHOE_JACK_IN
XASHOE_JACK_IN
3
XASHOE_JACK_IN
10
13
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
13
2
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
2
9
14
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
14
1
SHOE_GND
SHOE_GND
1
8
15
REG_GND
REG_GND
15
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
7
16
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
STRB_POPUP_CNTSENS
16
CAM_P_5V
6
STRB_ON
D_2.95V
5
HOT_STRB_ON
4
REG_GND
3
REG_GND
2
REG_GND
1
FB505
0uH
D502
MAZT082H08S0
CN502
STATIC_GND
REG_GND
2
DC_300V
CN505
Q502-504
LIGHT LEVEL CONTROL
5.0
C505
10u
10V
Q502
UN9111J-(K8).SO
R507
1M
5.0
0
D505
XX
IC502
IGPT
C506
0.047u
16V
R514
10k
C502
0.1
IC502
CY25AAJ-8-T13
R513
150
0
R505
47
1
8
2
7
0 3
4
6
C503
0.047u
250V
R280
P272
5
Q504
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
0.7
R509
56
1/4W
Q501
2SC5658T2LQ/R
IR LED DRIVE
I
6
0
4.3
3
2
5
0
R506
1M
0
1
R508
470
C504
0.01u
250V
D507
RR255L-400TE25
4
Q503
RN1902FE(TPLR3)
D506
02DZ10-TPH3
R511
100k
2P
1
R512
0
R510
56
1/4W
TO
DD-204 BOARD
CN401
4-13
6,7
4
3
1
FLASH, IR LED
LND005
LND004
(PAGE 4-12)
STATIC_GND
STATIC_GND
26P
26P
1
IR_LED_A
IR_LED_A
1
2
IR_LED_K
IR_LED_K
2
3
N.C.
N.C.
3
4
N.C.
N.C.
4
5
N.C.
N.C.
5
6
XE_H
XE_H
6
7
XE_H
XE_H
7
8
XE_H
XE_H
8
LND001
9
XE_H
XE_H
9
XE_H
10
N.C.
N.C.
10
11
N.C.
N.C.
11
12
N.C.
N.C.
12
13
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
13
14
TRIGGER
TRIGGER
14
15
N.C.
N.C.
15
16
N.C.
N.C.
16
LND002
17
N.C.
N.C.
17
XE_L
18
REG_GND
REG_GND
18
19
REG_GND
REG_GND
19
20
N.C.
N.C.
20
21
N.C.
N.C.
21
22
N.C.
N.C.
22
23
XE_L
XE_L
23
24
XE_L
XE_L
24
25
XE_L
XE_L
25
26
XE_L
XE_L
26
Note :
pour la sécurité.
ST-088/LS-067/MT-067/SI-037/AS-050
10
9
SI-037 BOARD
LND503
H
2
S001
(MOTOR POSITION
DETECT)
D503
MA8082-(K8).S0
D501
XX
D508
1SS357-TPH3
16
10P
CN001 10P
LD_OUT
G
J
AS-050
-
STRB-
EXT_STRB_ON_CN
LENS UNIT is replaced as a block.
So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD and
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.
Note :
specified.
M910
FLASH MOTOR
M
1
IR_LED_ON
F
+
16P
22
LENS UNIT
THROUGH THE
FP-750 FLEXIBLE
STRB+
16P
STRB_POPUP+
4-14
D001
CL-330IRS-X-TU
(Infrared ray emitter)
LND003
TRIGGER
L001
XENON
TUBE
ACCESSORY
SHOE
DSC-F828
UA-003 BOARD
LB-091 BOARD
3
2
1
4
6
5
7
R002
0
UA-003 BOARD
A
R003
AV,USB JACK
FB001
1k
0uH
J001
R004
0
D004
MA111-(K8).S0
B
D003
MAZT082H08S0
D001
MAZT082H08S0
D002
MA8082-(K8).S0
A/V OUT(MONO)
12P
V_OUT
1
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
2
AV_JACK_IN
3
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
4
R006
0
LND001
C
TO
SY-096 BOARD(9/10)
CN707
(PAGE 4-42
of LEVEL3)
D005
XX
A_OUT
5
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
6
GND_GUARD(REG_GND)
7
USB_VBUS
8
USB_GND
9
USB_D-
10
R001
USB_D+
11
USB_GND
12
1
3
2
4
STATIC_GND
5P
0
1
VCC
2
D-
CN001
LF001
3
D+
4
ID
5
GND
(USB)
R005
0
D
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
16
CHROMA
Y
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
REC
PB
2
1
3
5
4
6
LB-091 BOARD
A
EVF,EVF BACKLIGHT
CN001
22P
B
TO
SY-096 BOARD(8/10)
CN901
(PAGE 4-40
of LEVEL3)
C
D
VDD
1
18
VDD
VSS
2
17
VSS
RCG
3
16
RCG
VST
4
15
VST
VCK
5
14
VCK
STB
6
13
STB
ENB
7
12
ENB
DWN
8
11
DWN
RGT
9
10
RGT
HST
10
9
HST
HCK2
11
8
HCK2
HCK1
12
7
HCK1
TEST
13
6
TEST
B
14
5
B
R
15
4
R
G
16
3
G
COM
17
2
N.C.
N.C.
18
1
COM
EVF_LED_A
19
N.C.
20
EVF_LED_K
21
N.C.
22
D001
NSCW455T-TC9
(BACKLIGHT)
18P
LCD902
COLOR EVF
UNIT
SIGNAL PATH
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA
Y
Y/CHROMA
REC
16
4-15
4-16
UA-003/LB-091
DSC-F828
CF-097 PRINTED WIRING BOARD
3
2
A
4
6
5
FP-756
8
GND
1
51
GND
GND
51
GND
2
50
GND
GND
50
XCD2
3
49
XCD2
XCD2
49
D10
4
48
D10
D10
48
XIOIS16
5
47
XIOIS16
XIOIS16
47
R102 47
D09
6
46
D09
D09
46
D02
7
45
D02
D02
45
D08
8
44
D08
D08
44
XSTSCHG
9
43
D01
10
42
XSTSCHG
D00
11
41
D00
XSPKR
12
40
XSPKR
A00
13
39
A00
D01
43
XSTSCHG
42
R103 47
R105 47
CF_D10
14
38
XREG
A01
15
37
A01
XINPACK
16
36
XINPACK
A02
17
35
A02
XWAIT
18
34
XWAIT
A03
19
33
A03
CF_D2
CF_D8
CF_D8
CF_D1
CF_D1
CF_D0
RESET
A04
21
31
TO
SY-096 BOARD(3/10)
CN451
A05
22
30
D08
43
D01
42
XSTSCHG
41
D00
XSPKR
40
40
XSPKR
A00
39
39
A00
38
XREG
37
A01
36
XINPACK
35
A02
34
XWAIT
33
A03
32
RESET
31
A04
30
XVS2
29
A05
28
XCSEL
27
A06
26
VCC
25
VCC
24
IREQ
23
A07
22
XWE
21
A08
20
XIOWR
19
A09
18
XIORD
17
XOE
16
XVS1
15
A10
14
XCE2
13
XCE1
12
D15
11
D07
10
D14
9
D06
8
D13
7
D05
6
D12
5
D04
4
D11
3
D03
2
XCD1
CF_A0
XREG
38
A01
37
XINPACK
36
A02
35
XWAIT
34
A03
33
R110 47
R111 47
RESET
32
A04
A04
31
A05
A05
30
25.50
CF_A0
CF_XREG
CF_A1
CF_A1
CF_A2
CF_A2
CF_XWAIT
CF_A3
R104 0
CF_RESET
C104
XX
CL101
CF_A4
CF_A5
CF_A5
XCSEL
23
29
XCSEL
A06
24
28
VCC
25
VCC
26
XCSEL
29
A06
A06
28
27
VCC
VCC
27
26
VCC
VCC
26
CF_A6
VCC
27
25
VCC
VCC
25
VCC
28
24
VCC
VCC
24
FB101
0uH
CF_A6
C101
0.1u B
C102
0.1u
B
CF_IREQ
IREQ
29
23
IREQ
IREQ
23
A07
30
22
A07
A07
22
R112 47
CF_IREQ
CF_A7
E
CF_XWE
XWE
31
21
XWE
XWE
A08
32
20
A08
XIOWR
33
19
XIOWR
A08
20
XIOWR
19
R113 47
CF_XIOWR
CF_A9
A09
34
18
A09
XIORD
35
17
XIORD
XOE
36
16
XOE
CF_XWE
CF_A8
21
CF_A8
A09
18
XIORD
17
XOE
16
R114 47
CF_XIORD
CF_XIOWR
CF_A9
CF_XIORD
CF_XOE
CL102
CF_XOE
CF_A10
F
A10
37
15
A10
XCE2
38
14
XCE1
39
13
A10
15
XCE2
XCE2
14
XCE1
XCE1
13
D15
40
12
D15
D15
12
D07
41
11
D07
D07
11
D14
42
10
D14
D14
10
D06
43
9
D06
D06
9
D13
44
8
D13
D13
R116 47
R117 47
CF_XCE1
R118 47
CF_D15
R119 47
R120 47
R121 47
R122 47
G
45
7
D05
D05
7
D12
46
6
D12
D12
6
D04
47
5
D04
D04
5
D11
48
4
D11
D11
D03
49
3
D03
XCD1
50
2
GND
51
1
CF_D7
CF_D14
CF_D6
CF_D13
4
D03
3
XCD1
XCD1
2
GND
GND
1
R124 47
CF_D5
CF_D12
R125 47
CF_D4
R126 47
CF_D11
R127 47
CF_D3
CF_XCD1
CN101
CF_A10
CF_XCE2
CF_XCE1
CF_D15
CF_D7
CF_D6
CF_D13
CF_D5
CF_D12
CF_D4
CF_D11
CF_D3
CF_XCD1
C103
47u
6.3V
TA
B
51P
H
R101
0
FP-756 FLEXIBLE is replaced as a block.
STATIC GND
VIDEO SIGNAL
CHROMA
I
D101
MA111-(K8).S0
LND101
SIGNAL PATH
Y
Y/CHROMA
AUDIO
SIGNAL
REC
PB
16
4-17
1.26
CF_D14
8
R123 47
D05
CF_XCE2
COMPACT FLASH
MICRO DRIVE
CF_A7
4-18
1
GND
CN103
1
(PAGE 4-30
of LEVEL3)
CF-097/FP-756
D02
44
41
CF_A4
D
D09
45
D00
CF_A3
32
XIOIS16
46
CF_D0
CF_RESET
20
D10
47
CF_D2
CF_XWAIT
RESET
XCD2
48
CF_D9
CF_XREG
XREG
GND
49
CF_XIOIS16
CF_D9
R107 47
R108 47
50
CF_D10
R106 47
R109 47
C
12
CF_XCD2
CF_XIOIS16
D01
11
CF CARD CONNECTER
51P
CF_XCD2
B
10
9
CF-097 BOARD
FLEXIBLE
51P
7
GND
2
1
GND
50P
DSC-F828
SW-410 BOARD
AJ-007 BOARD
• Refer to page 4-57 for printed wiring board of SW-410.
• Refer to page 4-56 for printed wiring board of AJ-007.
2
1
4
3
6
S001
SW-410 BOARD
OPEN(FLASH)
FUNCTION KEY
A
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN001
(
THROUGH THE
FP-751 FLEXIBLE
S005
S002
6P
LENS UNIT
B
5
)
N.C.
1
KEY_AD3
2
KEY_AD4
3
N.C.
4
REG_GND
5
N.C.
6
(Metering mode)
(FLASH)
R004
1500
R001
1200
S003
So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD
and SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.
S006
/BRK(Burst/Bracket)
(MACRO)
D001
XX
R005
6800
R002
3300
LND001
S004
STATIC GND
C
D002
XX
FOCUS
(AUTO/MANUAL)
R006
XX
R003
22k
S007
NIGHTSHOT/
NIGHTFRAMING
D
16
2
1
3
4
5
6
AJ-007 BOARD
JACK
A
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CN201
LENS UNIT
(
B
THROUGH THE
AJ-006 FLEXIBLE
)
6P
LANC_GND
1
LANC_SIG
2
LANC_GND
3
LANC_DC
4
XLANC_JACK_IN
5
ACC_STRB_ON
6
FB204
0uH
FB205
0uH
J201
FB203
0uH
FB202
0uH
ACC(Accessory)
C201
0.001u
So that these PRINTED WIRING BOARD and
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM are omitted.
D202
MAZT082H08S0
C204
0.001u
D203
MAZT082H08S0
FB201
0uH
D201
0
Note
Resistor is mounted to the location
where D201 is printed.
C
LND201
STATIC GND
16
4-19
4-20
SW-410/AJ-007
DSC-F828
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
2
1
3
5
4
6
7
D001
SML-310LTT86
(TOP)
A
D001
TLGU1002(TPX1,SONY)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
(Flash)
(MID)
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
(POWER)
8
S006
S002
POWER
(Multi-Selector)
12P
EVER_3.0V
1
XPWR_LED_ON
2
XPWR_ON
3
GND
4
XAE_LOCK_ON
5
XSHTR_ON
6
SCN
(PAGE 4-41
of LEVEL 3)
C
GND
7
MODE_DIAL1
8
MODE_DIAL0
9
KEY_AD0_L2
10
GND
11
XMINILCD_BL_ON
12
1
3
(1st)
2
(2nd)
4
SETUP
(MOVIE)
R004
6800
8
B
R005
1.2k
(AUTO)
A
4
R002
6.8k
R008
1200
R007
1.5k
R010
3.3k
S
R007
1200
S002
2
1
P
D005 XX
D006
SML311EBT
(MINI LCD BACK LIGHT)
R013 XX
S010
MENU
C
S007
S003
(CENTER)
(Multi-selector)
(Multi-selector)
R002
3300
R003
6800
D003
MA8082-(K8).S0
(Multi-selector)
S004
S014
S005
D
WB
(White balance)
+
Command dial
LND002
STATIC_GND
D002
MAZT082H08S0
(Exposure)
(Display window
backlight)
STATIC_GND
(Delete)
S008
D007 XX
LND001
S012
AE LOCK
R009 1500
S003
16
3300
R010
3300
7
(PB)
R012
22
D
(MANUAL)
R006
1500
3
R011 XX
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(TOP) is
replaced as a block.
So that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD
is omitted.
M
6 R005 5
9
D002
MAZT082H08S0
TO
SY-096 BOARD(9/10)
CN709
S001
(SHATTER)
D003
MA8082-(K8).S0
B
D004
MAZT082H08S0
LND001
STATIC_GND
D005
MA8082-(K8).S0
E
CN001
10P
XSTRB_LED
TO
(UNDER)
CN003
(PAGE 4-24)
F
2
GUI_DOWN
3
KEY_AD1
4
GUI_UP
5
REG_GND
6
DIAL_A
7
DIAL_B
8
XCF_COVER_OPEN
16
1
D_2.95V
REG_GND
S015
9
OPEN(CF)
10
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(MID) is replaced as a block.
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (TOP)/(MID)
4-21
4-22
DSC-F828
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
A
(UNDER)
S006
XX MARK:NO MOUNT
CF("Memory Stick"/CF card)
TO SY-096 BOARD(9/10) CN703
(PAGE 4-41 of LEVEL3)
CN002
B
CN001
C
LCD901
2.5INCH
LCD UNIT
D
E
24P
50P
B TO B
1
VCOM
KEY_AD0_L5
2
3
VBC
REG_GND
4
5
STBYB
REG_GND
6
7
SRT
REG_GND
8
9
OE
KEY_AD2
10
Note :
specified.
11
REG_GND
REG_GND
12
VCOM
1
13
MCLK
REG_GND
14
VBC
2
15
REG_GND
REG_GND
16
STBYB
3
17
HCNT
XACCESS_LED
18
SRT
4
19
REG_GND
GSRT
20
OE
5
21
VG
GPCK
22
MCLK
6
23
REG_GND
GRES
24
6
BL_L IN2-
HCNT
7
25
VB
VG
8
27
REG_GND
VB
9
29
VR
Note :
pour la sécurité.
6P
CN004
CP
26
5
N.C.
BL_L IN2-
28
4
BL_H BL_REG
BL_H BL_REG
30
3
BL_THL
BL_THL
32
2
N.C.
BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
34
1
BL_THH(PANEL_2.95V)
XCF_COVER_OPEN
36
XPROGRAM_DIAL_B
38
ND901
BACKLIGHT
VR
10
31
REG_GND
VSH (5V)
11
33
VSH(5V)
VDD (3V)
12
35
VDD(3V)
VSS
13
37
VSS
VGL
14
39
VGL
XPROGRAM_DIAL_A
40
C2
15
41
C2
GUI_UP
42
C1
16
43
VSS
KEY_AD1
44
VSS
17
45
VDC(15V)
GUI_DOWN
46
VDC (15V)
18
47
VGH(15V)
D_2.95V
48
VGH (15V)
19
49
VDD(3V)
50
VDD (3V)
20
9
XCF_COVER_OPEN
CP
21
8
DIAL_B
GRES
22
7
DIAL_A
GPCK
23
6
REG_GND
GSRT
24
5
GUI_UP
TO
CONTROL SWITCH
BLOCK
(MID)
CN001
4
KEY_AD1
(PAGE 4-22)
3
GUI_DOWN
2
D_2.95V
1
XSTRB
R001
22k
R002
6.8k
R003
3.3k
R005
1.2k
R004
1.5k
10P
CN003
10
D001
SML-310LTT86
REG_GND
ACCESS
SIGNAL PATH
F
S002
S003
S004
S005
VIDEO SIGNAL
S001
FINDER/LCD
(Screen status)
(Self Timer/Index)
(Digital zoom
Playback zoom)
CHROMA
(Quick
Review)
Y
Y/CHROMA
REC
16
PB
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK(UNDER) is replaced as a block.
4-23
4-24
CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (UNDER)
Schematic diagrams of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
DSC-F828
Link
DD-204 BOARD
LB-091 BOARD
LR-018 BOARD
UA-003 BOARD
ST-088 BOARD
CF-097 BOARD
MT-067 BOARD
AJ-007 BOARD
LS-067 BOARD
SW-410 BOARD
SI-037 BOARD
FP-748 BOARD
COMMON NOTE FOR PRINTED WIRING BOARDS
CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION
Board Name
Function
DD-204
DC/DC CONVERTER
LR-018
BATTERY, RESET SW
ST-088
FLASH CONTROL
MT-067
FLASH MOTOR
LS-067
AF LASER
SI-037
FLASH, IR LED
LB-091
EVF, EVF BACK LIGHT
UA-003
AV, USB JACK
CF-097
CF CARD CONNECTOR
AJ-007
JACK
SW-410
FUNCTION KEY
FP-748
CONNECTOR
MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
CIRCUIT BOARDS AND FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION
DSC-F828
THIS NOTE IS COMMON FOR WIRING BOARDS
(In addition to this, the necessary note is printed in each block)
(For printed wiring boards)
•
: Uses unleaded solder.
•
: Pattern from the side which enables seeing.
(The other layers’ patterns are not indicated)
• Through hole is omitted.
• Circled numbers refer to waveforms.
• There are a few cases that the part printed on diagram
isn’t mounted in this model.
• C: panel designation
• Chip parts.
Transistor
B
Diode
6 5 4 4 5 6 5
C
E
4 4
parts location
pattern
4-63
6
LR-018
–
ST-088
4-63
MT-067
LS-067
SI-037
1 23
2
1 2
1 2
1
2 3
4
4
3
3
4
1 1
2
2
1
2 2
1 3
4
5 4 3 3 4 5 2
1
CSP IC
2 to 5
–
1
–
–
6
2 to 5
–
–
1
–
–
–
1
–
–
–
1
–
–
LB-091
–
1
–
–
UA-003
4-63
1
–
–
CF-097
4-63
2
–
–
AJ-007
4-63
2
–
–
SW-410
4-63
2
–
–
FP-748
–
1
–
–
SY-096
4-65
8
2 to 7
IC301, 302, 401, 452,
501, 601
4-47
3
1
(shown on page) number of layers layers not shown
DD-204
3
1 2 3 3 2 1 1 2 3 3 2 1
BOARD INFORMATION
board name
3
5
4
3 2
5
4
1
3
1 6 54
DSC-F828
•
• Refer to page 4-47 for common note for printed wiring board.
DD-204 BOARD(SIDE A)
C403
Q401
2
C404
5
Q402
1
L401
T401
Q407
D403
4
A
3
2
D401
R402
C402
3
1
A
R403
R401
R406
2
C405
R404
DD-204 BOARD(SIDE B)
1
CN401
R405
C406
R050
D402
1
B
+
2
4
6
C046
C058
5
C401
LND001
C066
1
IC004
C012
R013
Q015
C039
C031
C
L010
C067
+
Q003
C028
D
G S
Q006
Q004
R019
R039
C001
D001
C002
1
C044
B
+
C033
3
CN001
3
R001
C006
2
D
C027
D007
LR-018 BOARD
1
6
CN602
R018
R017
C007
11
BT001
(LITHIUM BATTERY)
(SECONDARY)
E
C018
R032
R031
C014
R020
1
R007
R004
C068
R022
D004
Q001
R024
R002
16
C005
R016
10
R014
5
R025
R028
C019
R033
Q002
R010 R011
17
C016
R035
R048
R030
1
F005
5
1
C065
B
+
R023
8
4
1
1-860-719-
1
3
D010
5
F002
F003
2
20
64
R029 R034
3
4
R005
60
C069
LF001
1
C003 1
3
R009
R044
R047
R046
R045
25
IC001
3
F006
300D
55
4
CN002
32
6
R042
R041
Q014
33
B
+
4
4
Q008
5
B
1
B
F004
F001
C009
R043
C004
R036
40
D006
R049
C032
FB001
C013
C015
C017
C010
20
10
45
R012
2
48
3
5
C011
C008
30
CN601
15
1 5
49
R040
E
3
5
3
2
Q010
C040
L004
L005
R003
35
40
L003
45
R008
C070
C034
1
2
1
2
1
3
C045
1
1
5
C041
50
D002
C035
C029
2
Q011
5
C043
C038
L002
C053
L007
3
Q009
D
16
3
Q012
5
C030
25
C
C042
1
2
Q007
3
60
55 59
1
2
L006
B
L001
2
+
3 4
D011
P
C062
+
B
2
3
4
4
3
2
1
– +
11
1-860-71916
1-860-529-
CAUTION :
4-49
4-50
1
11
S001
RESET
6
DD-204/LR-018
DSC-F828
•
ST-088 BOARD(SIDE B)
ST-088 BOARD(SIDE A)
CN503
CN501
R512
2
10
B
R508
D506
C501
K
26
A
B
R511
CN504
5
LS-067 BOARD
Q502
IC502
S001
R513
4
1
C
C505
6
1
R509
D508
11
1-860-720-
1
OPEN
( FLASH
DETECT )
R510
C
3
1Q503
5
R506
R505
8
C502
R514
R507
1
C506 Q504
CN502
C504
2
D507
6
6 4
2
C503
1
16
1
FB503
A
25
20
D504
15
5
R503
K
CN505
5
10
Q501
15
FB504
D503
D501
D505
1
22
FB505
LND503
1
FB501
5
FB502
10
D502
16
A
1-860-720-
2
2
1
11
A D002
K
K
A
D003
16
MT-067 BOARD
1
1-860-546- 11
16
3
1
(
S001
MOTOR POSITION
DETECT
)
1 5 10
CN001
D001
(LASER UNIT)
4-51
D004
A
K
1-860-53311
ST-088/MT-067/LS-067
2
Adjustment is needed when laser unit is replaced.
4-52
DSC-F828
•
22
26
1
1
LB-091 BOARD
D002
1 5 10 15 18
CN001
1-860-528-
11
SI-037 BOARD
L001
1-860-532-
11
D001
UA-003 BOARD
CN001
(USB)
J001
A/V OUT (MONO)
1
D005
12
R006
2
16
4-53
1
D003
R003
R002
B
3
5
R001
LF001
D004
1
3
4
1 2
D002
D001
FB001
R004
4
R005
A
1-860-530-
2
3
4
4-54
5
11
6
SI-037/LB-091/UA-003
DSC-F828
•
CF-097 BOARD
4
3
1
R108
R107
R104 R105
C104
CN
1
C103
+
1-860-545-
12
B
R116
R119
R118
R123
R120
R127
16
1
2
3
R122
1-860-534-
R124
R126
16
CF-097/AJ-007
1
2
4-55
FB204
6
20
FB101
C
FB201
5
B
R126
1
FB205
FB202
1
R124
5
2
C202
D201
25 35
CN101
2
R127
LND201
D202
1 5 10 15
R117
R121
R125
R120
R122
10
45 51
50
30
20
40
R111
R110
C102 R109
C101
15 R113 R112
CL102
D203
FB203
45
R114
20
25
CN103
30
35
40
CL103
CL104
CL105CL101
R116
R119
R118 R123
J201
ACC(Accessory)
A
R102
R103
R106
C201
C204
C203
50
A
R101
D101
AJ-007 BOARD
LND101
B
11
3
4-56
4
DSC-F828
•
SW-410 BOARD(SIDE A)
SW-410 BOARD(SIDE B)
S001
OPEN(FLASH)
A
S002
S005
(FLASH)
(METERING MODE)
A
R001
R004
S003
S006
B
CN001
6
B
(MACRO)
/BRK
R006
1
(BURST/BRACKET)
R002
R005
R003
C
D002
S007
D001
C
NIGHT SHOT/
NIGHT FRAMING
S004
D
1-860-72116
1-860-721-
FOCUS
(AUTO-MANUAL)
1
2
3
4
12
D
12
4
3
2
1
16
FP-748 BOARD
CN002
CN001
1
1
5
5
10
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
30
30
35
35
40
40
45
45
50
50
55
60
1-860-537-
55
60
Printed wiring board of the SY-096 board is not shown.
11
4-57
4-58
SW-410/FP-748
DSC-F828
4-4. MOUNTED PARTS LOCATION
ST-088 BOARD
DD-204 BOARD
* C001
* C002
C003
C004
* C005
C006
C007
C008
C009
C010
C011
C012
C013
C014
C015
C016
C017
C018
C019
* C027
* C028
* C029
* C030
* C031
* C032
* C033
* C034
* C035
* C038
* C039
* C040
* C041
* C042
* C043
* C044
* C045
C046
C053
C058
C062
* C065
C066
* C067
* C068
* C069
* C070
C401
* C402
C403
C404
C405
* C406
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
E-3
E-3
E-2
C-3
C-3
C-2
C-3
E-2
C-3
E-2
C-2
E-2
C-2
E-2
E-1
D-1
D-1
B-2
B-4
C-2
C-3
C-2
B-3
B-3
B-4
C-1
C-3
C-2
B-2
B-3
B-2
B-1
B-2
B-1
B-1
B-1
C-1
B-2
C-2
D-2
C-3
B-2
B-4
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-2
A-3
* CN001
CN002
* CN401
CN601
* CN602
C-4
D-4
A-3
C-1
E-2
D001
D002
D003
D004
D006
* D007
* D010
D011
D401
* D402
D403
D-2
C-4
D-3
D-3
D-1
D-2
B-1
B-1
A-2
B-3
A-2
F001
F002
F003
F004
F005
* F006
C-3
D-2
D-2
C-3
D-4
C-2
* FB001
C-4
IC001
* IC004
D-2
B-1
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
L001
L002
L003
L004
L005
L006
L007
* L010
L401
B-2
B-4
C-2
C-3
C-2
B-2
B-3
C-1
A-4
* LF001
D-3
Q001
Q002
Q003
Q004
Q006
Q007
Q008
Q009
Q010
Q011
Q012
Q014
* Q015
Q401
* Q402
Q407
E-3
D-3
D-2
D-2
D-1
B-4
C-2
C-3
C-3
B-2
B-3
D-3
B-1
A-3
A-3
A-3
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
R007
R008
R009
R010
R011
R012
R013
R014
R016
R017
R018
R019
R020
R022
R023
R024
R025
R028
R029
R030
R031
R032
R033
R034
R035
R036
R039
R040
R041
R042
R043
R044
R045
R046
R047
R048
R049
R050
R401
R402
R403
R404
R405
R406
E-3
E-3
C-4
E-3
E-3
E-3
C-4
D-3
E-3
E-3
D-3
E-3
E-3
E-3
E-1
E-1
D-3
E-2
D-2
D-2
E-2
E-2
E-2
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
E-1
D-1
D-2
D-1
C-3
C-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
E-1
E-1
B-1
A-3
A-3
A-4
A-4
A-4
A-2
T401
A-3
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
* C501
C502
C503
* C504
C505
C506
B-1
C-2
B-2
B-2
C-2
C-2
* CN501
CN502
CN503
CN504
CN505
A-1
C-1
A-2
B-2
B-2
D501
* D502
D503
* D504
D505
* D506
* D507
D508
A-2
A-2
A-2
B-2
A-1
B-1
B-1
C-2
* FB501
FB502
* FB503
* FB504
* FB505
A-2
A-2
B-1
A-1
A-1
IC502
C-2
* Q501
Q502
Q503
Q504
A-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
* R503
R505
R506
R507
* R508
* R509
* R510
* R511
R512
R513
R514
B-1
C-2
C-2
C-2
A-1
C-1
C-1
B-2
A-2
C-2
C-2
CF-097 BOARD
C101
C102
C103
C104
B-3
B-3
C-3
A-3
CN101 B-3
CN103 B-2
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
D101
A-3
FB101
B-3
R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
R111
R112
R113
R114
R116
R117
R118
R119
R120
R121
R122
R123
R124
R125
R126
R127
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
AJ-007 BOARD
C201
C202
C203
C204
no mark : side A
* mark : side B
SW-410 BOARD
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-1
CN001 B-4
CN201 B-1
D201
D202
D203
B-1
B-1
B-1
FB201
FB202
FB203
FB204
FB205
B-4
B-3
B-3
B-3
B-3
J201
A-4
*
*
*
*
*
*
D001
D002
C-3
C-3
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
R006
A-4
C-2
C-2
A-4
C-2
C-3
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
S006
S007
A-2
A-3
B-3
D-3
A-2
B-2
C-2
UA-003 BOARD
CN001 A-2
D001
D002
D003
D004
D005
B-2
B-2
B-2
A-2
A-2
FB001
B-2
J001
A-1
LF001
A-3
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
R006
B-3
B-1
B-2
A-2
A-3
A-2
DD-204/ST-088/UA-003/CF-097/AJ-007/SW-410
Mounted parts location of the SY-096 board are not
shown.
4-63
4-64E
DSC-F828
NOTE
5. REPAIR PARTS LIST
NOTE: Characters A to Z of the electrical parts list indicate location of exploded views in which the desired part is shown.
EXPLODED VIEWS
Link
A
OVERALL SECTION
B
C
STROBOSCOPE BLOCK
ASSEMBLY
CABINET (FRONT)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
CABINET (REAR)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY
EVF ASSEMBLY
CABINET (FRONT)
BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
D
BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY
Link
ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
ACCESSORIES
AJ-007 BOARD
C
LR-018 BOARD
SW-410 BOARD
A
CF-097 BOARD
D
LS-067 BOARD
SY-096 BOARD
D
DD-204 BOARD
D
MT-067 BOARD
UA-003 BOARD
FP-748 BOARD
SI-037 BOARD
LB-091 BOARD
ST-088 BOARD
B
DSC-F828
NOTE:
• -XX, -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some differences from
the original one.
• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine
service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.
• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not
supplied.
• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from
the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.
• CAPACITORS:
uF: µF
• COILS
uH: µH
• RESISTORS
All resistors are in ohms.
METAL: metal-film resistor
METAL OXIDE: Metal Oxide-film resistor
F: nonflammable
• SEMICONDUCTORS
In each case, u: µ, for example:
uA...: µA... , uPA... , µPA... ,
uPB... , µPB... , uPC... , µPC... ,
uPD..., µPD...
• Abbreviation
HK
: Hong Kong model
KR
: Korea model
JE
: Tourist model
J
: Japanese model
5-1
When indicating parts by reference number,
please include the board name.
The components identified by mark 0 or
dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety.
Replace only with part number specified.
Les composants identifiés par une marque
0 sont critiques pour la sécurité.
Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant
le numéro spécifié.
DSC-F828
5-1. EXPLODED VIEWS
5-1-1. OVERALL SECTION
ns : not supplied
BTH block assembly
(See page 5-7)
1
1
Cabinet (rear) block assembly
(See page 5-8)
6
1
1
1
1
Cabinet (front) block assembly-1
(See page 5-5)
1
7
8
1
1
9
4
Stroboscope block assembly
(See page 5-4)
1
3
ns
2
1
Ref. No.
1
2
3
4
Part No.
Description
3-080-203-31
3-051-124-01
A-7078-878-A
1-860-540-11
SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2
FOOT, RUBBER
SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE
Ref. No.
6
7
8
9
5-3
Part No.
Description
3-086-480-01
3-089-846-01
X-3953-809-1
(Note)
WINDOW, LCD
RADIATION SHEET (LL)
CABINET (LR) ASSY
TAPE (A)
Note :
For the part of 9: TAPE (A) (3-941-343-01) cut WOVEN
(T0.25), FABRIC NON (3-076-631-01) into the desired
length and use it.
DSC-F828
5-1-2. STROBOSCOPE BLOCK ASSEMBLY
ns : not supplied
76
60
57
54
61
54
62
54
B
58
59
D001
(Note1)
56
C
M910
D
77
B
ns
D
55
I
ns
54
64
A
I
54
C
69
66
64
A
54
68
74
53
65
52
54
75
F
G
E
(See page 5-5)
54
CD-469 board
(Note2)
73
51
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
51
52
53
54
55
A-7112-735-A
A-7078-884-A
3-989-735-51
3-080-222-11
3-086-499-01
REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS BLOCK ASSY)
ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE
SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2
SCREW (M1.7), TAPPING,P2
HOLDER, ST LASER
56
57
58
59
60
X-3953-801-1
1-818-099-11
A-7078-891-A
X-3953-800-2
3-086-493-01
CABINET ASSY, ST
CONNECTOR, SHOE
LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE
ST ASSY
COVER, ST
61
0 62
3-086-494-01 HOLDER, ST UNIT
A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
64
65
66
68
69
3-084-817-01
A-7078-890-A
3-086-498-01
3-086-495-01
3-086-496-01
GRIP
MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE
GUIDE, STFPC
COVER, STFPC
COVER, ST BLIND
73
74
75
0 76
77
3-086-497-01
1-860-539-11
1-962-610-11
1-478-445-11
3-080-203-31
GUIDE, HARNESS
HARNESS (PT-132)
FLASH UNIT
SCREW (M2), LOCK ACE, P2
0 D001
M910
1-805-470-51 LASER UNIT (Note1)
1-787-055-11 MOTOR, STROBOSCOPE (FLASH/MOTOR)
Note1 :
Note2 :
CD-469 board is included in the REPAIR (EB08A) (LENS
BLOCK ASSY). CD-469 board is not supplied as a single
board since removing it as a single board requires
adjustment.
5-4
Note3 :
specified.
Note3 :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
5-1-3. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-1
ns : not supplied
125
123
124
Cabinet (front) block assembly-2
(See page 5-6)
A
125
110
114
111
105
ns
112
105
102
ns
113
102
102
104
109
122
A
115
103
102
101
108
105
105
106
117
118
127
120
126
119
107
E
110
F
(See page 5-4)
Ref. No.
Ref. No.
G
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
101
102
103
104
105
X-3953-808-1
3-080-203-31
3-051-124-01
3-087-127-01
3-989-735-51
CABINET (LL) ASSY
SREW(M2),LOCK ACE,P2
FOOT, RUBBER
SCREW
114
115
117
118
119
3-086-485-01
3-087-125-01
1-860-541-11
1-860-535-11
1-860-536-11
GUIDE (L), FLEXIBLE
GUIDE (R), FLEXIBLE
106
107
108
109
110
A-7078-885-A
1-860-531-11
X-3953-799-1
3-086-490-01
3-080-222-11
AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE
AJ-006 FLEXIBLE BOARD
HINGE ASSY
COVER, ST (ST UNDER COVER)
SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2
120
122
123
124
125
3-090-857-01
3-089-843-01
1-400-689-11
3-088-689-01
(Note)
SHEET (ACC)
RADIATION SHEET (LR)
FERRITE CORE
SHEET (F2) ADHESIVE
TAPE (A)
111
112
113
A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE
1-794-045-61 CONNECTOR, DC-IN
X-3953-879-2 HOLDER ASSY, JACK
126
127
1-400-687-11 FERRITE CORE
3-088-442-01 SHEET (F1) ADHESIVE
5-5
Note :
length and use it.
DSC-F828
5-1-4. CABINET (FRONT) BLOCK ASSEMBLY-2
ns : not supplied
153
156
154
153
153
157
ns
MIC901
152
159
SP901
ns
158
ns
153
155
160
155
ns
151
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
151
152
153
154
155
X-3953-802-1
3-087-116-01
3-989-735-51
3-086-484-01
3-080-222-11
CABINET (FRONT) ASSY
BRACKET (FRONT), STRAP
HOLDER, MICROPHONE
156
X-3953-804-2 UPPER ASSY, CABINET
Ref. No.
5-6
Part No.
Description
157
158
159
160
MIC901
3-087-108-01
1-478-227-11
1-805-389-11
(Note)
1-542-446-61
CUSHION, MD
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (TOP)
DISPLAY PANEL, LIQUID CRYSTAL
TAPE (A)
MICROPHONE
SP901
1-825-663-11 SPEAKER (1.6CM)
Note :
length and use it.
DSC-F828
5-1-5. BTH BLOCK ASSEMBLY
224
ns : not supplied
210
BT901
221
209
209
C
B
209
212
213
220
ns
C
209
214
211
201
SY
-0
96
223
222
208
204
215
ns
216
217
BT001
202
ns
203
209
207
206
ns
B
C405
A
04
-2
D
D
219
218
205
A
201
Ref. No.
: BT001 (Lithium battery) LR-018 board
on the mount position. (See page 4-50)
Part No.
Description
Part No.
Description
201
202
203
204
205
3-080-222-11
A-7078-880-A
3-086-491-01
3-969-380-01
3-375-114-71
LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE
SHEET, CF RADIATION
SPRING, BATTERY
SCREW
216
217
218
219
220
3-087-188-01
A-7078-881-A
A-7078-883-A
3-086-487-02
3-090-807-01
SHEET (B), CF RADIATION
FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE
DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE
LABEL,FUSE REPLACEMENT CAUTION
SHEET (MS)
206
207
208
209
210
3-050-594-01
3-073-601-21
X-3953-805-2
3-989-735-51
1-860-538-11
SPRING, COMPRESSION
FOOT, RUBBER
HOLDER ASSY, BT
221
222
223
224
BT901
1-500-227-21
1-818-138-11
3-090-809-01
(Note1)
1-694-796-41
BEAD, FERRITE
CONNECTOR, CARD(COMPACT FLASH)
CUSHION (SY)
TAPE (A)
TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY
211
212
213
214
215
1-815-853-13
A-7078-879-A
3-087-187-01
A-7079-008-A
1-860-717-11
CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK
CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE
RETAINER, SY
SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
Note1 :
length and use it.
Ref. No.
0 C405
1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF 315V
CAUTION :
5-7
Note2 :
specified.
Note2 :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
5-1-6. CABINET (REAR) BLOCK ASSEMBLY
ns : not supplied
EVF assembly
(See page 5-9)
257
258
A
263
255
259
251
ns
251
A
260
264
LCD901
256
261
ND901
253
252
262
ns
251
ns
251
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
251
252
253
255
256
3-989-735-51
1-478-229-11
3-090-369-01
1-478-228-11
3-086-488-01
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (UNDER)
TAPE (F3)
SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL(MID)
CUSHION, LCD
257
258
259
3-080-222-11 SCREW(M1.7), TAPPING,P2
X-3953-806-2 CABINET (REAR) ASSY
3-087-155-03 SHEET, ADHESIVE, LCD WINDOW
Note1 :
length and use it.
Ref. No.
260
261
262
263
264
Part No.
Description
3-087-153-01
3-087-157-01
3-051-124-01
X-3953-944-1
(Note1)
COVER, JACK
BRACKET, STRAP
FOOT, RUBBER
LID, CF ASSY (SERVICE)
TAPE (A)
LCD901 1-805-380-21 INDICATOR MODULE LIQUID CRYST
0 ND901 1-478-145-11 BLOCK LIGHT GUIDE PLATE
5-8
Note2 :
specified.
Note2 :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
5-1-7. EVF ASSEMBLY
ns : not supplied
306
ns
305
LCD902
307
304
303
ns
302
301
Ref. No.
301
302
303
304
Part No.
Description
A-7078-887-A
3-072-214-01
3-072-211-01
3-072-210-01
LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE
GUIDE (20), LAMP
ILLUMINATOR
SHEET, PRISM
Ref. No.
305
306
307
LCD902
5-9
Part No.
Description
3-059-734-01
X-3953-807-1
3-950-044-01
8-753-039-35
CUSHION (1), LCD
EVF ASSY
RING, O
LCX044AK-1
DSC-F828
AJ-007
CF-097
DD-204
5-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Ref. No.
A-7078-885-A AJ-007 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CAPACITOR >
C201
C204
1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP
0.001uF
0.001uF
10.00% 50V
10.00% 50V
< CONNECTOR >
CN201
1-817-548-11 CONNECTOR, FPC 6P
< DIODE >
D201
D202
D203
1-216-295-11 METAL CHIP
0 (Note)
8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
8-719-075-15 DIODE MAZT082H08S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB201
FB202
FB203
FB204
FB205
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
Part No.
Description
R111
R112
R113
R114
R116
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47
47
47
47
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R117
R118
R119
R120
R121
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47
47
47
47
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R122
R123
R124
R125
R126
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47
47
47
47
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R127
1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP
47
5%
1/16W
************************************************************
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
A-7078-883-A DD-204 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(C405 is not included in this completed board)
< CAPACITOR >
< JACK >
J201
1-793-995-21 JACK, SUPER SMALL TYPE (ACC (Accesory))
************************************************************
A-7078-879-A CF-097 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CAPACITOR >
C101
C102
C103
1-100-662-11 TANTAL. CHIP
0.1uF
0.1uF
47uF
10.00% 16V
10.00% 16V
20%
6.3V
< CONNECTOR >
CN101
CN103
1-794-505-21 CONNECTOR, FPC (ZIF) 51P
1-818-139-11 PIN, CONNECTOR (CF CARD) 50P
< DIODE >
D101
8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111-(K8).S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB101
1-469-775-21 FERRITE
0uH
< RESISTOR >
R101
R102
R103
R104
R105
1-216-864-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-990-11
1-218-937-11
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT CHIP
RES-CHIP
0
47
47
0
47
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
5%
1/16W
R106
R107
R108
R109
R110
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-937-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47
47
47
47
47
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
Note :
Resistor is mounted to the location where D201 is printed.
5-10
C001
C002
C003
C004
C005
1-107-826-11
1-107-826-11
1-125-777-11
1-125-777-11
1-107-819-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.1uF
0.022uF
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
16V
16V
10V
10V
16V
C006
C007
C008
C009
C011
1-165-176-11
1-162-964-91
1-107-819-11
1-119-923-11
1-125-777-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.047uF
0.001PF
0.022uF
0.047uF
0.1uF
10.00%
10%
10.00%
10.00%
10.00%
16V
50V
16V
10V
10V
C012
C013
C014
C016
C018
1-162-968-11
1-125-777-11
1-162-966-11
1-162-964-11
1-162-967-91
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0047uF
0.1uF
0.0022uF
0.001uF
0.0033uF
10%
10.00%
10%
10%
10%
50V
10V
50V
50V
50V
C019
C027
C028
C029
C030
1-162-969-91
1-165-875-11
1-165-875-11
1-125-889-91
1-165-908-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.0068uF
10uF
10uF
2.2uF
1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
50V
10V
10V
10V
10V
C031
C032
C033
C034
C035
1-165-908-11
1-165-908-11
1-165-908-11
1-165-908-11
1-165-908-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
1uF
1uF
1uF
1uF
1uF
10%
10%
10%
10%
10%
10V
10V
10V
10V
10V
C038
C039
C040
C041
C042
1-137-710-11
1-137-710-11
1-137-710-11
1-137-710-11
1-137-710-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
10uF
10uF
10uF
10uF
20%
20%
20%
20%
20%
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
6.3V
C043
C044
C045
C046
C053
1-137-710-11
1-115-566-11
1-127-861-11
1-115-566-11
1-165-908-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
10uF
4.7uF
2.2uF
4.7uF
1uF
20%
10.00%
10%
10.00%
10%
6.3V
10V
16V
10V
10V
DSC-F828
DD-204
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
C058
C062
C065
C066
C067
1-165-908-11
1-131-860-91
1-135-993-11
1-100-662-11
1-119-751-11
CERAMIC CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
1uF
4.7uF
33uF
47uF
22uF
10%
20%
20%
20%
20.00%
10V
10V
10V
6.3V
16V
Ref. No.
C068
C069
C070
C401
C402
1-119-751-11
1-119-751-11
1-119-751-11
1-100-055-11
1-125-777-11
TANTAL. CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
TANTAL. CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
22uF
22uF
22uF
22uF
0.1uF
20.00%
20.00%
20.00%
20%
10.00%
16V
16V
16V
16V
10V
L006
L007
L010
L401
Part No.
Description
1-456-136-21
1-456-137-11
1-414-392-41
1-412-027-11
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
10uH
22uH
1uH
2.2uH
< LINE FILTER >
C404
0 C405
C406
1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10%
1-100-734-11 CAP, ELECT (FLASH) 250MF
25V
315V
10V
1uF
10%
LF001
< TRANSISTOR >
< CONNECTOR >
CN001
CN002
CN401
CN601
CN602
1-691-550-11
1-691-550-51
1-815-494-11
1-778-598-21
1-766-336-21
PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P
PIN, CONNECTOR (1.5MM)(SMD) 3P
PIN, CONNECTOR 2P
CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC 6P
< DIODE >
D001
D002
D003
D004
D006
8-719-421-67
8-719-075-15
8-719-158-49
8-719-027-76
8-719-027-76
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MA132WK-(K8).SO
MAZT082H08S0
MA8120-TX
1SS357-TPH3
1SS357-TPH3
D007
D010
D011
D401
0 D402
8-719-073-03
8-719-081-19
8-719-081-19
8-719-073-01
6-500-237-01
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MA8082-(K8).S0
1SS383(T5RSONY1)
1SS383(T5RSONY1)
MA111-(K8).S0
HAU160C030TP
D403
< FUSE >
1-576-406-21
1-576-406-21
1-576-406-21
1-576-406-21
1-576-406-21
0 F006
1-576-406-21 FUSE 1.4A/32V
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
FUSE
1.4A/32V
1.4A/32V
1.4A/32V
1.4A/32V
1.4A/32V
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB001
1-414-228-11 FERRITE
0uH
< IC >
IC001
IC004
6-703-429-01 IC MB44A120APFV-G-BND-ERE1
6-704-874-01 IC XC62KS0PXXMR
< COIL >
L001
L002
L003
L004
L005
1-419-881-11
1-456-137-11
1-424-846-11
1-456-137-11
1-456-137-11
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
INDUCTOR
Q001
Q002
Q003
Q004
Q006
8-729-047-68
8-729-051-49
8-729-804-41
6-550-119-01
8-729-056-00
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
SSM3K03FE(TPL3)
HAT1054R-EL
2SB1122-ST-TD-E
DTC144EMT2L
MCH3310-TL-E
Q007
Q008
Q009
Q010
Q011
8-729-053-76
8-729-053-76
8-729-053-76
8-729-053-76
8-729-053-76
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
CPH5802-TL-E
CPH5802-TL-E
CPH5802-TL-E
CPH5802-TL-E
CPH5802-TL-E
Q012
Q014
Q015
Q401
Q402
8-729-053-76
8-729-054-48
6-550-560-01
8-729-048-50
8-729-426-31
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
CPH5802-TL-E
N1B04FE-Y/GR(TPLR3)
LS5U17LPTL
2SK3018-T106
XP1214-TXE
Q407
6-550-308-01 TRANSISTOR
CPH3205-SONY-TL-E
< RESISTOR >
8-719-048-98 DIODE RB160L-40TE25
0 F001
0 F002
0 F003
0 F004
0 F005
1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE
47uH
22uH
0uH
22uH
22uH
5-11
R002
R005
R008
R009
R011
1-218-990-11
1-218-985-11
1-218-969-11
1-218-961-11
1-218-990-11
SHORT CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
SHORT CHIP
0
470K
22K
4.7K
0
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R012
R013
R014
R016
R017
1-218-971-11
1-218-961-11
1-218-985-11
1-218-989-11
1-208-707-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
33K
4.7K
470K
1M
10K
5%
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R018
R019
R020
R022
R023
1-208-930-11
1-216-150-91
1-218-975-11
1-218-953-11
1-218-963-11
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
62K
10
68K
1K
6.8K
0.5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/8W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R024
R025
R028
R029
R030
1-218-969-11
1-218-969-81
1-218-975-11
1-208-711-11
1-218-849-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
22K
22K
68K
15K
1.2K
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R031
R032
R033
R034
R035
1-218-969-11
1-208-709-11
1-218-975-11
1-218-978-11
1-208-713-11
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
22K
12K
68K
120K
18K
5%
0.5%
5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R036
R039
R040
R041
R042
1-218-977-11
1-216-789-11
1-218-949-11
1-208-707-11
1-208-927-11
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
100K
2.2
470
10K
47K
5%
5%
5%
0.5%
0.5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
Note :
specified.
Note :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
DD-204
Ref. No.
FP-748
LB-091
LR-018
Part No.
Description
R043
R044
R048
R049
R401
1-218-965-11
1-218-977-11
1-208-707-11
1-208-707-11
1-218-965-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
10K
100K
10K
10K
10K
5%
5%
0.5%
0.5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
R402
R403
R404
R405
1-218-973-11
1-218-967-11
1-218-942-11
1-218-973-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
47K
15K
120
47K
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
LS-067
Ref. No.
MT-067
Part No.
ST-088
Description
< SWITCH >
S001
1-786-179-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)
(MOTOR POSITION DETECT)
************************************************************
0
A-7078-889-A SI-037 BOARD, COMPLETE
*********************
< DIODE >
< TRANSFORMER >
D001
6-500-512-01 DIODE CL-330IRS-X-TU (Infrared ray emitter)
0 T401
1-443-157-21 TRANSFORMER, D.C.-D.C. CONVERT
************************************************************
< COIL >
L001
1-456-193-11 COIL, TRIGGER
************************************************************
A-7078-881-A FP-748 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
A-7078-884-A ST-088 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CONNECTOR >
CN001 1-778-598-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
CN002 1-778-593-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 60P
************************************************************
A-7078-887-A LB-091 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
CN001
SI-037
< CAPACITOR >
C501
C502
C503
C504
C505
1-164-943-11
1-125-777-11
1-137-723-21
1-100-761-21
1-165-875-11
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
CERAMIC CHIP
0.01uF
0.1uF
0.047uF
0.01uF
10uF
C506
0.047uF
10.00%
10.00%
10%
10%
10%
16V
10V
250V
250V
10V
16V
< DIODE >
< CONNECTOR >
D001
6-500-375-01 DIODE NSCW455T-TC9 (BACKLIGHT)
************************************************************
A-7078-880-A LR-018 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
CN501
CN502
CN503
CN504
CN505
1-766-352-21
1-815-494-11
1-778-164-21
1-779-327-11
1-779-337-11
PIN, CONNECTOR 2P
CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 16P
< BATTERY >
< DIODE >
0 BT001
1-756-191-31 BATTERY, LITHIUM (SECONDARY)
< SWITCH >
S001
1-692-088-11 SWITCH, TACTILE (RESET)
************************************************************
A-7078-891-A LS-067 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
(D001 is not included in this completed board)
< DIODE >
0 D001
D002
D003
D004
1-805-470-51
8-719-073-03
8-719-073-03
8-719-064-07
D502
D503
D504
D506
D507
8-719-075-15
8-719-073-03
8-719-123-76
8-749-017-19
6-500-811-01
D508
8-719-027-76 DIODE 1SS357-TPH3
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB501
FB502
FB503
FB504
FB505
LASER UNIT (Note1)
DIODE MA8082-(K8).S0
DIODE SML-310LTT86 (Self-timer)
DIODE MAZT082H08S0
THYRISTOR 03P4J-T1
DIODE 02DZ10-TPH3
DIODE RR255L-400TE25
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
1-469-179-21
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
FERRITE
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
0uH
< IC >
< SWITCH >
IC502
8-729-053-74 TRANSISTOR CY25AAJ-8-T13
S001
1-786-180-31 SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (FLASH OPEN DETECT)
************************************************************
A-7078-890-A MT-067 BOARD, COMPLETE
***********************
CAUTION :
< CONNECTOR >
CN001
Note1 :
5-12
Note2 :
specified.
Note2 :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
ST-088
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Ref. No.
< TRANSISTOR >
Q501
Q502
Q503
Q504
6-550-237-01
8-729-042-58
8-729-053-57
8-729-037-52
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
TRANSISTOR
2SC5658T2LQ/R
UN9111J-(K8).SO
RN1902FE(TPLR3)
2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO
R503
R505
R506
R507
R508
1-218-953-11
1-218-937-11
1-218-989-11
1-216-121-11
1-218-949-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
1K
47
1M
1M
470
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
1/16W
R509
R510
R511
R512
R513
1-220-254-11
1-220-254-11
1-216-097-11
1-216-864-11
1-218-943-11
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
RES-CHIP
METAL CHIP
RES-CHIP
56
56
100K
0
150
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/4W
1/4W
1/10W
1/16W
1/16W
A-7078-878-A SW-410 BOARD, COMPLETE
***********************
< CONNECTOR >
< RESISTOR >
1-216-822-11
1-216-827-11
1-216-837-11
1-216-823-11
1-218-867-11
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
METAL CHIP
1.2K
3.3K
22K
1.5K
6.8K
5%
5%
5%
5%
5%
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/16W
1/10W
< SWITCH >
S001
S002
S003
S004
S005
Description
Electrical parts list of the SY-096 board is
not shown.
R514
1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP
10K
5%
1/16W
************************************************************
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
SY-096
SY-096 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)
*******************************
< RESISTOR >
CN001
Part No.
SW-410
1-786-179-11
1-771-138-82
1-771-138-82
1-786-179-11
SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY) (OPEN(FLASH))
SWITCH, KEY BOARD (FLASH)
SWITCH, KEY BOARD (MACRO)
SWITCH, PUSH (1KEY)
(FOCUS (AUTO/MANUAL))
1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (METERING MODE)
S006
S007
1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD (BURST/BRACKET)
1-771-138-82 SWITCH, KEY BOARD
(NIGHT SHOT/NIGHT FRAMING)
************************************************************
5-13
DSC-F828
UA-003
Ref. No.
Part No.
Description
Ref. No.
A-7078-888-A UA-003 BOARD, COMPLETE
**********************
< CONNECTOR >
CN001
1-794-962-11 CONNECTOR, SQUARE TYPE(USB 5P)
< DIODE >
D001
D002
D003
D004
8-719-075-15
8-719-073-03
8-719-075-15
8-719-073-01
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
DIODE
MAZT082H08S0
MA8082-(K8).S0
MAZT082H08S0
MA111-(K8).S0
< FERRITE BEAD >
FB001
1-500-444-11 FERRITE
0uH
< JACK >
J001
1-569-950-31 JACK (SMALL TYPE) (AUDIO/VIDEO)
< LINE FILTER >
LF001
1-456-583-11 INDUCTOR
0uH
< RESISTOR >
R001
R002
R003
R004
R005
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
1-216-821-11
1-216-295-91
1-216-295-91
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
METAL CHIP
SHORT CHIP
SHORT CHIP
0
0
1K
0
0
5%
1/16W
R006
1-216-864-11 METAL CHIP
0
5%
1/16W
************************************************************
5-19
Part No.
Description
DSC-F828
Checking supplied accessories.
Make sure that the following accessories are supplied with your digital still camera.
(AEP, E model)
0 1-769-608-11
(AUS model)
0 1-696-819-11
(UK, HK model)
0 1-783-374-11
(US, CND model)
0 1-790-107-22
(JE, J model)
0 1-790-732-12
(KR model)
0 1-776-985-11
(CH model)
0 1-782-476-13
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 (I) USB Driver) (1)
(US, CND, J model)
3-087-331-01
CD-ROM
(SPVD-013 USB Driver) (1)
(AEP, UK, E, HK, JE, KR, AUS,
CH model)
3-087-330-01
AC adaptor (1) (AC-L15A)
0 1-477-533-51
1-824-111-11
NP-FM50 battery pack (1)
(not supplied)
USB cable (1)
1-827-038-11
Lens cap (1)
X-3952-016-1
String assy cap
X-3953-980-1
Lens hood (1)
3-086-481-01
(JE model)
1-569-007-12
(E model)
1-569-008-12
S-houlder strap (1)
3-071-638-11
Clamp filter (Ferrite core) (for AC-L15A)
1-543-798-21
CD-ROM
(Image Data Converter) (1)
3-087-661-01
Other accessories
3-084-996-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION(ENGLISH)
(US,CND,AEP,UK,E,AUS,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH/GERMAN)(CND,AEP)
3-084-996-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (SPANISH/PORTUGUESE)
(AEP,E,JE)
3-084-996-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ITALIAN/DUTCH)(AEP)
• Abbreviation
CH : Chinese model
HK : Hong Kong model
KR : Korea model
JE : Tourist model
J
: Japanese model
3-084-996-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (TRADITIONALCHINESE)
(E,CH,JE,HK)
3-084-996-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (RUSSIAN/SWEDISH)(AEP)
3-084-996-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC)(E)
3-084-996-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN)(JE,KR)
3-087-904-01 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW (JAPANESE)(J)
3-087-904-11 MANUAL INSTRUCTION, RAW
(ENGLISH/FRENCH/GERMAN/SPANISH/ITALIAN/DUTCH/
PORTUGUESE/TRADITIONAL CHINESE/
SIMPLIFIED CHINESE)(EXCEPT J)
5-20E
Note :
specified.
Note :
pour la sécurité.
DSC-F828
9-876-279-31
Sony EMCS Co.
— 100 —
2004D1600-1
©2004.4
Published by DI Technical Support Section
DSC-F828
ADJ
SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS
Ver 1.1 2004. 04
Revision History
How to use
Acrobat Reader
Link
SERVICE MODE
Before starting adjustment
Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards
APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)
SERVICE MODE
CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
INITIALIZATION OF DATA
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEW FINDER ADJUSTMENT
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note: Be sure to carry out “Data Save”.
Contents of LEVEL 2 and LEVEL 3 Service Manual
CONTENTS
1. SERVICE NOTE
2. DISASSEMBLY
3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS
4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS
9-876-279-52
LEVEL 2
a
a
OVERALL
POWER
DD-204, LR-018, ST-088,
LS-067, MT-067, SI-037,
UA-003, LB-091, CF-097,
SW-410, AJ-007 BOARD
(TOP)/(MID)/(UNDER)
EXPLODED VIEWS
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Sony EMCS Co.
LEVEL 3
✕
✕
✕
SY-096 BOARD
✕
a (SY-096 BOARD)
2004D1600-1
©2004.4
Published by DI CS Strategy Div.
DSC-F828
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.
ADJUSTMENT
1.
Before starting adjustment ··············································· 6-1
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards ···· 6-2
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT ··························· 6-3
1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT ················· 6-3
1-1-1. List of Service Tools ························································ 6-3
1-1-2. Preparations ····································································· 6-4
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply ····················· 6-4
1-1-4. Precaution ········································································ 6-6
1.
Setting the Switch ···························································· 6-6
2.
Order of Adjustments ······················································ 6-6
3.
Subjects ··········································································· 6-6
4.
Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ······························· 6-7
1-2. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8
1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF DATA ········································· 6-8
1.
Initializing All Pages Data ··············································· 6-8
2.
Initializing Single Page Data ··········································· 6-8
3.
2F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8
4.
4F Page Adjustment Address ··········································· 6-8
5.
6E Page Adjustment Address ·········································· 6-9
6.
6F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-10
7.
8E Page Adjustment Address ········································ 6-11
8.
8F Page Adjustment Address ········································· 6-11
1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ····························· 6-12
1.
Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·········· 6-12
1-4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ························ 6-13
Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments ········ 6-13
IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment ······································ 6-13
Flange Back Adjustment ··············································· 6-14
Flange Back Check ························································ 6-14
Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450) ·································· 6-15
Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450) ································ 6-16
Color Shade Check ························································ 6-17
F No. Compensation ······················································ 6-18
Mechanical Shutter Adjustment ···································· 6-18
Light Value Adjustment ················································· 6-19
Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment ····························· 6-20
Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode) ········· 6-22
Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode) ·············· 6-23
CCD Linearity Check ···················································· 6-24
CCD White Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-26
CCD Black Defect Compensation Check ····················· 6-27
Strobe Adjustment ························································· 6-28
AF Laser Output Adjustment ········································ 6-29
AF Laser Axis Check ···················································· 6-30
1-6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT ··································· 6-35
Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments ············· 6-35
LCD Initial Data Input ·················································· 6-35
VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-36
Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-36
V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-37
White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-37
6-2. SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-38
2-1. APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS) ············ 6-38
2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS ················································· 6-38
1.
Connection ····································································· 6-38
2.
Operation ······································································· 6-38
2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS ··········································· 6-38
2-2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
SERVICE MODE ·························································· 6-39
Setting the Test Mode ···················································· 6-39
Bit value discrimination ················································ 6-39
Switch check (1) ···························································· 6-40
Switch check (2) ···························································· 6-40
Switch check (3) ···························································· 6-40
Switch check (4) ···························································· 6-41
Switch check (5) ···························································· 6-41
Switch check (6) ···························································· 6-41
LED, Segment LCD check ············································ 6-41
Record of Use check ······················································ 6-42
Self Diagnostics Log check ··········································· 6-42
* Color reproduction frame is shown on page 6-43.
* AF illumination frame is shown on page 6-44.
1-5. COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER
ADJUSTMENT ····························································· 6-31
1.
Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments ············· 6-31
2.
EVF Initial Data Input ··················································· 6-31
3.
VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································· 6-32
4.
Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board) ································ 6-32
5.
Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board) ···························· 6-33
6.
V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board) ····························· 6-33
7.
White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board) ·················· 6-34
—2—
DSC-F828
SECTION 6
ADJUSTMENTS
1.
Before starting adjustment
EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board
The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct.
Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.
Procedure 1
Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board
is replaced.
(Machine before starting repair)
PC
PC
(Machine after a board is replaced)
Download the saved
data to a machine.
Save the EVR data
to a personal computer.
Procedure 2
Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine that is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPROM
to the replaced board.
Remove the EEPROM and install it.
(Former board)
(New board)
Procedure 3
When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or
installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.
(Machine to be repaired)
PC
(Machine to be repaired)
Download the data.
Save the data.
(The same model of the same destination)
After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the
respective items of the EVR data.
(Refer to page 6-3 for the items to be checked.)
6-1
DSC-F828
1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards
When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.
Adjustment
Initialization of data Initialization of data
Video
Video output level adj.
Iris reset sensor adj.
Flange back adj.
Color shade check
F No. compensation
Mechanical shutter adj.
Light value adj.
Camera
Linear matrix and AWB adj.
Color reproduction check
CCD linearity check
CCD white defect compensation check
CCD black defect compensation check
Strobe adj.
AF laser output adj.
EVF initial data input
VCO adj.
Bright adj.
EVF
Contrast adj.
V COM adj.
White balance adj.
LCD initial data input
VCO adj.
LCD
Contrast adj.
V COM adj.
White balance adj.
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z z
Table. 6-1-1.
6-2
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
SY-096 board IC501 (Camera DSP)
(With built-in flash memory)
Adjustment
Section
Lens device
Xenon tube
EVF block LCD unit (LCD902)
LCD block LCD unit (LCD901)
LCD block Back light unit
LB-091 board D001 (EVF back light)
LS-067 board D001 (Laser unit)
SY-096 board IC301 (Camera DSP)
SY-096 board IC303 (Video amp.)
SY-096 board IC801 (LCD DRIVER)
SY-096 board IC902 (EVF DRIVER)
LB-091 board (COMPLETE)
LS-067 board (COMPLETE)
SY-096 board (COMPLETE)
Replaced parts
Board EEPROM
Block replacement Mounted Parts replacement replacement replacement
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
DSC-F828
6-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT
1-1.
PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT
1-1-1. List of Service Tools
• Oscilloscope
• Color monitor
• Calculator which can hexadecimal calculation
J-1
• Vectorscope
J-2
J-3
Clear chart for
pattern box
Pattern box PTB-1450
J-6082-557-A
or
Pattern box PTB-450
J-6082-200-A
J-4
Color chart for
pattern box
• AC power adapter
9 colors chart for
pattern box
For PTB-1450:
J-6020-560-A
For PTB-450:
J-6080-621-A
J-5
For PTB-1450:
J-6020-562-A
J-6
For PTB-1450:
J-6020-559-A
Mini pattern box
J-6082-353-B
Siemens star chart
J-6080-875-A
For PTB-450:
J-6020-250-A
J-7
J-8
J-9
Personal computer
with Widows98/
98SE/ME/2000/
XP installed
and with two USB
ports
Camera table
J-6082-384-A
J-11
J-10
USB cable
1-823-932-11
J-12
Application for
adjustment
(SEUS)
and HASP key
(Note)
F828 C1 MATRIX
Adjustment
(Note)
Note: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the application
for adjustment (SEUS), HASP key and F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment.
Fig. 6-1-1.
6-3
Background paper
J-2501-130-A
DSC-F828
1-1-2.
1)
2)
3)
Preparations
Pattern box
Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 6-1-4.
Set the MS/CF switch to MS (Memory stick).
Start up the application for adjustment (SEUS).
About 6cm (PTB-1450)
About 20cm (PTB-450)
Note1: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced STILL Mode)”
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.
2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and write data: 11.
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
The above procedure will enable the power (STILL mode) to
be turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))
disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the
“Forced Power ON Mode”.
Front of the lens
Note2: Setting the “Forced Power ON Mode (Forced PLAY Mode)”
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
The above procedure will enable the power (PALY mode) to be
turned on with POWER switch (Control switch block (TOP))
disconnected. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the
“Forced Power ON Mode”.
Fig. 6-1-2.
Note3: Exiting the “Forced Power ON Mode”
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply
The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged
with 200V to 300V voltage. When disassembling the unit, discharge
this voltage in order to protect service engineers from electric shock.
Discharge procedure
1. Remove the power supply (AC power adaptor or battery).
2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 6-1-3. locally by
yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and
negative (–) terminal of the flash voltage charge capacitor. Allow
ten seconds to discharge the voltage.
Short jig
(1kΩ /1W)
04
-2
DD
DD-204 board
Fig. 6-1-3.
6-4
DSC-F828
[CONNECTION OF EQUIPMENT]
Personal computer
(with two USB ports)
HASP key
USB2
USB1
USB
DC IN
AC IN
AC power
adaptor
Memory stick
Fig. 6-1-4.
6-5
DSC-F828
1-1-4. Precaution
1. Setting the Switch
Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform
adjustments.
Switch settings
1. Mode dial ............................................. STILL (P AUTO) (P)
2. ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
3. MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick)
4. MACRO (
) .................................................................. ON
5. WHITE BALANCE ..................................................... AUTO
6.
7.
8.
9.
EV .................................................................................... 0EV
FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO
USB CONNECT (SET UP setting) ....................... NORMAL
VIDEO OUT (SET UP setting) .................................... NTSC
2. Order of Adjustments
Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.
Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)
C=D
C
D
Yellow
Cyan
Green
White
Magenta
Red
Blue
Blue
Yellow
Cyan
Green
White
Magenta
Red
H
Picture frame
V
A
B
B
A=
2
Fig. a
Video terminal
output waveform
A
Fig. b LCD screen or under scan
monitor TV picture
Enlargement
Difference in level
Adjust the camera position and direction to
obtain the output waveform shown in Fig. a
and the LCD screen or the monitor TV
display shown in Fig. b.
A
9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450)
A
A
B
A=B
C
Green
Yellow
W14
Cyan
White
Red
C14
Blue
Magenta
C=
B
3
C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment
B
C
Effective picture frame
A
2
Transparent window
Adjust the camera position and direction to
obtain the LCD screen or the monitor TV
display shown in Fig. c.
Fig. c LCD screen or under scan
monitor TV picture
Fig.6-1-5.
3. Subjects
1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-450)
When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture
frame)
2) 9 colors chart (Standard picture frame) (PTB-1450)
When performing adjustments using the 9 colors chart, adjust
the picture frame as shown in Fig. 6-1-5. (Standard picture
frame)
3)
6-6
Clear chart (Standard picture frame)
(PTB-450/PTB-1450)
Remove the color bar chart (PTB-450) or 9 colors chart (PTB1450) from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place.
(Do not perform zoom operations during this time.)
DSC-F828
4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box
A dark room is required to provide an accurate strobe adjustment.
If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below;
1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.
woody board A (2 sheets)
400 mm
woody board B (2 sheets)
370 mm
513 mm
730 mm
woody board C (1 sheet)
700 mm
513 mm
700 mm
700 mm
Fig. 6-1-6.
2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.
3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.
4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side
of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig. 6-1-7.)
woody board A
woody board B
woody board A
woody board B
woody board C
Fig. 6-1-7.
6-7
DSC-F828
1-2.
1-2-1.
2. Initializing Single Page Data
By performing the following procedure, data of the page that you
want to initialize will be initialized.
Initializing Method:
2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
SECTOR WRITE screen.
3) Check that the SET ID is “03”.
4) Click [All] of the option buttons of the target page. (Fig. 6-1-8. B)
5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of
the camera.
6) Wait for 2 sec.
7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.
1. Initializing All Pages Data
By performing the following procedure, data of all the pages will
be initialized.
Initializing Method:
2) Click [Sector Write] on the SEUS screen to display the SEUS
SECTOR WRITE screen.
3) Check that the SET ID is “03”.
4) Click [All] of the ALL SELECT buttons to select all pages.
(Fig. 6-1-8. A)
5) Click [Write] to write the initializing data to the EEPROM of
the camera.
6) Wait for 2 sec.
7) Click [Close] to close the SEUS PAGE EDIT screen.
Note: When 4F page or 8E page is initialized, perform “Modification of
4F, 8E Page Data”. (Refer to “1. Initializing All Pages Data”.)
Processing after Completing Initializing of data
Order Page Address Data
Procedure
Modification of 4F, 8E Page Data
If all page data have been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed
data-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.
1)
2)
3)
4)
1
2
00
01
3
Select page: 00, address: 01, and set data: 01.
Click [Page] on the SEUS screen, and input “4F” or “8E”.
Click [Address], and input the “Fixed data-2” address.
Click [Set], and input the new data.
29
29
Set the data.
Set the data.
Check “Receive Paket Error” is
displayed on the SEUS screen.
Turn on the power of the camera.
4
5
Note: New data for changing are not shown in the table because they
are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the
data built in the same model. If copy the data built in the different
model, the camera may not operate.
5)
20
20
Click [Connect] on the SEUS
screen.
B
Repeat steps 2 to 4 until all data of the “Fixed data-2” addresses
are changed.
Click [Save] to write the changed data to the EEPROM of the
camera.
Wait for 2 sec.
6)
7)
Processing after Completing Initializing of data
Procedure
1
20
00
29 Set the data.
2
3
4
5
20
01
29
Set the data.
Check “Receive Paket Error” is
displayed on the SEUS screen.
Turn on the power of the camera.
Click [Connect] on the SEUS
screen.
A
Fig. 6-1-8.
3. 2F Page Adjustment Address
Address
23
Remark
Initial value
80
Test mode
Table. 6-1-2.
Address
46
47
88
94
95
96
97
A1
Initial value
00
00
00
00
Remark
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-2
Fixed data-2
Recording counter
(Refer to “Record of Use check”
of “SERVICE MODE”(Page 6-42).)
Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-3.
6-8
DSC-F828
5. 6E Page Adjustment Address
Address
Address
04
05
06
07
08
09
0A
0B
0C
0D
0E
0F
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
Remark
Initial value
1D
AWB 3200K/5800K standard data
00
input
07
00
1B
00
08
00
1D
00
07
00
1B
00
08
00
1C
00
07
00
1B
00
08
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0E
00
0E
00
0D
00
0F
00
0E
00
0E
00
0D
00
0F
00
0E
00
0E
00
0D
00
0F
00
3C
3D
3E
3F
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
72
73
74
75
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
8A
8B
8C
8D
8E
8F
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
9A
9B
9C
9D
9E
9F
Initial value
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
0C
00
10
00
10
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
10
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
10
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
10
00
Remark
AWB 3200K/5800K standard data
input
Strobe adj.
Linear matrix adj.
Table. 6-1-4.
6-9
DSC-F828
Address
Address
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
1A
1B
1C
1D
1E
1F
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
2A
2B
2C
2D
2E
2F
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
3A
3B
3C
3D
3E
40
41
42
43
44
45
Initial value
40
00
40
FF
FF
FF
00
3A
FF
00
00
00
00
17
80
00
00
19
00
00
00
26
26
82
08
03
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
FF
40
41
42
43
44
45
Remark
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
52
53
54
5E
5F
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
6B
6C
6D
B8
B9
BA
BB
BC
BD
BE
BF
C0
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
C9
CA
CB
CC
CD
CE
CF
D0
D1
D2
Color shade check
AF laser output adj.
Flange back adj.
Flange back adj.
6-10
Initial value
46
47
48
49
4A
4B
4C
4D
4E
4F
50
51
00
00
00
E0
80
00
00
00
00
00
30
FE
6D
FF
00
00
09
AC
09
B4
09
BD
09
A2
09
C3
00
00
00
00
00
37
2E
21
15
15
80
88
98
90
88
00
00
Remark
Flange back adj.
Auto focus illumination adj
IRIS reset sensor adj.
F No. compensation
Light value adj.
F No. compensation/
DSC-F828
6F page
Address
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
DA
DB
DC
DD
DE
DF
E0
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EA
EB
EC
ED
EE
EF
Remark
Initial value
00
00
00
00
14
FF
Strobe adj.
FF
FF
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Table. 6-1-5.
7. 8E Page Adjustment Address
Address
Initial value
C8
Remark
Fixed data-2
Table. 6-1-6.
Address
23
24
28
2A
2C
73
74
75
78
7A
7C
D0
Initial value
80
76
90
80
72
80
A4
8D
90
80
38
80
Remark
VCO adj. (LCD)
V COM adj. (LCD)
White balance adj. (LCD)
Contrast adj. (LCD)
VCO adj. (EVF)
V COM adj. (EVF)
Bright adj. (EVF)
White balance adj. (EVF)
Contrast adj. (EVF)
Video output level adj.
Table. 6-1-7.
6-11
DSC-F828
1-3.
VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
1. Video Output Level Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.
Mode
PLAY (
)
Signal
Measurement Point
No signal
Video terminal of AV OUT jack
(75Ω terminated)
Measuring Instrument
Adjustment Page
Oscilloscope
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
D0
Sync level:
A=286 ± 5mV (NTSC mode)
A=300 ± 5mV (PAL mode)
Burst level:
B=286 ± 30mV (NTSC mode)
B=300 ± 30mV (PAL mode)
Switch setting:
VIDEO OUT (SETUP 2) ......................................... (NTSC mode)
............................................ (PAL mode)
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
00
01
01 Set the data.
2
3
60
80
C1
70
4
8F
D0
Read the data, and check it is “01”.
Set the data.
01
Change the data and set the sync
level (A) to the specified value.
5
6
80
70
Check that the burst level (B)
satisfies the specified value.
Write the data.
00
7
8
9
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
00
01
00
Set the data.
B
A
H
Fig. 6-1-9.
6-12
DSC-F828
1-4.
2. IRIS Reset Sensor Adjustment
Measuring the iris reset sensor output voltage, and compensate the
dispersion of the reset position detecting voltage.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the
specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT” are
satisfied.
1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the camera system
adjustments.
Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.
So perform this data setting again when the power is turned off.
Procedure
1
2
00
4F
01
B7
01
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
3
4
2F
60
23
C1
11
Set the data.
5
6
80
60
70
6C
01
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
7
8
60
4F
2C
B9
01
Set the data.
Set Bit 0 of the data to “1”.
(Note2)
9
10
7F
7F
0E
6A
20
20
11
12
01
B7
3
4F
B9
4
2F
23
7
01
5E, 5F
00
Specified Value2
80 to FF
1
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
3
4
60
01
5
60
02
6
7
6F
6B
8
6F
5E
80
Set Bit 0 of the data to “0”.
(Note2)
Set the data.
Procedure
Check that “1. Data Setting
during Camera System
Adjustments” is performed.
Check the ZOOM is WIDE end.
2
Set the data.
Set the data.
00
Adjustment Address
Specified Value1
Adjusting method:
6F
Set the data.
Wait for 5 sec.
Read the data, and check it is
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 2 sec.
Read the data, and check it
satisfies the specified value 1.
Note2: The adjustment data will be automatically input to page: 6F,
address: 5E, 5F.
Processing after Completing Adjustments:
Procedure
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
00
6F
Set the data.
Set the data.
01
00
5
6
Adjustment Page
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
After completing the camera system adjustments, release the data
setting.
Procedure
00
4F
Clear chart
Data of page 6F, address: 5E, 6B
Note1: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
01, and set data: 00.
Note2: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2-2. Bit
value discrimination”.
1
2
Subject
Measurement Point
1
2
Set the data.
3
4
6-13
60
01
00
Set the data.
Turn off the power and back on.
Perform “Flange Back Adjustment”.
If finish the camera system
adjustments, release the data
setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during
Camera System Adjustments”.)
DSC-F828
3. Flange Back Adjustment
To adjust the flange back, compensate the dispersion of the zoom
position A/D value at WIDE end and TELE end.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
4. Flange Back Check
6F
Adjustment Address
Specified value1
18 to 3E, 40 to 53
00
Specified value2
0A to 40
Subject
Measurement Point
Siemens star
(1.0m from the front of the lens)
(Luminance : 200 to 400 lux)
Check operation on TV monitor
Specified Value1
The lens is focused.
Specified Value2
Adjusting method:
1
2
60
00
37
3
4
60
01
37
5
6
60
02
7
8
60
60
00
01
Switch setting:
FOCUS ......................................................................... AUTO
Procedure
Checking method:
Set the data.
1
Set the data.
Wait for 4 sec.
2
Wait for 2 sec.
3
4
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
5
Set the ZOOM to the WIDE end.
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
6
60
01
13
12
13
60
01
B1
14
60
02
16
17
60
01
18
19
60
01
20
60
02
21
60
01
22
23
6F
3E
24
6F
24
25
6F
25
15
13
B3
00
Below 8% of diagonal length of the
TV monitor (Note)
Note: Below 40mm when a 21 inches TV monitor is used.
8
9
“01”. (Note2)
Set the ZOOM to the TELE end.
10
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
11
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
60
60
2C
8C
00
30
Set the data.
Set the data.
Shoot the Siemens star with the
zoom TELE end (200).
Check that center of the Siemens
star is located in the center of
the TV monitor screen.
Check that the lens is focused.
60
2C
01
Set the data.
For each of the zoom positions
135, 100, 70, 50 and 35, check
that the lens is focused.
Shoot the Siemens star with the
zoom WIDE end (28).
Check that the lens is focused.
12
Check that distance between the
center of the Siemens star and
the center of the TV monitor
screen satisfies the specified
value2.
“01”. (Note2)
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
Procedure
Place the siemens star 1.0m
from the front of the lens.
7
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
Procedure
1
2
address: 18 to 3E, 40 to 53
Procedure
1
2
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Arbitrary
Data of page: 6F, address: 24, 25, 3E
Adjustment Page
9
10
11
Mode
Perform “Flange Back Check”.
setting.
6-14
60
8C
00
Set the data.
setting.
DSC-F828
Check on an oscilloscope
5. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-450)
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Color bar chart and clear chart
(Standard picture frame)
About 20cm from the front of the lens
Video terminal of A/V OUT jack
Specified Value
Oscilloscope and TV monitor
A=C=B/2, E=F
1. Horizontal period
A=C=
A
B
2
C
B
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Setting method:
Procedure
1
2
Shoot the color bar chart with
the zoom WIDE end.
Adjust the direction and distance
between the pattern box and
camera, and set the picture
frame to the specified position.
3
4
5
Adjust the focus.
Remove the color bar chart and
set the clear chart.
6
Check that the whole of the
screen is white. If not, adjust the
direction and distance slightly.
7
8
10
10
44
Fig. 6-1-10.
2. Vertical period
Read the data, and this data
named YH.
named YL.
45
9
Fig. 6-1-11.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
A
How to reset the focus when it deviated:
If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following
method.
Procedure
2
60
90
00
Set the data.
3
4
60
60
91
92
00
YL
Set the data.
Set the data. (Note)
5
6
60
60
93
01
YH
79
Set the data. (Note)
Set the data.
7
8
60
07
9
60
01
B
Color bar chart picture frame
Fig. 6-1-12.
Wait until the movement of the
lens stops.
00
F
V
Perform the following
adjustments.
1
E=F
E
Set the data.
Note: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.
6-15
C
DSC-F828
Check on an oscilloscope
6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
9 colors chart and clear chart
(Standard picture frame) (Note1)
Specified Value
Oscilloscope and TV monitor
A=B, C=B/3
1. Horizontal period
A=B
A
B
A
Note1: Check that the transparent window is in the lower right.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Setting method:
Procedure
1
2
Shoot the 9 colors chart with
the zoom WIDE end.
Adjust the direction and distance
between the pattern box and
camera, and set the picture
frame to the specified position.
3
4
5
8
2. Vertical period
10
10
44
C=
9
C
B
3
V
Fig. 6-1-14.
named YH.
named YL.
45
B
C
Adjust the focus.
Remove the 9 colors chart and
set the clear chart.
screen is white. If not, adjust the
direction and distance slightly.
6
7
Fig. 6-1-13.
Check on the monitor TV (Underscanned mode)
on the LCD screen
A=B
Perform the following
adjustments.
C=
B
3
C14 : Filter for AWB 5800K adjustment
How to reset the focus when it deviated:
If the focus deviated due to some reason reset it in the following
method.
Procedure
1
2
60
90
00
Set the data.
3
4
60
60
91
92
00
YL
Set the data.
Set the data. (Note2)
5
6
60
60
93
01
YH
79
Set the data. (Note2)
Set the data.
7
8
60
07
9
60
01
A
C
lens stops.
00
A
B
Green
Yellow
W14
Cyan
White
Red
C14
Blue
Magenta
B
C
Set the data.
Transparent window
Note2: YH and YL are the data read in the “Setting method”.
Fig. 6-1-15.
6-16
A
2
DSC-F828
7. Color Shade Check
7-2.
Color Shade Check
Compensate the color shade.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) ( P )
7-1.
Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”
Install the adjustment software “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” in the
PC.
System requirements of the PC:
OS
: Windows98/98SE/Me/2000/XP
RAM : Recommend 256MB or higher
USB : USB2.0 or USB1.1 (USB2.0 is recommended. Two USB
connectors are required.)
Subject
Adjustment Page
Clear chart (PTB-1450)
6F
Adjustment Address
06, 07
Note1: Check that there are no reflections on the clear chart.
Installing the “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ”:
1) Extract “828matrix.zip” file and obtain “Setup.exe” file.
2) Start up the “Setup.exe” and install the “F828 C1 MATRIX
ADJ”.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
1) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System
2) Start the F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ on the PC.
3) Click [Connect] on the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment screen.
If the connection is normal, the F828 C1 MATRIX Adjustment
screen will be as shown in bellow, indicating the “connected”
state
4) Check that the picture frame is the standard picture frame.
5) Click [Color Shading Adjustment] on the F828 C1 MATRIX
Adjustment screen.
Note1: Contact our service headquarter of each area how to get the
“828matrix.zip” file.
Note2: For “F828 C1 MATRIX ADJ” adjustment software’s operating,
the following two conditions need to be satisfied.
• The application for adjustment (SEUS) is already installed in
the PC.
• The PC is equipped with the HASP key.
Fig. 6-1-16.
6)
Color shading adjustment is performed automatically.
Fig. 6-1-17.
7)
When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.
Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-18.
8)
6-17
If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)
DSC-F828
8. F No. Compensation
Adjusted the dispersion of the iris to every to every F number, and
compensate the exposure.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
9. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment
Adjust the dispersion of the opening/closing time and the closing
loss rate of the mechanical shutter. and compensate the exposure.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Measurement Point
Clear chart (PTB-1450/PTB-450)
Data of page: 6F, address: 6B
Subject
Adjustment Page
6F
Adjustment Page
6F
Adjustment Address
Specified value
60 to 64, 6B to 6D
00
Adjustment Address
Specified value
6B to 6D, B8 to D7
00
Measurement Point
Data of page: 6F, address: 6B
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
2
3
60
01
4
5
60
02
6
6F
6B
BB
Procedure
1
Check the picture frame. If
deviated, perform “5. or 6.
Picture Frame Setting”.
Set the data.
2
Wait for 15 sec.
“01”. (Note2)
4
3
address: 60 to 64, 6B to 6D.
60
01
5
60
02
6
6F
6B
AD
Set the data.
shutter stops.
“01”. (Note2)
address: 6B to 6D, B8 to D7.
Procedure
1
60
01
00 Set the data.
2
Procedure
1
60
01
00 Set the data.
setting.
2
6-18
setting.
DSC-F828
10. Light Value Adjustment
Adjust the standard LV value.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Data of page: 10, address: 0C, 0D
Adjustment Page
Data of page: 6F, address: 65
6F
Adjustment Address
Specified value1
65 to 67
0FE0 to 1020
Specified value2
40 to 60
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
1
Procedure
2
3
4
60
01
0D
5
60
02
“01”. (Note2)
6
10
0C
7
10
0D
Read the data, and this data is
named D0C.
named D0D.
8
Calculate DLV using the
following equation
(Hexadecimal calculation)
DLV = D0C × 100 + D0D
Check that DLV satisfies the
specified value1.
10
11
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
6F
65
satisfies the specified value2.
address: 65 to 67.
Procedure
1
2
60
01
00
Set the data.
setting.
6-19
DSC-F828
11. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment
9)
11-1. Preparation (Get Reference Data)
In this work, acquire a reference data for the liner matrix adjustment
using a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally. And saves the
data in the inside of the PC. Therefore, if the same pattern box
and the same 9 colors chart are used, it is not necessary to
perform “Get Reference Data” again. The reference data
(GodRawData.CSV) is saved in the ProgramFiles\Sony\
F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Acquisition of the reference data is performed automatically.
Note3: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the
picture frame, and repeat from step 8).
9 colors chart (PTB-1450)
Note1: When the reference data is acquired using a non-adjusted camera.
The linear matrix adjustment cannot be performed correctly.
Fig. 6-1-20.
10) When the “Completion of get reference data” message is
displayed. Click the [OK] button.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
MACRO ............................................................................ ON
FOCUS .................................................................. MANUAL
Adjusting method:
1) Prepare a DSC-F828 camera that operates normally, and this
camera is named a reference camera.
2) Remove the camera under adjustment and installed the
reference camera instead.
3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.
4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer
to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.
5) Adjust the focus..
8) Click [Get Reference Data] of the file menu of the F828 C1
MATRIX Adjustment screen.
Fig. 6-1-21.
11) Remove the reference camera and installed the camera under
adjustment instead.
Note2: When the “File over write” message is displayed, a reference data
file (GodRawData.CSV) exists already in the Program Files\Sony\
F828C1MATRIX holder of the C drive. If you want to save this
file, rename it or move it to other holder.
Fig. 6-1-19.
6-20
DSC-F828
11-2. Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment
This adjustment does the following adjustment items automatically.
Linear matrix adjustment
Compensate the dispersion of the linear matrix vale of the
CCD imager.
AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input
Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K
in monitoring mode.
AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input
Acquire the white balance standard data at 3200K and 5800K
in capture mode.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
9)
The following adjustments are performed automatically.
Linear matrix adjustment
AWB 3200K/5800K (Mon) standard data input
AWB 3200K/5800K (Cap) standard data input
Note: When the “Framing check” message is displayed, correct the picture
frame, and repeat from step 7).
When the “File C:\ProgramFiles\Sony\F828C1MATRIX\
GodRawData.CSV can not be open” message is displayed, the
reference data file (GodRawData.CSV) for the liner matrix
adjustment is not in the inside of the PC. Therefore, perform “11-1.
Preparation (Get Reference Data)”.
6E
80 to 9F (Linear matrix adjustment)
04 to 21, 24 to 49 (AWB 3200K/
5800K standard data input)
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
1) Install the camera for adjustment.
2) Check that “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”
is performed.
3) Set up the switches of the reference camera as above-mentioned.
4) Shoot the 9 colors chart with the standard picture frame. (Refer
to “6. Picture Frame Setting (PTB-1450)”.
5) Adjust the focus..
8) Click [Linear Matrix and AWB Adjustment] on the F828 C1
MATRIX Adjustment screen.
Fig. 6-1-23.
Fig. 6-1-24.
10) When the “Completion of adjustment” message is displayed.
Click the [OK] button.
Fig. 6-1-22.
Fig. 6-1-25.
11) If finish the camera system adjustments, release the data setting.
(See “1. Data Setting during Camera System Adjustments”.)
6-21
DSC-F828
12. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Normal mode)
Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that
proper color reproduction is produced.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Specified Value
For CAP-Normal mode
Color bar chart (PTB-450)
NTSC vectorscope
Each center of six color luminance
points should settle within each color
reproduction frame.
Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Burst position
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
2
3
7A
18
4
5
6
7A
60
60
18
37
01
Fig. 6-1-26.
Read the data, and memorize it.
00
39
AB
Set the data.
Set the data.
Set the data.
7
8
Wait for 1 sec.
Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of
the vectorscope so that the burst
luminance point is set at the
specified position.
9
Check that each center of six
color luminance points is set in
each color reproduction frame.
Procedure
1
2
3
4
5
60
7A
60
01
18
37
00
Set the data.
Set the data memorized at
“Adjusting method”.
Wait for 1 sec.
Perform “Color Reproduction
Check”.
setting.
6-22
DSC-F828
13. Color Reproduction Check (CAP-Real mode)
Adjust the color reproduction of yellow, red, blue and cyan so that
proper color reproduction is produced.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Specified Value
For CAP-Real mode
Color bar chart (PTB-450)
NTSC vectorscope
Each center of six color luminance
points should settle within each color
reproduction frame.
Note: If the data of page: 60, address: 02 is “01”, select page: 60, address:
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Burst position
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
2
3
60
57
01
Set the data.
4
5
6
7A
7A
60
24
24
37
00
39
Set the data.
Set the data.
7
8
60
01
AB
9
Fig. 6-1-27.
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
Adjust the GAIN and PHASE of
the vectorscope so that the burst
luminance point is set at the
specified position.
Check that each center of six
color luminance points is set in
each color reproduction frame.
10
Procedure
1
60
01
00 Set the data.
2
7A
24
3
60
57
4
5
6
60
37
00
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
Perform the next adjustment.
setting.
6-23
DSC-F828
14. CCD Linearity Check
Data picking is done to keep output linearity of the CCD imager,
even if the input level of CCD imager changes.
Mode
STILL(P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Checking method:
1
Data of page: 10, address: 80, 81, 82, 83
2
60
01
3
4
60
E1
5
10
80
10
81
Specified value1
97 to 103 (Note1)
Specified value2
Specified value3
94 to 106 (Note1)
92 to 108 (Note1)
6
Specified value4
Specified value5
97 to 104 (Note1)
94 to 109 (Note1)
7
Specified value6
92 to 112 (Note1)
F9
Wait for 2 sec.
named D80.
named D81.
Calculate DRG0 using the
following equation
DRG0 = D80 × 100 + D81
named D82.
10
82
9
10
83
11
12
60
60
01
E1
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
13
14
77
72
48
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
15
16
17
60
01
F9
60
E1
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
18
10
80
Set the data.
19
10
81
20
named D83.
Calculate DBG0 using the
following equation
DBG0 = D82 × 100 + D83
10
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
1
2
Procedure
Install the clear chart.
3
4
5
75
75
09
09
6
7
77
77
F6
F6
Set Bit2 of the data to “0”. (Note3)
8
9
77
77
F7
F7
10
11
77
77
F2
F2
12
13
77
77
F2
72
14
15
60
60
14
12
16
17
75
75
18
19
04
90
9F
Set the data.
Set the data.
17
17
AA
Set the data.
75
75
18
18
00
Set the data.
20
21
75
75
19
19
E8
Set the data.
22
23
75
75
1A
1A
54
Set the data.
24
25
75
75
1B
1B
74
Set the data.
26
Perform “Preparation” before
this adjustment.
Set the data.
8
Note1: Decimal number.
Note3: For the bit values, refer to “6-2. SERVICE MODE”, “2-2. 2. Bit
value discrimination”.
Preparation:
Procedure
named D80.
named D81.
following equation
DRG1 = D80 × 100 + D81
named D82.
21
10
82
22
10
83
24
25
60
60
01
E1
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
26
27
77
72
0C
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
28
29
60
01
F9
Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
30
31
60
10
E1
80
named D80.
32
10
81
named D81.
named D83.
following equation
DBG1 = D82 × 100 + D83
23
Wait for 2 sec.
6-24
DSC-F828
33
34
10
82
35
10
83
Procedure
37
38
60
60
01
E1
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
39
40
60
77
12
72
A2
06
Set the data.
Set the data.
41
42
60
01
F9
Wait for 2 sec.
Set the data.
60
E1
45
10
80
46
10
81
47
10
82
49
10
83
50
51
52
53
54
56
Check that B/G ratio (2) satisfies
the specified value 5. (Decimal
number)
Linearity check of very low
luminance
57
Check that R/G ratio (3) satisfies
number)
number)
58
Procedure
1
60
01
00 Set the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
named D80.
named D81.
following equation
DRG3 = D80 × 100 + D81
48
Linearity check of low
luminance
number)
55
named D83.
following equation
DBG2 = D82 × 100 + D83
36
43
44
Order Page Address Data Procedure
following equation
DRG2 = D80 × 100 + D81
named D82.
named D82.
named D83.
following equation
DBG3 = D82 × 100 + D83
Convert DRG0, DBG0, DRG1, DBG1,
DRG2, DBG2, DRG3 and DBG3 to
decimal number, and obtain
DRG0’, DBG0’, DRG1’, DBG1’,
DRG2’, DBG2’, DRG3’ and DBG3’.
Calculate R/G ratio (1), B/G ratio
(1), R/G ratio (2), B/G ratio (2),
R/G ratio (3) and B/G ratio (3),
using the following equations
(Decimal calculation)
R/G ratio (1) = (DRG1’/DRG0’) × 100
B/G ratio (1) = (DBG1’/DBG0’) × 100
R/G ratio (2) = (DRG2’/DRG0’) × 100
B/G ratio (2) = (DBG2’/DBG0’) × 100
R/G ratio (3) = (DRG3’/DRG0’) × 100
B/G ratio (3) = (DBG3’/DBG0’) × 100
Linearity check of high
luminance
number)
number)
6-25
2
3
60
60
E1
12
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
60
75
14
09
00
Set the data.
“Preparation”.
6
77
F6
7
77
F7
8
77
F2
9
77
72
10
75
17
11
75
18
12
75
19
13
75
1A
14
75
1B
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
“Preparation”.
15
16
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
17
Perform next adjustments.
setting.
DSC-F828
15. CCD White Defect Compensation Check
The positions of the white defective pixel are detected, and check
that the pixels can be corrected.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Procedure
Data of page: 60, address: 55
Specified value 1
00 to 40
Specified value 2
00
Note2: The white defective pixels are influenced by temperature.
Therefore, perform adjustment after the power is turned on, and
sufficient time passes, and the camera gets warm.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
1
Procedure
2
3
7D
64
4
5
7D
7D
64
69
1E
Read the data, and memorize
the data.
Set the data.
Read the data, and memorize the
data.
6
7
7D
60
69
01
28
8B
Set the data.
Set the data.
8
9
60
02
10
60
55
11
60
01
Wait for about 20 sec.
00
Set the data.
64
0F
Wait for 1 sec.
Set the data.
69
01
C0
87
Set the data.
Set the data.
12
13
7D
14
15
7D
60
16
17
60
02
18
60
55
“01”.
6-26
1
2
60
01
3
7D
64
4
7D
69
00
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
5
6
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
7
setting.
DSC-F828
16. CCD Black Defect Compensation Check
The positions of the black defective pixel are detected, and check
that the pixels can be corrected. And confirms that there is no trash
in the surface of the CCD imager, the optical filter and the inside of
the lens.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Procedure
Specified value 1
00 to 30
Specified value 2
00
Note1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and no reflection on the clear
chart.
01, and Set data: 00.
Switch setting:
ZOOM ....................................................................... 70 (mm)
Adjusting method:
1
2
3
4
5
Procedure
7D
7D
60
65
65
2C
0A
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
60
92
00
Rotate ZOOM ring and set the
ZOOM to “70” position.
Set the data.
8
9
60
60
93
01
00
79
Set the data.
Set the data.
10
11
60
30
08
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
12
13
60
07
14
15
60
01
16
60
02
17
60
55
18
19
60
01
00
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
20
21
7D
60
65
01
0E
89
Set the data.
Set the data.
22
23
60
02
24
60
55
screen is white.
8D
Set the data.
“01”.
If the data is “00”, proceed to
“Processing after Completing
Adjustments”
6-27
1
2
60
01
00
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
3
4
60
60
2C
30
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
5
7D
65
6
Save the data.
7
8
Wait for 2sec.
Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.
9
setting.
DSC-F828
17. Strobe Adjustment
Adjust the light level and white balance when the strobe light flashes.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Background paper (J-2501-130-A)
(50cm from the front of the lens)
Data of page 6F, address: DC
Adjustment Page
Data of page 6E, address: 4F
6F
6E
Adjustment Address
Specified Value1
D8 to EF
03 to 09
Specified Value2
00
Procedure
72 to 75
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash
adjustment box.
Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.
Note3: After the power is turned on, this adjustment can be done only
once.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
FLASH ......................................................................... OPEN
Adjusting method:
1
Procedure
2
3
60
60
2C
92
01
FF
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
60
60
93
6C
FF
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
60
01
79
Set the data.
Wait for 5 sec.
8
9
60
6E
07
4F
FF
10
11
60
01
B9
12
60
02
13
6F
D8
14
15
60
01
16
17
60
ED
18
19
60
01
20
21
60
6F
02
D8
22
6F
DC
23
6E
4F
Set the data.
Set the data.
Check the flashing.
“01”. (Note5)
00
Set the data.
Wait for 5 sec.
Wait for 1 sec.
E7
Set the data.
Check the flashing.
address: D8 to EF, and to page: 6E, address: 72 to 75.
6-28
1
2
60
60
01
2C
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
3
4
60
60
6C
92
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
5
6
60
93
00
Set the data.
setting.
DSC-F828
18. AF Laser Output Adjustment
Adjust the AF laser output power.
Mode
STILL (P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Background paper (J-2501-130-A).
(50cm from the front of the lens)
Data of page 6F, address: 13
Adjustment Page
6F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
10 to 16
00
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room or use the flash
adjustment box.
Note2: Any light other than the strobe light should not light up the plate.
Switch setting:
ZOOM .................................................................... WIDE end
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
2
3
6F
6F
10
15
20
48
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
60
01
AF
Write the data.
Check that the AF laser is lit.
6
7
60
02
8
6F
13
Wait for 8 sec.
“01”. (Note3)
address: 10 to 16.
Procedure
1
60
01
00 Write the data.
2
setting.
6-29
DSC-F828
19. AF Laser Axis Check
Check the AF laser optical axis.
Mode
STILL(P AUTO) (P)
Subject
Measurement Point
Specified Value
Background paper (J-2501-130-A)
(1m from the front of the lens)
Monitor TV (under scan)
All hologram patterns are within the
inspection frame.
Note1: Perform this adjustment in the dark room.
Preparations:
1) Take a copy of the AF Laser axis frame with a clear sheet.
(Reduce or enlarge the frame in same size as the effective picture
frame of the monitor TV.)
Fig. 6-1-28.
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
2
3
60
60
30
2C
06
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
60
92
05
Set the ZOOM to WIDE end.
Set the data.
6
7
60
60
93
01
70
79
Set the data.
Write the data.
8
9
10
60
60
07
01
00
Wait for 3 sec.
Write the data.
11
12
60
60
22
23
05
0A
Set the data.
Set the data.
13
15
16
60
60
92
93
05
70
Set the data.
Set the data.
17
18
60
01
79
Write the data.
Wait for 3 sec.
19
20
60
60
07
58
01
Set the data.
21
22
60
60
14
01
8A
00
Set the data.
Write the data.
1
2
60
60
14
22
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
3
4
60
60
23
2C
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
5
6
60
60
30
58
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
7
8
60
60
92
93
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
9
Check that all hologram patterns
are within the inspection frame.
(Fig. 6-1-15.)
Set the ZOOM to TELE end.
14
23
Procedure
Check that all hologram patterns
are not unfocused.
6-30
setting.
DSC-F828
1-5.
2. EVF Initial Data Input
Mode
PLAY (
COLOR ELECTRONIC VIEWFINDER
ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages
caused by static electricity.
Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control
switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A.
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF.
Note: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.
00
80
01
70
01
01
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data.
After completing the EVF system adjustments, release the data
setting.
Procedure
1
80
70
00 Set the data.
2
3
4
00
01
00
Arbitrary
8F
Adjustment Address
70, 71, 73 to 78, 7A, 7C
Address
70
71
73
74
75
76
77
78
7A
7C
1. Data Setting during EVF System Adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the EVF system
adjustments.
1
2
Signal
Adjustment Page
Adjusting method:
2) Select page: 8F, and set the data in the following table.
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2sec.
Switch setting:
FINDER/LCD .......................................................... FINDER
)
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
Set the data.
6-31
Data
53
96
80
A4
8D
40
00
90
80
38
Remark
Fixed data
Fixed data
VCO adj.
V COM adj.
Bright adj.
Fixed data
Fixed data
White balance adj.
White balance adj.
Contrast adj.
DSC-F828
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
73
01
4. Bright Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified
value. If deviated, the screen image will be blackish or saturated
(whitish).
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
75
01
Note1: A memory stick must be inserted.
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
during EVF System
2
3
8F
80
84
00
2F
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
01
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
9
10
02
Procedure
1
during EVF System
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
8F
80
88
00
9F
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
03
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
02
9
10
If finish the EVF system
setting.
EVF System Adjustments”.)
Note2: If the data is other than “01”, adjustment has errors. See the
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
2
3
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
setting.
following table.
Contents of adjustment error
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
Normally finished
Reached an upper limit
Reached a lower limit
Time out
Out of adjustment range
Adjustment is impossible
6-32
Normally finished
Time out
DSC-F828
5. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board)
(whitish).
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
7C
01
6. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
specified value.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
74
01
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
during EVF System
2
3
8F
80
89
00
44
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
05
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
9
10
02
Procedure
1
during EVF System
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
setting.
8F
80
8C
00
03
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
07
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
02
9
10
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
2
3
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
setting.
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
Normally finished
Time out
6-33
Normally finished
Time out
DSC-F828
7. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Check on LCD display
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
78, 7A
The EVF screen should not be
colored.
Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.
Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC902
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
during EVF System
2
3
80
80
71
89
52
02
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
8F
8F
78
7A
90
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
8F
78
Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
proceed to step 10.
7
8F
78
8
8F
7A
Change the data so that the LCD
screen is not colored.
9
8F
7A
10
80
71
FF
If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 7 to 9.
Set the data.
11
12
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
13
setting.
6-34
DSC-F828
1-6.
2. LCD Initial Data Input
LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT
Note1: When replacing the LCD unit, be careful to prevent damages
caused by static electricity.
Note2: If you perform the adjustments with FINDER/LCD switch (Control
switch block (UNDER)) removed, set the following data.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: 1A.
Reset the data after completing adjustment.
1) Select page: 80, address: 10, and set data: FF.
1. Data Setting during LCD System Adjustments
Perform the following data setting before the LCD system
adjustments.
00
80
01
70
01
01
Procedure
Set the data.
Set the data.
After completing the LCD system adjustments, release the data
setting.
Procedure
1
80
70
00 Set the data.
2
3
4
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
00
01
00
Signal
Adjustment Page
Arbitrary
8F
Adjustment Address
20, 21, 23 to 28, 2A, 2C
Address
20
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
2A
2C
Note1: When the power is turned off, some data settings will be released.
1
2
PLAY (
)
Adjusting method:
2) Select page: 8F, and write the data in the following table.
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2sec.
Switch setting:
FINDER/LCD ................................................................. LCD
Mode
Set the data.
6-35
Data
A5
19
80
76
84
00
63
90
80
72
Remark
Fixed data
Fixed data
VCO adj.
VCOM adj.
Fixed data
Fixed data
Fixed data
White balance adj.
White balance adj.
Contrast adj.
DSC-F828
3. VCO Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will
be blurred.
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
23
01
4. Contrast Adjustment (SY-096 board)
(whitish).
Mode
PLAY (
)
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
2C
01
Adjusting method:
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
during LCD System
2
3
8F
80
34
00
1D
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
01
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
9
10
02
Procedure
1
during LCD System
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
8F
80
39
00
80
00
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
80
80
02
01
00
01
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
7
80
00
05
Set the data.
Wait for 1 sec.
8
80
02
9
10
If finish the LCD system
setting.
LCD System Adjustments”.)
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
2
3
“01”. (Note2)
Wait for 1 sec.
setting.
following table.
Data of page: 80,
address: 02
01
10
20
30
40
50
Normally finished
Time out
6-36
Normally finished
Time out
DSC-F828
5. V COM Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the
specified value.
If deviated, the LCD display will move, producing flicker and
conspicuous vertical lines.
Mode
PLAY (
Subject
Measurement Point
Arbitrary
Adjustment Page
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
6. White Balance Adjustment (SY-096 board)
Correct the white balance.
If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.
)
8F
24
The brightness difference between the
section A and section B is minimum.
Adjusting method:
Procedure
1
during LCD System Adjustments” is performed.
80
8F
71
41
4
8F
24
76
23
Set the data.
Set the data.
Change the data so that the
brightness of the section A and
that of the section B is equal.
Set the data.
5
80
71
FF
6
7
8
8F
41
21
9
A
B
B
A
A
B
)
Adjustment Page
8F
Adjustment Address
Specified Value
28, 2A
The LCD screen should not be colored.
Procedure
1
during LCD System Adjustments” is performed.
If finish the LCD system adjustments, release the data setting.
A
Arbitrary
Adjusting method:
Set the data.
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
B
PLAY (
Subject
Measurement Point
Note1: Use the AC power adaptor during this adjustment.
Note2: Check the white balance only when replacing the following parts.
If necessary, adjust them.
1. LCD panel
2. Light induction plate
3. IC801
Note: A memory stick must be inserted.
2
3
Mode
Fig. 6-1-16.
6-37
2
3
80
80
71
84
52
02
Set the data.
Set the data.
4
5
8F
8F
28
2A
90
80
Set the data.
Set the data.
6
8F
28
Check that the LCD screen is
not colored. If not colored,
proceed to step 10.
7
8F
28
8
8F
2A
9
8F
2A
10
80
71
FF
If the LCD screen is colored,
repeat steps 7 to 9.
Set the data.
11
12
Save the data.
Wait for 2 sec.
13
setting.
DSC-F828
6-2. SERVICE MODE
2. Operation
2-1.
•
Page change
To change the page, click [Page] on the SEUS screen and enter
the page to be changed. The page is displayed in hexadecimal
notation.
•
Address change
To change the address, click [Address] on the SEUS screen
and enter the address to be changed. Or click [B] to increase
the address, click [b] to decrease the address. The address is
displayed in hexadecimal notation.
•
Data change
To change the data, click [Set] on the SEUS screen and enter
the data. Or click [v] to increase the data, click [V] to decrease
the data. The data is displayed in hexadecimal notation.
This operation does not write the data to the nonvolatile
memory. If you want to write the changed data, click [Save] to
write it.
•
Data saving
To write the all changed data to the nonvolatile memory,
click [Save] on the SEUS screen. and wait for 2 sec.
APPLICATION FOR ADJUSTMENT (SEUS)
The application for adjustment (SEUS) is used for changing the
calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The SEUS
performs bi-directional communication between the personal
computer (PC) and the unit using the USB signal. The resultant
data of this bi-directional communication is written in the nonvolatile memory.
2-1-1. Using Method of SEUS
Switch setting:
MS/CF ..................................................... MS (Memory stick)
1. Connection
1) Connect the HASP key to the USB port of the PC.
2) Connect the camera to another USB port of the PC.
3) Insert a memory stick to the camera.
4) Confirm that the camera starts in the USB mode.
5) Start the SEUS on the PC.
6) Click [Connect] on the SEUS screen. If the connection is
normal, the SEUS screen will be as shown in Fig. 6-2-1,
indicating the “connected” state.
Note: The SEUS will go in “disconnect” state, if the camera is turned off
(for instance, by resetting the unit). In such a case, click [Connect]
on the SEUS screen to restore the “connected” state.
Note: Even if [Write] or [Store] on the SEUS screen is clicked, the
data can not be write to the nonvolatile memory.
•
Data reading
The data displayed on the SEUS screen are the data values at
the time when the pages and addresses were set, and they are
not updated automatically. To check the data change, click
[Read] on the SEUS screen and update the displayed data.
2-1-2. Precaution on Use of SEUS
Mishandling of the SEUS may erase the correct adjustment data at
times. To prevent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data
be saved before beginning adjustments.
1)
2)
3)
4)
Fig. 6-2-1.
6-38
Click [Page Edit] on the SEUS screen.
Click [Page], and enter the page number to be saved.
Click [Read] to read the data to be saved from the camera.
Click [File] and save the data to the PC.
DSC-F828
2-2.
2. Bit value discrimination
Bit values must be discriminated using the hexadecimal data for
following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value
is “1” or “0”.
SERVICE MODE
1. Setting the Test Mode
Page 2F
Address 23
•
•
•
Data
80
Function
Normal
11
12
Forced STILL mode power ON
Forced PLAY mode power ON
04
Forced MOVIE mode power ON
Hexadecimal data
Before setting the data, select page: 00, address: 01, and set
data: 01.
For page 2F, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory
by saving data. In this case, take note that the test mode will
not be exited even when the main power is turned off.
After completing adjustments/repairs, release the data setting .
2) Select page: 2F, address: 23, and set data: 80.
3) Save the data.
4) Wait for 2 sec.
bit3 to bit0 discrimination
bit7 to bit4 discrimination
Display on the
adjustment
remote
commander
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A
8
9
A (A)
B (b)
C (c)
D (d)
E (E)
B
F (F )
bit3
or
bit7
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bit values
bit2
bit1
or
or
bit6
bit5
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
bit0
or
bit4
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Examples: If the hexadecimal data is “8E”, the bit values for bit7 to bit4
are shown in the A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0
are shown in the B column.
6-39
DSC-F828
3. Switch check (1)
Page 20
Bit
0
Address 80
Function
POWER switch (XPWER ON) (Control switch block (TOP))
When bit value=1 When bit value=0
OFF
ON
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, address: 80.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the bit value of the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
4. Switch check (2)
Page 20
Address 90 to 96
Using method:
1) Select page: 20, address: 90 to 96.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the pressed key can be discriminated.
Address
90
(KEY AD0)
(IC401 J6 )
91
(KEY AD1)
(IC401 H6 )
92
(KEY AD2)
(IC401 G6 )
93
(KEY AD3 )
(IC401 J7 )
94
(KEY AD4)
(IC401 H7 )
95
(MODE DIAL 0)
(IC401 J8 )
96
(MODE DIAL 1)
(IC401 J9 )
00 to 0B
Control button
DOWN
(Control switch
block (MID))
S008
Control button
RIGHT
(Control switch
block (MID))
S003
QUICK REVIEW
(Control switch
block (UNDER))
S005
OPEN (FLASH)
(SW-410 board)
(S001)
NIGHT SHOT/
NIGHT FRAMING
(SW-410 board)
(S007)
Mode dial
STILL (AE-S)
(Control switch
block (TOP))
Mode dial
STILL (AUTO)
(Control switch
block (TOP))
5. Switch check (3)
Page 60
0C to 26
Control button
UP
(Control switch
block (MID))
S006
Control button
LEFT
(Control switch
block (MID))
S010
DIGITAL ZOOM
(Control switch
block (UNDER))
S004
FLASH
(SW-410 board)
(S002)
27 to 47
DISPLAY WINDOW
BACKLIGHT
(Control switch
block (TOP))
S003
Control button
CENTER
(Control switch
block (MID))
S007
SELF TIMER
(Control switch
block (UNDER))
S003
METERING MODE
(SW-410 board)
(S005)
Data
48 to 72
73 to A4
A5 to DC
DD to FF
WHITE
COMPACT
MEMORY
EXPOSURE
BALANCE
FLASH
STICK
(Control switch (Control switch (Control switch (Control switch
block (TOP)) block (UNDER)) block (UNDER))
block (TOP))
S005
S004
S006
S006
AE LOCK
MENU
(Control switch (Control switch
block (MID))
block (MID))
S012
S002
SCREEN STATUS
FINDER
(Control switch
(Control switch
block (UNDER))
block (UNDER))
S002
S001
MACRO
BURST/BRACKET FOCUS AUTO
(SW-410 board) (SW-410 board) (SW-410 board)
(S006)
(S003)
(S004)
No key input
LCD
(Control switch
block (UNDER))
S001
FOCUS MANUAL
(SW-410 board)
(S004)
No key input
Mode dial
Mode dial
STILL (AE-A) STILL (MANUAL)
block (TOP))
block (TOP))
Mode dial
Mode dial
STILL (P AUTO)
PB
block (TOP))
block (TOP))
Mode dial
Mode dial
STILL (SCN)
MOVIE
block (TOP))
block (TOP))
Mode dial
SET UP
(Control switch
block (TOP))
Address B9
Function
FLASH OPEN DETECT switch (LS-067 board S001)
When data = 11 When data = 01
Close
Open
Using method:
1) Select page: 60, address: B9.
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
6-40
No key input
No key input
DSC-F828
6. Switch check (4)
Page 80
Address 13
Function
When data = 00 When data = 01 When data = 02
Shutter button (XAE LOCK SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF
ON
ON
Shutter button (XSHTR ON SW) (Control switch block (TOP)) OFF
OFF
ON
Using method:
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.
7. Switch check (5)
Page 80
Address 14
Function
CF COVER switch (Control switch block (CENTER))
When data = 00 When data = 01
Open
Close
Using method:
2) Read the data. By discriminating the data, the state of the switch can be discriminated.
8. Switch check (6)
Page 80
Address 15
Using method:
2) By discriminating the data, the rotation of the control dial can be discriminated.
Control dial (Control switch block (CENTER))
When rotated in the left direction.
When rotated in the right direction.
Data
01
02
9. LED, Segment LCD check
Page 20
Address 04
Page 80
Page 8E
Address 12
Address FE
Using method:
1) Select page: 00, address: 01, set data: 01.
3) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 20.
6) Check that all LED (Power, Charge, Tally, Access, Segment LCD back light) are lit.
8) Check that all segment of the segment LCD are lit.
11) Select page: 8E, address: FE, set data: 00.
6-41
DSC-F828
10. Record of Use check
Page 4F
Address 94 to 97
Address
Function
94
Recording counter
95
(Hexadecimal)
96
97
Remarks
1000000-digit and 1000000-digit
Using method:
1) The recording counter data is displayed at page: 4F, addresses: 94 to 97. These data are named D94, D95, D96 and D97 respectively.
2) Calculate the recording counter (N) using following equation. (Hexadecimal calculation)
N = D97 + D96 × 100 + D95 × 10000 + D94 × 1000000
11. Self Diagnostics Log check
Page 20
Address B0 to B8
Address Initial value
B0
00
B1
00
B2
00
B3
00
B4
00
B5
00
B6
00
B7
00
B8
00
Function
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 1st time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 1st time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 1st time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 2nd time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 2nd time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 2nd time)
“Repaired by” code (Occurred 3rd time) *1
“Block function” code (Occurred 3rd time)
“Detailed” code (Occurred 3rd time)
*1: “C” t “01”, “E” t “03”
Using method:
1) The self diagnostics log is displayed at page: 20, addresses: B0 to B5.
Note: These data will be erased when the lithium battery (LR-018 board) is removed.
6-42
DSC-F828
〈FOR
CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT〉
For CAP-Normal mode
Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR
REPRODUCTION FRAME with
a clear sheet for use.
✂
✂
For CAP-Real mode
— 43 —
DSC-F828
ILLUMINATION FRAME〉
Take a copy of AF
ILLUMINATION FRAME
with a clear sheet for use.
— 44E —
✂
〈AF

Assist Document - SONYRUS :: OnLine Store

Transcription

Similar documents

Digital SLR Camera Basics Learning Objectives Digital Single

The Portable DC Jackrabbitpack ll

COBRACAM PRO

ximea mq022

ADVANTAGE 1.0

photographic accessories

TIS 1900 - Test Instrument Solutions

SF17002 - MicroBruteARMBoard

How to adjust DeVlieg@ Micro-AdjustrM Standard Boring Bars

Tutorial: LG DVD-ROM Drive GDR-8163B into a Xbox with full media